Accounting

9.2. Accounting

Worksheet #

The worksheet system parameters determine how the Worksheet Identifiers are allocated and also affect the way worksheets behave.

  1. Select System Administrators from SICS Workstation desktop.
  2. Open System Parameter Maintenance.
  3. Select the Accounting tab.
  4. Select the Worksheet tab.

System_Parameter_Accounting_Worksheet_25.1.PNG

Create New Worksheet Identifier Series #

If a Worksheet Identifier Series is not defined for a worksheet type and you want to book on the worksheet type, a new series has to be created.

  1. Select the Worksheet subtab from the Accounting system parameter tabs.

  2. Select the Edit button and select New from the pop-up menu in the Worksheet Identifier Series display list. Or, select New from the pop-up menu in the Worksheet Identifier Series display area. The Identifier window appears.

  3. Define a ‘Prefix’ and ‘Minimum/Maximum Numbers’ for the new series.

  4. If you want the ‘Booking Year’ to be a part of the Worksheet Identifier, select the check box and define a Booking Year in the respective fields.

  5. Select OK to save and establish your Identifier series.

Note! You must also specify the Type of Worksheet to which the Identifier series is to be allocated. Refer to the chapter_Define Type of Worksheet for a Worksheet Identifier series_.

View the Worksheet Identifier Series #

The defined values of the different Worksheet Identifier series can be viewed in detail.

  1. Select the Worksheet tab from the Accounting System Parameter tabs.
  2. Select the Identifier Series that you want to view.
  3. Select View from the pop-up menu.
  4. An Identifier window appears with the defined values of the Identifier series.

Edit the Worksheet Identifier Series #

If you want to maintain the values of an Identifier series, e.g. increase the maximum number of the series or change the Booking Year, you are allowed to edit certain values of the Identifier series.

  1. Select the Worksheet tab from the Accounting System Parameter tabs.
  2. Select the Identifier Series that you want to maintain.
  3. Select Edit from the pop-up menu.
  4. An Identifier window appears with the defined values of the Identifier series.
  5. Maintain the values of the enabled fields, i.e. Maximum Number, Last Used Number, Active and/or Booking Year as Part of Worksheet Identifier/Booking Year.
  6. Select OK to save your changes.

Delete Worksheet Identifier Series #

You are allowed to delete an Identifier series. This may be necessary if the Identifier series is no longer in use or it has been created by mistake.

  1. Select the Worksheet tab from the Accounting System Parameter tabs.
  2. Select the Identifier Series that you want to delete.
  3. Select Delete from the pop-up menu.

The Identifier series is removed from the Worksheet Identifier Series display list.

2_identifier_new.png

Field Description
Prefix Indicate a value defining the first position(s) of the worksheet identifier. The prefix can for instance indicate to which Type of Worksheet the Identifier series is allocated, e g. use ‘R’ for Remittance Worksheet Type

Values: Numbers and Letters

Applicable for: P&C
Minimum Number The first number of the Worksheet Identifier series

Values: Numbers

Applicable for: P&C
Maximum Number The highest number to be produced from the Worksheet Identifier series

Values: Numbers

Applicable for: P&C
Last Used Number The latest number used from the Worksheet Identifier series

Values: Numbers

Applicable for: P&C
Active Indicates whether the Identifier series is in use or not

Values: Active/Inactive

Default: Active

Applicable for: P&C
System Generated Indicates whether the Identifier is generated by the System or manually

Values: Active (only valid value)

Applicable for: P&C
Booking Year as Part of Worksheet Identifier Indicates whether a Booking Year is included as part of the Identifier series or not

Values: Active/Inactive

Default: Inactive

Functional Impact: If activated, the Booking Year field becomes available

Applicable for: P&C
Booking Year The Booking Year to be included as part of the Identifier when applied to the worksheet. (Note: You have to manually change to the next year when the defined booking year is closed.)

Values: A Year value indicated by 4 digits

Applicable for: P&C
Used by application Which System the series applies for

Values: P&C, Life

Default: The system in which you are currently working

Create Type of Worksheet for a New Worksheet Identifier Series #

Each Identifier series has to be allocated to a Type of Worksheet, e.g. Remittance, Technical Account.

  1. Select the Worksheet tab from the Accounting System Parameter tabs.
  2. Select the new Identifier Series for which you want to define a Type of Worksheet.
  3. Select New from the pop-up menu of the Type of Worksheet display area.
  4. The Accounting Worksheet Identifier Rule window appears.
  5. Select one or more of the available Types of Worksheets.
  6. Click OK to save your selection.

Note! If another active Identifier series is already using the selected Type of Worksheet, you are not allowed to select it again.

Edit Type of Worksheet for Identifier Series #

You can maintain Type(s) of Worksheet selected for an Identifier series. If you for instance have inactivated an identifier series, the selected Type of Worksheet should be removed, i.e. and made available for another active Identifier series.

  1. Select the Worksheet tab from the Accounting System Parameter tabs.
  2. Select the Identifier Series for which you want to maintain the selected Type(s) of Worksheet.
  3. The Type(s) of Worksheet is displayed in the Type of Worksheet display area.
  4. Select Edit from the pop-up menu of the Type of Worksheet display area.
  5. The Accounting Worksheet Identifier Rule window appears in edit mode.
  6. Change the selected Type of worksheet values and click OK to save your changes.

View Type of Worksheet for Identifier Series #

You can view the selected and available Type(s) of Worksheet for an Identifier series.

  1. Select the Worksheet tab from the Accounting System Parameter tabs.
  2. Select the Identifier Series for which you want to view the selected Type(s) of Worksheet.
  3. The Type(s) of Worksheet is displayed in the Type of Worksheet display area.
  4. Select Edit from the pop-up menu of the Type of Worksheet display area.
  5. The Accounting Worksheet Identifier Rule window appears displaying the available and selected Types of Worksheet in view mode.

3_accounting_worksheet_identifier_rule_new.png

Field Description
Available Worksheet Types available for selection when applying a worksheet type to an Identifier series

Values: Account Balance, Claim, Post Balance, Remittance, Retrocession, Settlement Balance, Technical Account and Unallocated Remittance. In the SICS Life System also Cession is available

Applicable for: P&C, Life
Selected The type(s) of worksheet selected for an Identifier series

Values: Account Balance, Claim, Post Balance, Remittance, Retrocession, Settlement Balance, Technical Account and Unallocated Remittance. In the SICS Life System also Cession is available

Applicable for: P&C, Life
Retrocession Worksheet for Assigned Businesses Selected: When a Technical Worksheet is created on an Inward Business, the system automatically generates Worksheets for the Outward Businesses (Retrocessionaire’s Participation (RP) and Outward Cedent’s Business (OCC)), defined in the Protection Assignment of the Inward Business. The Identifiers allocated to the worksheets produced for the RP’s and OCC’s are generated from the Identifier Series having Type of Worksheet defined as Retrocession

The parameter applies to OCC- and RP Facultative and Treaty Businesses (Proportional and Non-Proportional

Cleared: The Identifiers allocated to the worksheets produced for the RP’s and OCC’s are generated from the Identifier Series having Type of Worksheet defined as Technical Account, i.e. the same Identifier Series as for the Inward Business

Relevant when: You select this parameter when you want to distinguish between the worksheets produced for the Inward business and the worksheets automatically produced for the Outward Businesses assigned to the same Inward Business

Applicable for: P&C
Automatic Produced Worksheet Title Selected: A Worksheet Title is automatically generated if the title field otherwise would been blank. The automatically generated title includes the name of the Insured and the Main Classes of Business of the business from which the worksheet is created

The parameter applies for Facultative- and Direct RP- and Assumed Businesses. Note however that if an OCC Treaty business is assigned from a Facultative- or Direct Assumed Business, the Worksheet automatically produced on the OCC ‘as Original’ ledger will also have the automatically generated worksheet title

Cleared: A Worksheet Title is not automatically generated. If a title is not entered manually, the title field becomes blank

Relevant when: Select the Parameter if you always want a Worksheet title to be automatically generated on worksheets generated for Facultative- and Direct businesses

Applicable for: P&C
Automatic Produced Worksheet not Amendable Selected: All Cession Worksheets created through Account Orders are not editable

Cleared: Cession Worksheets created through Account Orders are editable

Relevant when: Select the Parameter if you want to be sure that Cession Worksheets produced through a Life Cession (- Retrocession) Orders are not edited by the users

Applicable for: Life
Advanced use of Worksheet Status Selected: All Worksheet Status values defined as Active in the Reference Data Type Worksheet Status (code 00168) are available as Technical and Claim Worksheet statuses. (Refer to Reference Data Maintenance Handling)
Note! The worksheet statuses can be restricted to specific users through the Domain Restrictions ‘Accounting Claim and Technical Worksheet Status with Liquid and Non-Liquid Amount’. (Refer to Security Handling)

Note! By activating this system parameter this will also enable the Accounting Review Required fields on the Business, Accounting Info tab (Refer to Introduction to SICS Accounting in the User’s Guide)

When the user selects this parameter, the two check boxes ‘Check for Technical Worksheets’ and ‘Check for Claim Worksheets’ on the Random Worksheet Check tab automatically get enabled. (Refer to the Accounting/Random Worksheet Check parameter section.)

Cleared: A limited number of worksheet statuses are available

Relevant when: You want to control the booking process by dividing it into more steps. Each step can be restricted to specific users

Applicable for: P&C, Life
Default Authorized When Change Status Selected: This parameter is enabled only if the above parameter Advanced use of Worksheet Status is activated. If this parameter is selected the system will display the status Authorized in the Change to field and Authorized shown as first item in the dropdown list, when the user opens worksheet closing window for technical as well as claims worksheet

Cleared: The system will display status Closed as the default status in the Change to field when the user tick the Change Status box

Relevant when: You want to be sure the default status is set to Authorized instead of Closed when the user opens the worksheet closing window for technical or claim worksheet and tick the box Change Status. To make sure the worksheet is not easily closed by mistake.

Applicable for: P&C, Cede
Treaty- and Non-Treaty Businesses within One Worksheet not allowed Selected: You are not allowed to mix Treaty Business with Facultative- and Direct Business in the same worksheet

Cleared: There are no restrictions mixing different Types of Business in the same worksheet

Relevant when: You should select this parameter when you want the users to book treaty business and non-treaty business on separate worksheets

Applicable for: P&C
Worksheet Marked as Special for Document Production in REAC Selected: It will open a function to make it possible to mark a worksheet ‘Special’ and to enable a “‘Special’"-option in SICS on the retrocession orders

Cleared: The function to mark a worksheet ‘Special’ will be disabled and the “‘Special”’-option in SICS on the retrocession orders will be disabled

Relevant when: You should select this parameter when you want to enable the functionality which gives you the option to produce special accounts to the retrocessionaires/reinsurers based on specially marked bookings on the inward side. This system parameter enables a new checkbox on the Retrocession Calculation Order and Retrocession Account Order, which is used to restrict the asked account to process only the “special” bookings

Applicable for: P&C
Enable Accounting Worksheet Process ID Validation Selected: SICS validates that Worksheet with Status Closed can only have a CL and/or TA Process ID with Status Open or Re-Open

Cleared: No validation of the Process ID Status

Relevant when: You should select this parameter when you want SICS to validate the Process ID Status upon closing of Claim and Technical Worksheets

Applicable for: P&C, Cede, Life
Prevent Manual Update of Claim Worksheet Selected: A check box labelled ‘In Review’ appears in the Claim Worksheet. The Claim Worksheet cannot be changed to Closed immediately but have to be stored as ‘In Review’

Cleared: The check box is not displayed in Claim Worksheet and it can be Closed immediately

Relevant when: You should select this parameter when you want all Claim Worksheets to be reviewed before they are Closed. In combination with the domain restriction Accounting Worksheet Claim In Review it is possible to decide who should be restricted from ticking off the In Review box on the worksheet and who should be restricted from closing the worksheet

Applicable for: P&C
Prevent Manual update of technical worksheet Selected: A check box labelled ‘In Review’ appears in the Technical Worksheet. The Technical Worksheet cannot be changed to Closed immediately but have to be stored as ‘In Review’

Cleared: The check box is not displayed in Tecnical Worksheet and it can be Closed immediately

Relevant when: You should select this parameter when you want all Technical Worksheets to be reviewed before they are Closed. In combination with the domain restriction Accounting Worksheet Technical In Review it is possible to decide who should be restricted from ticking off the In Review box on the worksheet and who should be restricted from closing the worksheet

Applicable for: P&C
Accounting Period not restricted by definition on Admin conditions Selected: When booking takes place on a business the system will check the Administration conditions and if there are accounts not yet marked as booked the system will default the oldest account not yet booked. Additional the system allows the user to select any of the active accounting periods in the reference data, with some exceptions; For a Prop Treaty Assumed Business the system will still restrict the available Accounting Periods to those matching the account frequency on the Administration conditions, unless the below parameter Accounting Period not restricted also for Prop Treaty AB is selected as well. For Prop Treaty OCC and ORP the system will always restrict the available Accounting Periods to those matching the account frequency on the Administration conditions. If there are no accounts defined on the Administration conditions the system will default the value None and the system allows the user to select any of the active accounting periods in the reference data. By selecting this parameter the system will also enable the below parameter Accounting Period not restricted also for Prop Treaty AB

Cleared: When booking takes place on a business the system will check the Administration conditions and if there are accounts not yet marked as booked the system will default the oldest account not yet booked. Additional the system will restrict the available accounting periods to those matching the account frequency on the Administration conditions, plus the value None and Yearly, except for Prop Treaty ORP where None and Yearly are NOT available. If there are no accounts defined on the Administration conditions the system will default the value None and the system allows the user to select any of the active accounting periods in the reference data

Relevant when: This parameter is relevant for all business types and should be selected if you want to be able to enter Accounting Periods other than those matching the account frequency on the Administration conditions. But if you want to restrict the user to use only accounting periods matching the account frequency on the Administration Conditions, plus None and Yearly, you should leave this parameter cleared

Applicable for: P&C, Cede
Accounting Period not restricted also for Prop Treaty AB Selected: When booking takes place on a Prop Treaty Assumed Business the system will check the Administration conditions and if there are accounts not yet marked as booked the system will default the oldest account not yet booked. Additional the system allows the user to select any of the active accounting periods in the reference data. If there are no accounts defined on the Administration conditions the system will default the value None and the system allows the user to select any of the active accounting periods in the reference data

Cleared: When booking takes place on a Prop Treaty Assumbed Business the system will check the Administration conditions and if there are accounts not yet marked as booked the system will default the oldest account not yet booked. Additional the system will restrict the available accounting periods to those matching the account frequency on the Administration conditions, plus the value None and Yearly, except for Prop Treaty ORP where None and Yearly are NOT available. If there are no accounts defined on the Administration conditions the system will default the value None and the system allows the user to select any of the active accounting periods in the reference data

Relevant when: This parameter is relevant for Prop Treaty Assumed Business only and should be selected if you want to be able to enter Accounting Periods other than those matching the account frequency on the Administration conditions. But if you want to restrict the user to use only accounting periods matching the account frequency on the Administration Conditions also on a Prop Treaty Assumed Business, plus None and Yearly, you should leave this parameter cleared

Applicable for: P&C, Cede
Use Effective Period as Accounting Period for Instalments Selected: For Instalment booking detail and associated booking details (deductions), the system gives Accounting Period From and -To dates equal to Effective Period From and -To date. The Effective Period From and -To date is taken from the amendment to which the Instalment is pointing.

The Parameter applies to Assumed Business with Type of Business Proportional/Non-Proportional Direct or Proportional/Non-Proportional Facultative.

Cleared: The system splits the Effective Period according to number of Instalments to find Accounting Period From and-To dates.

Relevant when: This parameter is only relevant for Instalment bookings. Select the parameter if you want to make sure that Effective Period From and -To dates are booked as Accounting Period From and -To dates.

NB! Be aware that this parameter has no effect if either of the system parameters Accounting Period Based on Due Date or Accounting Period Based on Earning Period is activated under Miscellaneous. In this situation the Accounting Period defined on the instalments are used.

Applicable for: P&C
Set Accounting Period = Insured Period for non Treaty Business Selected: When a new booking detail is entered into a Technical- or Claim Worksheet, the Accounting Period From and -To dates is updated with the same values as the Insured Period From and -To dates. The Insured Period From- and To dates apply regardless of the Accounting period entered for the detail. (E.g. 1stof 4) The behaviour applies to all types of business except from Proportional - and Non-Proportional Treaty businesses.

Cleared: When a new booking detail is entered into a Technical- or Claim Worksheet, the Accounting Period From and -To dates are booked in accordance with the detail’s Accounting Period, e.g. 1st of 4.

Relevant when: This parameter is only relevant for bookings made manually into a Technical- or Claim Worksheet. Select the parameter if you want to make sure that Insured Period From and -To dates are booked as Accounting Period From and -To dates.

Applicable for: P&C
Prevent User Update of Accounting Period From -To on TW The selected value decides the Type of Business for which the Accounting Period From -To field in the Technical Worksheet is protected. For the selected type of business, the defaulted Accounting Period From -To values are not open for update directly in the field. You can however overrule the protection by using a menu option in the Technical Worksheet to activate the Accounting Period From -To field.

The system parameter applies for Assumed Business only.

Values: <None>, All types of business, Non-Treaty Business and Treaty Business

Functional Impact: Manual Technical Worksheet

Relevant when: A certain level of protection of the Accounting Period From - To values may be relevant in situations where changing these values could cause problems for automatic calculations, e.g. Premium Reserve Calculations.

Applicable for: P&C
Display figures from Share Conditions Selected: A check box labelled ‘Figures from Share Conditions’ appears in the Technical Worksheet and the Claim Worksheet. (Refer to ‘Calculate Share in the Technical Worksheet’ and ‘Book on Claim Worksheet’ in the User’s Guide for further information.)

Cleared: The check box is not displayed in Technical- and Claim Worksheet.

Relevant when: You should select this parameter when you want to use Share Conditions, e.g. From Brokers Order, Ceded share, when registering details into your Technical- and Claim Worksheets.

Applicable for: P&C
Automatic Conversion to Our Share Selected: The system automatically calculates the Worksheet details into ‘Our share’ when you apply your worksheet. ‘Our share’ may have been entered on the worksheet itself. If not, the system uses the share from the business’ Share Conditions. In the “View Balance Details” window, system enables users to check the Worksheet details in 100% figures.

Cleared: The system provides a Validation Error message asking you to convert all bookings to ‘Our share’ before applying the worksheet. You have to manually clear the share calculation option from the Worksheet. The details are then converted to ‘Our share’ and you are able to Apply the worksheet.

Relevant when: The parameter is relevant when you want to calculate share in your Technical- and/or Claim Worksheet. (Refer to ‘Calculate Share in the Technical Worksheet’ and ‘Book on Claim Worksheet’ in the User’s Guide). You select this Parameter when you want the system to convert worksheet details from ‘100% figures’ to ‘Our share’ without the manual intervention by accountants. You clear this parameter if you want the accountants always to check the ‘Our Share’ figures before the worksheet is closed.

Applicable for: P&C
Error Message if Accounting Year higher than Last Accounting Year Selected: For each Insured Period of a business ‘Last Accounting Year’ may be indicated in the Administration Conditions. The system provides an error message if you for a booking detail attempt to book on an accounting year that is higher than the accounting year entered in the Administration Conditions of the Insured Period to which the booking detail applies.

Cleared: There is no validation between the accounting year in the Technical- or Claim worksheet and the Last Accounting Year field entered in the administration conditions.

Relevant when: If Last Accounting Year has been recorded for an Insured Period, no bookings should be made for higher Accounting Years for this Insured Period. I.e. the Insured Period is closed after the last Accounting Year. You select this parameter to avoid making bookings on accounting years higher than the last accounting year, i.e. on closed Insured Periods.

Applicable for: P&C
Due Date Not Defaulted On Technical Worksheet Selected: The Due Date for a technical worksheet is empty (not defaulted) if an administration condition has not been defined.

Exception: If only non-liquid balances are missing a due date, system copies the most recent due date in the worksheet to all details with no due date. Or if no due date in the worksheet, due date is defaulted to current date.

Cleared: The Due Date is set to today’s date by default (if the Accounting Ref Period is <None>) and to the last date of the ‘Accounting Period From To’ (if the Accounting Ref Period is different from <None>).

Relevant when: If no accounts are defined on the administration condition on the business, the usershould be forced to manually enter a valid due date.The will prohibit incorrectly defaulted due dates in SICS.

Applicable for: P&C, Life
Create Closed Worksheet in Intra Group bookings Selected: When bookings are generated automatically on an Assumed Business in an Intra Group Contract the worksheets are Closed directly. In case the validation of the bookings fails the worksheet may still be stored in status Open.

Cleared: When bookings are generated automatically on an Assumed Business in an Intra Group Contract the worksheets are stored in status Open.

Relevant when: You should select this parameter if you want the automatic generated worksheets on the Assumed Businesses in Intra Group Contracts closed directly. But you should NOT select this parameter if you think it is necessary to inspect and manually check the automatic generated worksheets on the Assumed Businesses in Intra Group Contracts. The automatic generated worksheets on the Assumed Business takes place when worksheets are Closed on linked Outward Retrocessionaire Participation (ORP). Only automatic created worksheets on treaty ORPs and worksheets that are automatically or manually created and closed on facultativee ORPs are copied to the linked Assumed Business. When manual booking of estimates on prop treaty ORPs are also copied to the linked Assumed Business

Applicable for: P&C, Cede
Make Valid AC from AB on Intra Group Contract bookings Selected: The system will create valid Accounting Classifications on the automatic generated worksheets on the Assumed Businesses in Intra Group Contracts when this is possible.

Cleared: When bookings are generated automatically on an Assumed Business in an Intra Group Contract the AC are copied from the source business, the elements in the AC are compared with the elements in existing ACs on the Assumed Business. If a match is found this is used. Else a new AC is created on the Assumed Business by use of the elements in the source AC and set Valid/Invalid based on these values.

Relevant when: You should select this parameter if you want the system to create valid Accounting Classifications on the automatic generated worksheets on the Assumed Businesses in Intra Group Contracts when this is possible. It is most relevant when the above system parameter ‘Create Closed Worksheet in Intra Group bookings’ is selected and you want as many as possible of the created worksheets to be closed automatically on the IG AB.

Some examples:

In case the Reporting Unit is different on the Assumed Business compare to the one in the AC coming from the IG ORP, the system will replace the Reporting Unit to be equal the one on the Assumed Business to make it Valid.

In case the Base Company on the IG ORP has mandatory reference data, e.g. Sub Class of Business, and the Base Company on the IG AB do not allow Sub Class of Business as part of the AC, the system will remove the Sub Class of Business from the AC when selecting/creating AC on the Assumed Business to make it Valid.

In case the Base Company on the IG AB has mandatory reference data, e.g. Sub Class of Business, and the Base Company on the IG ORP do not have the Sub Class of Business as part of the AC, the system will select a Sub Class of Business from the AB and add it to the AC when selecting/creating AC on the Assumed Business to make it Valid.

Exception 1: In case the Base Company on both the IG AB and the IG ORP has mandatory reference data, e.g. Sub Class of Business, and the AC from the ORP contains a SCoB value that do not exist on the AB, then the system will still use the value from the source AC and set the AC Invalid on the AB.

Exception 2: In case the Base Company on the IG AB has mandatory AC elements that is not part of the AC coming from the OPR, but this classification element has no values yet, then the system will not create worksheet on the IG AB at all.

Applicable for: P&C, Cede
For IGC bookings, show WS Id of source ORP booking on BP Ledger Selected: The column Source WKs Id on ORP will be available on the Business Partner Ledger. If an Intra Group Contract IAB balance is shown on the BP Ledger this column will show the Worksheet Id of the ICR ORP source booking. If this balance is highlighted and the popup menu Source Settlement Status is selected then the system opens a small window with information about the source ORP balance (Business Id, Worksheet Id, Currency, Balance Amount, Unsettled Amount and Settlement Indicator).

Cleared: There will be no separate column with the information about the Source WKS Id on OPR on the Business Partner Ledger.

Applicable for: P&C, Cede
Set Due Date from Received Date on Technical Worksheet Selected: It will overrule the existing logic for how to set the Due Date and use the date in the Received Date as default for the Due Date for the first booking row on a Technical Worksheet, on an Assumed Business of type Proportional Treaty or Proportional Fac.

Cleared: The function to overrule the Due date with Received date will be switched off.

Relevant when: You should select this parameter when you want to enable the functionality to overrule the existing logic of how to set the Due Date and use the date in the Received Date as default. This system parameter enables to set the Due date to Received date(named Received External if the system parameter “Is Received Internal Date On Worksheet In Use” is selected). The given Due Date is still editable and can be overruled. For the subsequent details added on the worksheet the system will follow existing functionality and copy the Due Date from previous row.

Note: It is only when the user creates the first row on the Technical worksheet that the Due Date shall be taken from the Received Date, if there is a change in the Received Date after the first row it created the defaulted/overruled Due Date will not be changed.

Applicable for: P&C, Cede
Do not default Due Date before Booking Date Selected: System shall compare the defaulted Due Date with the Booked Date, and set Due date equal the Booked Date if it is less than/before the Booked Date, on all types of businesses independent of how the booking details are created on the worksheet.

Cleared: The function to compare the defaulted Due date with Booked date will be switched off.

Relevant when: You should select this parameter when you want to enable the functionality to compare the existing default Due Date with the Booked Date and set Due date equal the Booked Date if it is less than/before the Booked Date. This system parameter enables to set the Due date not before the Booked date. The given Due Date is still editable and can be changed. For the subsequent details added on the worksheet the system will follow existing functionality and copy the Due Date from previous row.

Note: It is only when the user creates the first row on the Technical worksheet that the Due Date shall be taken from the Booked Date, if there is a change in the Booked Date after the first row it created the defaulted/overruled Due Date will not be changed. This functionality is applicable for all types of worksheet created manually, reversal, automatic instalment bookings etc. Excluded from this would be booking created by Retrocession Calculation and Account orders, and all booking of Estimates, manually or through orders.

Applicable for: P&C, Cede
Allow to link Claim from TW on Assumed Business Selected: The system shall enable the “Link Claim” option when a technical booking is created for Assumed Business.

Cleared: The “Link Claim” function for Assumed Business will be disabled.

Relevant When: When a claim required to be linked to a worksheet which is being created for Assumed Business.

Applicable for: P&C
Claim Worksheet Mandatory Title Selected: The title field is mandatory on claim worksheets created Manually, using FGU, or SICS Server. The title will not default even though above parameter “Automatic Produced Worksheet Title” is activated.

Cleared: The title field is not mandatory on claim worksheets. When “Automatic Produced Worksheet Title” is activated, the title defaults.

Relevant when: You want to ensure that title is defined on claim worksheets.

Applicable for: P&C, Cede
Disable Option Allocate Occurrence Year on Technical Worksheet Selected: The option ‘Allocate Occurrence Year’ shown on the menu on the Technical Worksheet is disabled.

Cleared: The option ‘Allocate Occurrence Year’ shown on the menu on the Technical Worksheet is enabled.

Relevant when: You select this parameter when you want to reallocate the Occurrence Year of the Claim bookings only when running the Occurrence Year Allocation of Losses Order. (The Occurrence Year split option on the Technical Worksheet is based on the Accounting Year of the Premium Basis whereas the reallocation made through the order is based on the Booking Year of the Premium Basis).

Applicable for: P&C, Cede
Do not allow create Technical Worksheet for non-leaf sections Selected: When this parameter is selected, the system will not allow entering technical worksheet under non-leaf sections, only booking on lowest section level is allowed. When creating a technical worksheet, the main section option will not be provided in the Section field. Only the leaf sections will be allowed to add booking, for a case with only main section, the main section option will be provided in the Section field. When this parameter is selected, then the flag Automatically booked figures on section level on the Business tab of a Proportional OCC will be automatically selected when the OCC is renewed, or a new OCC is created. This function is only valid when the flag Automatically booked figures on section level on the Business tab of Proportional OCC is enabled, i.e. it is relevant only when the system parameter Allow Booking/Use Conditions on OCC/RP Section Level is activated. When this parameter is selected, and the user is trying to make a sub-section from a section on a business, then the system must check if there are any bookings on this current section. If there are bookings on the current section and these are not reversed and set to zero, a full stop message must be raised to prevent this registration. This check must be performed both on Business Ledger and on Claim Ledger for Claims with the tick box Transfer to Ledger NOT selected.

Cleared: When this parameter is cleared, the system will allow technical bookingson both leaf & non-leaf sections. When this parameter is cleared, then the flag Automatically booked figures on section level on the Business tab of a Proportional OCC will not be automatically selected when the OCC is renewed, or a new OCC is created. When this parameter is cleared, the system will allow make a sub-section from a section on a business.

Relevant when: Select this parameter when you want to make sure the bookings made on the IAB child section are always retroceded and booked on the OCC child section and not dependent of user interaction.

Applicable for: P&C, Cede
Do not Allow Inactive Section When Bookings on this Section not zero Selected: When this parameter is selected, the system will not allow to inactive section, if there are bookings on this section and these are not reversed and set to zero, a full stop message is raised to prevent this operation.

Cleared: When this parameter is cleared, the system will allow to inactive section, even if there are bookings on this section and these are not reversed and set to zero.

Applicable for: P&C, Cede
Check for Existing Duplicated Technical Worksheet Balances Selected: System will validate whether the current open technical worksheet balance(s) is/are having the same UwYR, Currency, and Amount as existing balances on Closed worksheets under the same business, independent if the balance is settled or not. The warning message will be triggered when you click on the “Change Status” option in the lower right Edit Menu of technical worksheet window, and the “OK” button under the “Worksheet Closing” window.
Pending worksheets e.g. Open and In Progress and Inactivated worksheets are excluded from this validation check. Technical Worksheet with zero balance will not trigger this validation check. For reversed worksheets, both of the source technical worksheet and the target technical worksheet will be excluded from this validation check.

Cleared: System will not do the validation and trigger the warning message even if there is closed balance that has the same UwYR, Currency, and Amount under the same business.

Applicable for: P&C, Cede
Import Technical Worksheet Through The Rows Generate Worksheet ID Selected: An option ‘Import Technical Worksheet Through Column Spreadsheet’ will be made available on right click in the Find Worksheet Window. This option allows you to import a spreadsheet where the entry codes and amounts are defined on several columns within the same row. This worksheet will require you to select a matching mapping before validating and importing the spreadsheet, so make sure the mapping is already available under the Transformation Mappings in the Automated Document Handling of the System Parameters. Once the spreadsheet is validated and imported, it will create a Technical Worksheet with one booking detail for each entry code and amount defined in the columns.

Cleared: The option will be disabled

Applicable for: P&C, Cede, Life
Enable Summary Account on Technical Worksheet Selected: The Notional Worksheet functionality for booking ACIs for inward They Bill agreements will be blocked and replaced by another functionality with four separate steps/ processes in a strict sequence. All four processes must be completed before the Technical Worksheet can be closed. An additional Summary Account tab will be shown on a manual Technical Worksheet. Where the list of open technical worksheets is listed before a new Technical Worksheet is created, three additional columns i.e “Accounting Period From”, “Accounting Period To”, and “Control Amount” in “Select Open worksheet” will be available with the information populated from the respective fields open Technical Worksheet that has the Worksheet Origin as ‘Manual With Summary’. Techncial worksheets that have the origin ‘Manual with Summary’ will have an additional status of ‘Ready’ which is considered an Open status. When a worksheet is validated and the validation is revoked, the status from Ready will be set back to Open and the validation status of all the details in the worksheet will be revoked.

Cleared: The Notional Worksheet functionality is used when booking ACIs for inward They Bill agreements.

Relevant when: You should select this parameter when your company has decided that the accounting of the inward They Bill agreements shall be done in more separate processes. The first process will be to book a Summary Statement of Account per Entry Code Group. The second process is to either upload a Sub SOA file, and/or create and run a They Bill Cession order to book the ACIs according to the Summary SOA. The uploaded Sub SOA details and/or the booking details created by the They Bill Cession order will be the actual bookings. The third process is to validate the Actual details against the Summary Account details. The fourth and final process is to close the Technical Worksheet. The Technical Worksheet cannot be closed until the validation process has been done, and until the sum of all the Actual details, including allowed discrepancies, exactly match the Summary Account details per Entry Code Group.

Applicable for: Life
They Bill Order when Summary Account on TW is not selected Selected: You will be provided with a flag to enter the Summary Bookings on the Actual Accounts tab itself. The booking of ACIs for inward They Bill agreements will be done through the They Bill Order which will be generated from the Edit menu of the Technical Worksheet. The Technical Worksheet cannot be closed until the validation process has been done, and until the sum of all the Actual details, including allowed discrepancies, exactly match or fall within the tolerance limits set for the Summary Account details per Entry Code. For more details please refer to the SICS Life User Guide

Cleared: The Notional Worksheet functionality is used when booking ACIs for inward They Bill agreements.

Applicable for: Life
Original Accounting Period Set on Order Selected: When a Period Set such as ‘Months’, ‘Years’ etc is selected on this system parameter, this period set will be defaulted to the Cession Order and Retrocession Cession Order. The Original Accounting Year and the period can then be defined on the order and when the order is run, the Original Accounting Year an Period on the cession worksheets will be defaulted from the period on the order

Cleared: When the Option ‘None’ is selected, there will be no default value set on the Cession or Retrocession Cession Order and the Original Booking Year and Period will be defaulted from the ACI as of dates Note: The Original Accounting Year and Period will be available on the cession worksheets only when the Original Accounting Year and Period flag is selected on the business

Applicable for: Life

Miscellaneous #

The system parameters on the Miscellaneous subtab affect general functions of the SICS accounting area.

To open the Miscellaneous subtab:

  1. Double-click the System Administration folder on SICS Workstation desktop.
  2. Double-click the System Parameter Maintenance icon.
  3. Click the Accounting tab.
  4. Click the Miscellaneous subtab.

System_Parameter_Accounting_Miscellaneous_24.4.PNG

Field Description
Always Arithmetic Sign on Input Selected: The system does not assign default signs to the amounts booked in Technical- and Claim worksheets. Consequently the user has to enter the sign manually, e.g. enter a minus sign on a claim booking on Assumed Business or a premium booking on Outward business.

When selected, this parameter overrides the ‘Is Positive on Assumed Business’ check box in the Entry Code property window. (Refer to the chapter Entry Code Maintenance of the System Administrator’s Guide.)

Cleared: The system assigns default signs to the amounts booked in Technical- and Claim Worksheet in accordance with the setting of the Entry Code check box ‘Values is Positive on Assumed Business’.

Relevant when: Booking signs often deviate from their normal value and you want to enter the sign manually rather than change the defaulted one.

Applicable for: P&C, Life
Automatic Generate Entry Code Mandatory Selected: When bookings are made for an entry code and ‘Generate New Entry Code for Automatic Booking’ conditions apply for this entry code, the system books the generated entry code without providing a message. (For further information see the chapter ‘Generate New Entry Code for Automatic Booking’ in the System Administrator’s Guide.)

Cleared: When bookings are made for an entry code and ‘Generate New Entry Code for Automatic Booking’ conditions apply for this entry code, a message appears asking you to confirm whether or not the generated entry code is to be booked. Relevant when: You select this parameter when bookings of automatically generated Entry Codes are mandatory.

Applicable for: P&C, Life
Continuous Billing Statements Selected: The Billing Statement will continue to list all the outstanding balances, not just those added since the previous Billing Statement.

Cleared: Balances included in previous Billing Statements are not included. The balances can only be included once.

Relevant when: You select this parameter when you want to provide a Credit Control report that includes all balances.

Applicable for: P&C, Life
Include Partially Settled Balances in Billing Selected: The Unsettled Part of Partially Settled Balances is included in the Billing Statements in addition to the Unsettled Balances.

Cleared: Only Unsettled Balances are included in the Billing Statement.

Relevant when: You select the parameter when you want to produce Billing Statements showing a total from the unsettled part of all balances (including partially settled balances).

Applicable for: P&C, Life
Original Underwriting and Occurrence Year NOT mandatory Selected: The system does not require a value in the Original Underwriting Yearand Occurrence Year fields of Technical- and Claim Worksheets. Depending on the Cession Basis of the business, you get a warning that either Original Underwriting Year or Occurrence Year is missing when you apply or change the status of the worksheet. You are, however, allowed to continue your work in the worksheet.

Cleared: The system requires a value in the Original Underwriting Year- and Occurrence Year fields of Technical- and Claim Worksheets. You are not allowed to apply or change the status of the worksheet until these values are defined. For further information about these fields, refer to the field description of the Actual Accounts-/Estimates tab in the chapter ‘Book the Actual Account and Estimates in the Technical Worksheet’ in User’s Guide.

Relevant when: You leave this parameter cleared if it is important that these fields are updated in your Technical- and Claim worksheet, e.g. for retrocession purposes or for use in statistics.

Applicable for: P&C, Life

(Parameter exists in Life but functionality not in use, i.e. Parameter always to be selected.)
Always Default Original underwriting Year and Occurrence Year Selected: A value is defaulted in both the Original Underwriting Year and Occurrence Year fields of the Technical- and Claim Worksheets. Which values that are defaulted depend upon the Cession Basis of the business. For further information about these fields, refer to the field description of the Actual Accounts-/Estimates tab in the chapter ‘Book the Actual Account and Estimates in the Technical Worksheet’ in User’s Guide

Cleared: The Cession Basis of the business determines whether or not a value is defaulted in the Original Underwriting Year, in the Occurrence Year field or none of these fields of the Technical- and Claim Worksheet.

Relevant when: You select this parameter if you want the system to always default a value in the Original Underwriting Year and Occurrence Year fields when the fields are important, e.g. for Retrocession or Statistics.

Note! For businesses defined as Multi Year Contracts, the Original Underwriting Year is always defaulted to the year derived from the Sub Period Start Date. The value cannot be changed.
Occurrence Year always mandatory Selected: The system requires a value in the Occurrence Year fields of Technical- and Claim Worksheets independent of Cession Basis of the business, Level of Business and Type of Business. An error message will be presented when the user tries to ‘Apply’/‘Change Status’ and a value is missing in the Occurrence Year field. The Worksheet cannot be closed until the Occurrence Year is entered for all booking details. This system parameter overrules the system parameter ‘Original Underwriting and Occurrence Year NOT mandatory’ (as regards mandatory Occurrence Year) when active.

Note! No check of the Occurrence Year is performed when automatic closing the Worksheet by selecting e.g. option ‘Book and Close Selected Instalments’

Cleared: The system does not require a value in the Occurrence Year fields of Technical- and Claim Worksheets.

Relevant when: You select this parameter if you want the system to check if there is a value in the Occurrence Year fields when e.g. the fields are important to control the run off of an Underwriting Year for a treaty or a portfolio and the related result.

Applicable for: P&C, Cede, Life
View Entry Code Category in Online Statistics Selected: In addition to viewing the Online Statistics per Entry Code Group Category, you can view the Online Statistics per Entry Code Category. (Refer to the Entry Code Maintenance chapter in System Administrator’s Guide for further description of Entry Code Categories).

Cleared: The Online Statistics contains Entry Code Group Category only.

Relevant when: Select this parameter when you want to group and view the business’ accounting figures by Entry Code Category in addition to Entry Code Group Category.

Applicable for: P&C, Life
Show Accounting Classification in Business Partner Ledger Selected: Additional columns labelled ‘Accounting Classification’and ‘Section Name’ appear in the Business Partner Ledger. The Accounting Classification- and Section values of each Technical- and Claim balance are displayed in the Business Partner Ledger. The ‘Accounting Classification Criteria’ tab also appears on the Additional Criteria window on the Business Partner Ledger.

Cleared: No ‘Accounting Classification’and ‘Section Name’ columns are displayed on the Business Partner Ledger. The Accounting Classification Criteria tab is not part of the Additional Criteria window.

Relevant when: Select this parameter when Accounting Classification- and Section values are of importance handling Technical- and Claim balances in the Business Partner Ledger, e.g. when creating remittances, Account Balances or Settlement Balances.

Applicable for: P&C, Life
Use Entry Code Restriction per Base Company Selected: The system enables you to define, among the Entry Code flags, Base Companies for which the Entry code is restricted. When making manual bookings the system presents the Entry Codes available for the Base Company of the combi- nation of Insured Period and Business selected in the worksheet. The functionality applies to manual Technical Worksheet, Claim Worksheet and FGU bookings.

Cleared: Any active Entry Code can be used making manual bookings in a worksheet. No restriction per Base Company exists.

Relevant when: You have defined Entry Codes that are determined for use with specific Base Company/ies only. Select this parameter if you want the system to prevent you from using these Entry Codes for bookings with other Base Companies than the ones defined.

Applicable for: P&C, Life
Validate Booking Year and Period for Account Order Selected: The system will validate what will be the Booking Period for any worksheets created by the Account Order in the beginning of the run process of an Account Order. If the order will create worksheets with Booking Period that is closed from system parameters Base Company Specific Settings, NO worksheet will be created. When running Account Order as a Scheduled Job and if Booking Period is closed, the system will set the Status of the Scheduled Job to Interrupted.

Cleared: If the Booking Year/Period on the order is NOT open for Booking the individual orders will use their own rules for which Booking Period and Year to use, e.g. first open booking year/period for the actual base company.

Relevant when: You want to separate Liquid and Non-Liquid details in separate balances so that the balances with Liquid details will be set to Unsettled, and the balances with Non-Liquid details will be set to Settled when the worksheet is closed.

Applicable for: P&C, Life
Split Estimate balances on Liquid/Non-liguid for manual bookings Selected: When the user makes manual bookings on the Estimates tab on a Technical Worksheet, the system will separate Liquid and Non-Liquid details in seprate balances, additional to the other split options on the worksheet. The Non-Liquid balance will automatically be set to Settled because the balance is zero.

Cleared: The system will not use Liquid / Non-Liquid flag on the details as criteria for the balance split, only the other split options on the worksheet.

Relevant when: If you run Account orders as Scheduled jobs and want to maintain them from the Request tab of the Scheduler.

Applicable for: P&C, Life
Activate the ‘Paid To’ column in deduction condition Selected: Parameter activates the functionality to make a separate balance and assign the given business partner in the field ‘Paid To’ for the deduction detail booked from the deduction conditions. The ‘Paid To’ field is enabled on the deduction conditions and user can enter any partner with any role on the business in this field.

Cleared: The ‘Paid To’ field is still enabled but without any functionality, it works as informative purpose only.

Relevant when: When booking on an Assumed Business, either manually or automatically from Premium & Limit conditions, e.g. Instalment, and Deduction details are calculated from the Deduction Conditions, then the system will check the Paid To field for all deductions to be calculated. If there is no partner assigned in the Paid To field no special action to be taken. If there is a partner assigned in the Paid To field for the actual deduction to be calculated, then the system will add this detail in an existing balance where the same partner is the Business Partner, else create a new balance assigned to this partner.

Applicable for: P&C, Cede
Confirmation Message While Closing Worksheet When Currency is not Main Selected: The system will trigger a confirmation message on the closing screen, while the status is changed to Closed, on both Technical and Claim Worksheet, each time bookings are made in different currency than the main currency defined on business. This is additional to the confirmation message presented once when a new currency is added on a worksheet that is not the main currency defined in business.

Cleared: No confirmation message is presented on the closing screen even if booking takes place on currencies not defined as main currency on the business. The user will only be informed the first time a new currency is added on the worksheet that is not the main currency on the business.

Relevant when: You want to trigger a confirmation message eash time you change the worksheet status to Closed on the closing window when booking on a currency that is not main currency on the business.

Applicable for: P&C, Cede
Disable Detail Criteria on BP Balance Mass Update Selected: On the Business Partner Balance Mass Update on both the Expected BP Replace and the Responsible BP Replace tabs, there is a possibility to extract Balances based on the Insured Period the Details within the Balance is linked to. By selecting this parameter the system will disable these fields on these two pages. The Insured Period Start Date From - To becomes disabled.

Cleared: The Insured Period Start Date From - To on both the Expected BP Replace and the Responsible BP Replace tabs on the Business Partner Balance Mass Update becomes enabled and can be used in the mass update.

Relevant when: If you press Find Now on the Expected BP Replace or the Responsible BP Replace with the Insured Period Start Date From - To enabled, the system will find the number of Details matching the extraction criteria according to the Cursor Page Amount defined for Find Worksheet in the system parameter and show this in the Found Objects. This number will not match the found Balances in the list and this can be confusing. To avoid this and if you don’t need to use the Insured Period as extraction criteria in this mass update you should select this parameter. Then the system will disable the Insured Period Start Date From - To and if you now press Find Now, the system will find the number of Balances matching the extraction criteria according to the Cursor Page Amount and show this in the Found Objects. This number will now also match the found Balances in the list.

Applicable for: P&C, Cede
Cession ACI multidigit decimal display Selected: When the system parameter is enabled, it will be possible to upload Account Costing Items having upto 6 decimal places through the cession loader. The ACIs will be displayed on the cession benefit with 6 decimal places. However, when the ACIs are transferred to the technical or cession worksheets, they will be rounded off to two decimal places.

Cleared: The Account Costing Items will be accepted and displayed only upto 2 decimal places

Relevant when: In situations where the share of the reinsurer is low but the volumes are high and the aggregated discrepancy due to the decimal places results in a large amount that cannot be ignored.

Applicable for: Life

Include Settled Balances on Payment Partner Mass Update Selected: All balances (unsettled, partially settled and settled balances) are included in the Business Partner Balance Mass Update of Expected Payment Partner.

Cleared: Only unsettled and partially settled balances are included in the Business Partner Balance Mass Update of Expected Payment Partner

Relevant when: You want the Business Partner Balance Mass Update of Expected Payment Partner to take place also on settled balances.

Applicable for: P&C, Life
Reverse balance not allowed if Base Company on Business is changed Selected: You are not allowed to reverse a balance when the Base Company on the balance is different from the Base Company on the Insured period the balance belongs to.

Cleared: You are allowed to reverse balance even if there is a mismatch between the base company on the balance and the Insured Period the balance belongs to. After reversal the base company on the source balance is kept on the target balance.

Relevant when: The intention with this feature is to prevent reversing a balance if the Base Company on the balance is other than the Base Company on the insured period it belongs to. This situation can occur if the Base Company on the insured period is changed AFTER details are booked on this insured period.

Remember that the Copy function is enabled independent of this parameter and the Copy function will always use the Base Company currently belonging to the insured period, i.e. not taken from the source detail.

Applicable for: P&C
Suppress Validation of Accounting Classification for Reversal and OPR” Selected: The parameter applies when running the Original Premium Reserve order, and when you manually reverse bookings on the ledger. The system will NOT validate the accounting classifications on bookings created when you run an Original Premium Reserve order. This means that if a premium basis or premium reserves have been booked with an accounting classification which later has become invalid (for example, through a change of a business classification), the OPR will produce bookings on the worksheet and ignore the validation when the user closes the worksheet.

The same scenario applies when the user reverses a booking detail from the business ledger and closes the worksheet. The reversed details will not be validated.

Cleared: The system will validate the accounting classification on all details produced by an Original Premium Reserve order. It means that if the accounting classification is no longer valid on the respective business, the worksheet cannot be closed. The same scenario applies for reversed bookings: You cannot close a worksheet if it contains details with invalid accounting classifications.

Applicable for: P&C, Life
Legal Reporting Unit Category Selected: You select between the Reporting Unit Category values defined in the Reference Data Type ‘Reporting Unit Category’ (Code 00042).

The selected Reporting Unit Category determines the available Reporting Units in the Base Company Specific Settings tab. Only Reporting Units allocated to the selected RU Category are available.

The selected category is available in Base Company Specific Settings/Classification Rules 2 regardless, however more categories may be available if the System Parameter/Business/Classification/Extend Classification Set up per Reporting Unit is Selected.

The selected category also determines the available Reporting Units in the Currency tab. Functional Currencies may be defined per Reporting Unit clicking the Table button. When Legal Reporting Unit is defined, Functional Currency Overriding Rule cannot be defined per Base Company.

A Reporting Unit field appears next to the Base Company field in the Remittance Worksheet. A Reporting Unit field is also displayed next to the Payment Partner field if the Payment Partner is a Base Company.

Cleared: < None> is selected in the drop-down list. No Reporting Units are available in the Base Company Specific Settings tab. When Legal Reporting Unit has not been defined, Functional Currency Overriding Rules may be defined per Base Company.

Relevant when:

When your company has legal entities within the organisation, and these are defined in a special Reporting Unit Category, the Category should be defined in this parameter.

Applicable for: P&C, Life
Trace Automatic Calculation of Deduction Selected: In the process of automatic calculation of deduction the system will for each detail on the worksheet calculate and create individual deduction entries so that it is possible to trace for each deduction amount from where it have been calculated. Be aware that deductions defined as Amount will be booked once for each entry detail on the worksheet.

Cleared: In the process of automatic calculation of deduction the system will add together details that are basis for the deduction calculation on the worksheet and create only one deduction entry per deduction type. Deductions defined as Amount will be booked only once.

Applicable for: P&C, Cede
Assign Broker as Responsible Business Partner on Brokerage Balances Selected: The Broker registered on a Business will be assigned as the Responsible Business Partner on any Brokerage Balances booked on the Business. When this Parameter is selected, any Brokerage booking will always be split out as a separate balance, independent on the Balance Split Options specified on the Technical Worksheet. This functionality only applies for Assumed Business

Cleared: The legal Responsible Business Partner of the business (Cedent on Assumed Business) is assigned as Responsible Business Partner of the entire balance (both Account balance and Brokerage balance).

Relevant when: The main principle in SICS is that the legal Responsible Business Partner of a Business (Cedent on Assumed Business) is assigned as Responsible Business Partner of all balances booked on the Business (both Account balances and Brokerage balances). Select this parameter if you want to overrule this principle and assign the Broker as Responsible Business Partner of Brokerage balances on Assumed Business.

Applicable for: P&C, Life
Responsible Business Partner from Last Insured Period Selected: The Responsible Business Partner of the balance booking will, depending on the Level of Business and the Origin of Worksheet be derived from the cedent/retrocessionaire of the last Insured Period of the Business.

Cleared: The Responsible Business Partner of the balance booking will be derived from the cedent/retrocessionaire of the Business’ Insured Period equal to the Insured Period of the detail booking.

Relevant when: When you have changed the cedent/retrocessionaire from one Insured Period to the next and you want the Responsible Business Partner of the balance to be derived from the cedent/retrocessionaire of the Insured Period. When you are making manually/automatically bookings on a Technical /Claim Worksheet.

Applicable for: P&C, Life
Allow Allocation of External Business Partner to Balance Selected: Enables the following fields on the Business Properties window:

The External Business Partner option, which allows the user to change the business partner of the booking balance to a business partner not registered on the business.

The Recipient option, which opens up a new field where an additional business partner business can be registered. The business partner does not have to be a business partner on the business.

Cleared: The External Business Partner and Recipient options on the Business Properties window are removed. The user can only change the business partner of the booking balance to a business partner registered on the business.

Relevant when: When the user wants to be able to allocate the (unsettled) balance booking to a business partner not registered on the business, or wants to register an additional business partner to the balance.

Applicable for: P&C, Life

(DXC recommends that this parameter is not in use in the SICS Life application)
Always Default ALL in Cedent on Business Ledger Selected: The Cedent field (labelled Reinsurer on outward business) on the Business Ledger will always default to <ALL>

Cleared: The Cedent field (labelled Reinsurer on outward business) on the Business Ledger will default to <ALL> if more than one Cedent (Retrocessionaire on outward) exist on the Business. If only one Cedent (Retrocessionaire) exist the field will default to the Cedent (Retrocessionaire).

Relevant when: If you have selected the parameter Assign Broker as Responsible Business Partner on Brokerage Balance on the Accounting/Miscellaneous2 tab, the broker will be the Responsible Business Partner on any brokerage balances. The brokerage balances will then only be shown on the Business Ledger when <ALL> is selected in the Cedent (Reinsurer) field. If the above mentioned parameter is selected, you may therefore want to set the default value to <ALL> to make sure all balances are shown on the Business Ledger.

Applicable for: P&C, Life
Suppress Discrepancy Worksheet Handling Selected: The system does not create Discrepancy Worksheets, even if the users change automatic created worksheet.

Cleared: The system automatically displays a question forcing you to decide whether or not a Discrepancy Worksheet is to be created

Relevant when: In situations where the user change detail amounts on automatic created worksheets the system automatically calculate the difference between the automatic created details and the detail after the user interaction. If this difference is of importance for later use, e.g. when booking on Master Agreement arrangements, you should select this parameter. A discrepancy worksheet contains these differences and can be closed in a normal way later.

Applicable for: P&C, Life

(DXC recommends that this system parameter is selected in the SICS Life system).

P&C Miscellaneous #

The system parameters on the P&C Miscellaneous subtab affect specific P%C and Cede functions of the SICS accounting area.

To open the P&C Miscellaneous subtab:

  1. Double-click the System Administration folder on SICS Workstation desktop.
  2. Double-click the System Parameter Maintenance icon.
  3. Click the Accounting tab.
  4. Click the P&C Miscellaneous subtab.

System_Parameter_Accounting_P&amp;C_Miscellaneous_26.1.PNG

Field Description
Handle Discrepancy on Manual Worksheet Selected: The system may create Discrepancy Worksheets also when the user makes changes on manually created worksheets with status Unfinished.

The system automatically displays a question forcing the user to decide if a Discrepancy Worksheet should be created or not. The dialog box appears when the user is about to close a manually created worksheet which has been stored as ‘Unfinished’ but in the meantime has been changed (either the amount or the entry code).
By activating this system parameter the system will set the Worksheet Status to Unfinished when user selects the option UNFI or Apply and UNFI on the Worksheet

Cleared: The system never creates Discrepancy Worksheets based on a manually created worksheet.
Additional the Worksheet Status remains Open even when user selects the option UNFI or Apply and UNFI on the Worksheet.

Relevant when: In situations where the user stores manually created worksheets with status ‘Unfinished’ and wants the system to keep information about the changes on these worksheets before they later are closed.

Applicable for: P&C
Control Signed Share Selected: The system validates if the Signed Share is entered for the business you are booking on. If a Written Share and not a Signed Share is entered, a validation message appears. You are given the option to continue, e.g. change the status of the worksheet, or nor to continue, e.g. save the worksheet as Unfinished and revert when a signed share has been entered. This validation applies for bookings in Technical- and Claim Worksheets.

Cleared: The system is not validating the Signed Share of the business for which you are making your bookings.

Relevant when: You select this parameter when you want to be sure that you are warned when you attempt to apply or change the status of a worksheet that have bookings for businesses not having a Signed Share entered.

Applicable for: P&C
Signed Share or Estimated Signed Share Mandatory Selected: You are not allowed to apply or change the status of a worksheet that includes bookings for a business not having a Signed Share or Estimated Signed Share entered. An information message appears when you attempt to Apply or select Change Status from a Technical- or Claim Worksheet.

Cleared: The system does not validate the Signed Share- and Estimated Signed Share fields of the business for which bookings are made in a Technical- or Claim Worksheet.

Relevant when: You select this parameter when you want to make sure that you are stopped when bookings are made for a business for which the Signed Share or Estimated Signed Share is not entered.

Applicable for: P&C
Instalments - Auto Book default value ‘No’ Selected: The default value for the Auto Book column for Instalments and Adjustments within the Premium and Limit condition will be set to No.

Cleared: The default value for the Auto Book column for Instalments and Adjustments within the Premium and Limit condition will be set to Yes

Relevant when: You want the default value for the Auto Book column for Instalments and Adjustments within the Premium and Limit condition to be set to No, rather than normal default of Yes.

Applicable for: P&C
Accounting Period Based on Due Date Selected: The system presents a new column ‘Accounting Period From - To’ within the Instalments and Adjustments of the Limit and Premium condition. The values are set by default to be the Due Date for instalments and the the As Of Date for adjustments and can be manually edited through a separate edit option ‘Edit Accounting Period’ having specific access rights. When doing automatic bookings of instalments and adjustments, the system will automatically set the ‘Accounting

Period From - To’ values on the Technical Worksheet as per the information within the Instalments and Adjustments conditions.

Cleared: The system will not present the new column ‘Accounting Period From - To’ within the Instalments and Adjustments of the Limit and Premium condition and will not present the separate edit option ‘Edit Accounting Period’. When doing automatic bookings of instalments and adjustments, the system will automatically set the ‘Accounting Period From - To’ on the Technical Worksheet in accordance with existing hard coded rules.

Relevant when: You want to be able to manually set the ‘Accounting Period From - To’ for instalments and adjustments within the Limit and Premium condition and to use these values on the worksheet when instalments and adjustments are automatically booked.

NB! Be aware that by activating this parameter the system parameter Use Effective Period as Accounting Period for instalments under Worksheet is overruled and has no effect.
Accounting Period Based on Earning Period Selected: This parameter is enabled only when the above parameter Accounting Period Based on Due Date is selected which enables the column ‘Accounting Period From - To’ within the Instalments and Adjustments of the Limit and Premium condition. The values are set by default to be the earning period for instalments and adjustments and can be manually edited through a separate edit option ‘Edit Accounting Period’ having specific access rights.

These are the rules for how the ‘Accounting Period From - To’ (earning period) is set:

Instalments:
When Instalments are calculated In Advance:- The Accounting Period From date is set to the same as the Due Date of the Instalment.- The Accounting Period To date is set by use of this new logic:- The Accounting Period To date = Accounting Period From date of the next instalment less one day.- The Accounting Period To date for LAST instalment = Insured Period end dateWhen Instalments are calculated In Arrears:- The Accounting Period From date for the FIRST instalment = Insured Period start date- The Accounting Period To date for the FIRST instalment = Due Date of the FIRST instalment.- The Accounting Period From date for subsequent instalments = Accounting Period To date of the previous instalment plus one day.- The Accounting Period To date for subsequent instalments = Due Date of subsequent instalments.- The Accounting Period To date for the LAST instalment = Insured Period end date

Adjustments:
- For the FIRST Adjustment the Accounting Period From date is set equal to Insured Period start date.
- For the SUBSEQUENT Adjustment the Accounting Period From date is set equal to the As Of Date of the preceding Adjustment plus one day.
- The Accounting Period To date is set to the As Of Date of the Adjustment.

When doing automatic bookings of instalments and adjustments, the system will automatically set the ‘Accounting Period From - To’ values on the Technical Worksheet as per the information within the Instalments and Adjustments conditions.

Cleared: The system will follow the description of the system parameter Accounting Period Based on Due Date if that is selected, else the columns ‘Accounting Period From - To’ is not visible on the Instalments and the Adjustments.

Relevant when: You want to be able to manually set the ‘Accounting Period From - To’ for instalments and adjustments within the Limit and Premium condition to be the earning period and to use these values on the worksheet when instalments and adjustments are automatically booked.

NB! When this parameter is switched On, be aware that existing instalments and adjustments created prior to this, will have the Accounting Period From - To set equal the Due Date and the As Of Date respectively.

Applicable for: P&C
Is Automatic VAT Calculation in Use Selected: The ‘Use VAT Calculation’ flag is activated on business. The ‘Is VAT to be calculated on Gross’ flag is activated on Claim- and Technical Worksheet.

Automatic Value Added Tax (VAT) calculation is triggered if the business has the ‘Use VAT Calculation’ flag selected and the Claim- or Technical Worksheet contains entries subject to VAT.

The calculation applies for Assumed Business.

Cleared: The flags ‘Use VAT Calculation’ and ‘Is VAT to be calculated on Gross’ are invisible. No automatic VAT calculation is triggered.

Relevant when: Select this parameter if you want the system to automatically calculate VAT in the Technical- or Claim worksheet for business that is subject to VAT.

Applicable for: P&C
VAT Calculation based on EC Groups Selected: This parameter is enabled only when the above parameter Is Automatic VAT Calculation in Use is selected. By selecting this system parameter and the other necessary system setup it is possible to calculate VAT based on Entry Code Groups and to have VAT calculated also on outward business. These are the necessary system setup to enable this function:

Defining the wanted Entry Code Groups in the EC Group Category VAT Calculation Basis

Rename the wanted VAT Calculation numbers in reference data Accounting Calculation (table 199)

Assign Entry Codes to the renamed calculations in the Accounting Function VAT Calculation based on EC Groups (in System Parameters under Accounting, Entry Codes).

When the ‘Use VAT Calculation’ flag is activated on business, both on assumed and outward business, all bookings on this business are candidates for VAT calculation. The ‘Is VAT to be calculated on Gross’ flag is disabled and all VAT calculations are made on net basis. All entry codes subject to VAT, see above, booked on Claim- and Technical Worksheet will trigger the Automatic Value Added Tax (VAT) calculation.

Cleared: No automatic VAT calculation is triggered unless the above parameter Is Automatic VAT Calculation in Use is selected, following the description of that system parameter.

Relevant when: Select this parameter if you want the system to automatically calculate VAT based on Entry Code Groups in the Technical- or Claim worksheet for business that is subject to VAT, both on assumed and outward business.

Applicable for: P&C, Cede
Additional VAT Calculation Selected: This system parameter will be made available for selection when the Is Automatic VAT Calculation in Use and VAT Calculation based on EC Groups are selected.
When selected some addition functionality will be available for VAT(Value Added Tax) and WVAT (Withhold Value Added Tax).
Please refer Additional VAT and WVAT calculation in Accounting Chapter of User Guide for details about calculations.

Cleared: System will not do above mentioned calculations.

Relevant when: You want system to do some additional VAT calculations based on Partner county.

Applicable for: P&C, Cede
Included VAT codes in Reinstatement balance Selected: When the ‘Use VAT Calculation’ flag is activated on the business and the balance split option “Reinstatement Premium” is selected on Claim Worksheet, for reinstatement premium and its related VAT bookings, the amounts are grouped into the same balance.

Cleared: When the ‘Use VAT Calculation’ flag is activated on the business and the balance split option “Reinstatement Premium” is selected on Claim Worksheet, the reinstatement premium becomes a separated balance, and the VAT on reinstatement related bookings are grouped into other balance.

Relevant when: Select this parameter if you want the system to group the reinstatement premium and the related VAT bookings into same balance.

Applicable for: P&C, Cede
Government Tax Framework in use Selected: When the ‘Government Tax Framework in use’ is activated, the system parameter ‘Is Automatic VAT Calculation in Use’ and the related system parameters are automatically inactivated. Activating this system parameter will make it possible to perform the Automatic Booking of Government Taxes (refer to Automatic Booking option on Technical/Claim Worksheet), Governement Tax Validation and Government Tax Linkage. Automatic Booking of Government Taxes, Government Tax Validation and Government Tax Linkage apply for Assumed Business Technical/Claim Worksheet.

Cleared: Automatic Booking of Government Taxes (i.e. Automatic Booking option on Worksheet) is disabled, Government Tax Validation and Government Tax Linkage will not be performed.

Relevant when: Select this parameter if you want the system to automatically calculate Government Tax for e.g. Premium and Claim details, validate the Government Tax details and to create a link between the Premium and Claim details and the respective Government Tax details based on the definitions set up in the Government Tax Table.

Applicable for: P&C, Cede
Govt. Taxes split per Single Entry Codes at balance level Selected: This parameter is only enabled when above parameter ‘Government Tax Framework in use’ is selected. Activating this system parameter will make it possible to perform the Automatic splitting of Government Tax balances on Technical/Claim Worksheets into separate entries for each defined Government Tax entry code.

Cleared: Automatic splitting of Government Tax balances on Technical/Claim Worksheets into separate entries for each defined Government Tax entry code will not be performed.

Relevant when: Select this parameter if you want the system to automatic splitting of Government Tax balances on Technical/Claim Worksheets into separate entries for each defined Government Tax entry code. And Notes field update for each split entry to include respective Government Tax EC details (Example = Government Tax - GT10 Gov Tax Written Premium).

Applicable for: P&C, Cede
European Union Area Selected: Define the Name of the Area Type which can be defined as the European Union Area (e.g. value European Union Member).

Cleared: No Area Type can be defined as a European Union Member

Relevant when: You want to define that a Country is a member of the European Union. All countries with an Area Type (e.g. Political Area) having a name equal to the value defined in this system parameter will be considered a member of the European Union. This is relevant for the Government Tax functionality. Whenever the option ‘Automatic Booking of Government Taxes’ or when the flag ‘Automatic Booking’ is selected in the Government Tax table, system will check the fields Cedent within EU/Producer within EU in the table to find a relevant Government Tax rule to be used for the automatic booking. Note; This system parameter is dependent on the system parameter ‘Government Tax Framework in use’ being active.

Applicable for: P&C, Cede
Use Entry Code Restriction per Business Classification Selected: The system enables you to define, among the Entry Code Restrictions, Main Classes of Business and/or Types of Participation for which the Entry code is restricted. When making manual bookings the system presents the Entry Codes available for the Main Classes of Business and/or Types of Participation of the combination of Insured Period and Section selected in the worksheet. The functionality applies to manual Technical Worksheet, Claim Worksheet and FGU bookings.

Cleared: Any active Entry Code can be used making manual bookings in a worksheet. No restriction per Main Classes of Business and/or Types of Participation exists.

Relevant when: You have defined Entry Codes that are determined for use with specific Main Classes of Business and/or Types of Participation only. Select this parameter if you want the system to prevent you from using these Entry Codes for bookings with other Main Classes of Business and/or Types of Participation.

Applicable for: P&C, Cede
Calculate Expected Premium Percent per Single Account Selected: A new column labelled ‘Exp Prem %’ is captured in the Administration Conditions window of Proportional Treaty business. The system automatically assigns a percentage value for each account that equals to 100% divided by the number of accounts created. The assigned values may be overridden on accounts where no bookings have been made. When an Estimate order is run, the percentage value of each missing account is multiplied against the Underwriter’s Insured Period Premium Estimate, reflected on the Underwriter’s Estimates window.

Cleared: The ‘Exp Prem %’ values are not part of the Administration Conditions, i.e. not available for calculation of Estimates.

Relevant when: Select this parameter when the automatic calculation of Estimates functionality is in use.

Applicable for: P&C
Reverse Booking on Protected Administrative Business Selected: When you click OK to close a Technical Worksheet from an Administrative Business, a confirmation message appears asking whether or not a reversed duplicate is to be made of your bookings. When you answer Yes to the question, your bookings are automatically reversed. Both the original bookings and the reversed bookings are displayed in the Business Ledger with Source- and Target Worksheet identifiers.

The functionality only applies for manual technical bookings made on an Administrative Business protection by Assumed Business(es).

Cleared: Your technical bookings are not automatically reversed on an Administrative Business with protection.

Relevant when: Booking on fronting arrangements where you want the system to automatically eliminate the bookings done on the Administrative business.

Applicable for: P&C
Protection Assignment 100% mandatory Selected: The system requires 100% protection to be registered for an Assumed Business. The protection must be registered on a proportional basis. If 100% protection is not registered for an Insured Period of the agreement, no bookings are allowed on the Insured Period.

Cleared: You are allowed to enter bookings on the Insured Period even if the Insured Period is not 100% protected.

Relevant when: You should select this parameter when you want to assure that all the agreement’s bookings are allocated to a protection, e.g. Outward Cedent’s Contract or Own Retention.

Applicable for: P&C
Warning if Accounting Period from Date is in the Future Selected: In the process of applying and/or closing a booking, the system checks if the booking has Accounting Period from date in the future. The validation takes place for the following open Worksheets: Manual Technical Worksheet, manual Claim Worksheet, Instalment booking and Adjustment booking. The validation trigger is when selecting Apply or Change Status.

Cleared: The system does not validate the Accounting Period From date.

Applicable for: P&C
Prevent booking with booking period less than Insured Period From Date Selected: You are stopped when booking on an insured period where the start date is later that the current booking period, as set up in you base company’s booking terms

Cleared: System does not validate that insured period start date is later than the booking period defined in your base company’s booking terms

Relevant when: You want to prevent that bookings are made on new businesses or renewals registered in SICS before the inception date of the new business/ insured period.

Applicable for: P&C, Cede
Use Deposit as premium basis for Reinstatement Premium Calculation Selected: The system use Deposit premium as basis when calculating Reinstatement Premium. Deposit premium is used until all instalments are booked; then the booked premium is used as basis.

Cleared: The system use actual booked premium as as basis for Reinstatement Premium calculation.

Relevant when: You want to book Reinstatement Premium for inward or outward business, and want to use the registered Deposit Premium as basis until all instalments are booked. The booked premium (including any adjustments) is always used as basis after all instalments are booked.

Applicable for: P&C, Cede
Use FX Headline for Technical Worksheet Details Linked to Headline Selected: When booking on a Technical Worksheet on an Assumed Business of type Proportional Treaty, and for a detail linked to a Headline Loss, the system will use the FX rules defined for worksheet type Claim and if the Exchange Rate Category is FC - Daily Rate then the system will use the FX Date of Loss date as defined on the Headline Loss itself, if this is in use, else the HL Date of Loss from date. If FX Headline is not defined, or there are no special FX rule for Claim, or this is not an Assumed Business of type Prop Treaty, then the regular Technical Worksheet rules are used.
The occurrence year is automatically set to the year of the selected Headline Loss, and the details are excluded from the Occurrence Year Allocation order.

Cleared: The system uses the FX rules defined for Technical Accounts. The Occurrence Year is defaulted if the parameter is activated, and the details are included in the Occurrence Year Allocation order.

Relevant when: You want to book your proportional accounts on technical worksheets only, but apply the FX Date defined on the Headline Loss itself, and allocate all such details to the year of the Headline.

Applicable for: P&C, Cede
Original Responsible Partner Mandatory Selected: The “Original Responsible Partner” must be defined for all details which has a link to a Headline Loss.

Cleared: The Original Responsible Partner is optional.

Relevant when: You want to ensure that all Headline Loss details booked on a Technical Worksheet also has a link to an Original Responsible Partner.

Applicable for: P&C, Cede
Only Warning Message when Linked Headline Loss is outside IP Selected: The system will only present warning messages even when the Date of Loss of a linked Headline Loss is outside the Insured Period From date for the detail the Headline Loss is linked to on a technical worksheet.

Cleared: The system will present an error messages when the From date in the Date of Loss of a linked Headline Loss is before the Insured Period From date for the detail the Headline Loss is linked to on a technical worksheet e.g. when the business is a proportional treaty, the claims basis is Losses Occurring and the Loss Portfolio Entry/Withdrawal is missing or defined as NONE. The system will also present an error message when the Date of Loss is before the IP From date or after the IP To date for the detail the Headline Loss is linked to on a technical worksheet on facultative business with Claims basis defined. Also on a non-prop treaty if the Claims basis is Losses Occuring and the DoL on the HL is after the IP To date.

Relevant when: You want to ensure that the user only get warning messages and can continue the booking even if the Date of Loss on the linked Headline Loss is outside the IP of the detail when the system in some business scenarios else would present an error message.

Applicable for: P&C, Cede
Default Original Responsible Partner Selected: The partner which shall be set as the Original Responsible Partner if not defined on a detail linked to a Headline Loss.

Applicable for: P&C, Cede
Restrict Original Responsible Partner to Selected: Define the partner types which can be defined as Original Responsible Partner in the worksheet. The type ahead functionality only lists partners of defined types, and there is a validation when linking via Find Business Partner.

Cleared: The Original Responsible Partner can be any type.

Relevant when: You want to limit the Original Responsible Partners to specific types of partners, and that the list of suggestions appearing when using type ahead reflects the same.

Applicable for: P&C, CEDE

Remittance #

System parameters concerning the Remittance Worksheet functionality are located on the Remittance sub tab.

To see the remittance system parameters:

  1. Select System Administrators from SICS Workstation desktop.
  2. Open System Parameter Maintenance.
  3. Select the Accounting tab.
  4. Select the Remittance Properties or the Remittance Validation tab.

Remittance Properties #

System_Parameter_Accounting_Remittance_Properties_23.4.PNG

Field Description
Include Remittance in Settlement Balance Selected: You are allowed to include Remittance Worksheets in a Settlement Balance Group.

Cleared: You are not allowed to include Remittance Worksheets in a Settlement Balance Group.

Relevant when: You select this parameter when a previous Remittance, or part of a remittance, should be grouped together with other balances to achieve the settlement amount of the next expected remittance.

Applicable for: P&C, Life
Internal Remittance Equal Zero Selected: By using the payment type Internal Remittance for transfer of funds between Base Companies, y ou are not allowed to apply or close your remittance worksheet until the total of internal remittance balances equals Zero.

Cleared: If in a Remittance Worksheet the total of Internal Remittance balances are different from zero, a warning message appears. You are however allowed to apply/ close your worksheet.

Relevant when: This feature relates to Inter-Company transfers. You select the parameter if you have remittance balances relates to more than one Base Company and you want to assure that the transfer between base companies are properly per- formed without keeping outstanding balance on one of the Base Company’s ledgers.

Applicable for: P&C, Life
Is Group Remittance in Use Selected: The Remittance Group functionality is activated. When creating a Remittance worksheet, the menu option ‘Transform to Group’ is activated.

Cleared: The Remittance Group functionality is not active.

Relevant when: You activate the Remittance Grouping functionality by selecting this parameter. The functionality applies when you want to create payment transfer so that Base Company, Inward/Outward Business and System (P&C/Life) can be correctly recorded in the General Ledger System. (Refer to the chapter Remittance Grouping in the User’s Guide for further description about the functionality.)

Applicable for: P&C, Life
Group Remittance For Final Selected: The Remittance Group functionality is activated also for single remittances with Status Final. When a Final Remittance’s properties is open in View Mode, the menu option Create Group Remittance is activated.

Cleared: The option to create a Remittance Group for a Final remittance is not active.

Relevant when: You activate this when you want to be able to create Remittance Group even if the remittance has status Final. (Refer to the chapter Remittance Grouping in the User’s Guide for further description about the functionality.)

Applicable for: P&C , Life
Is Exchange Difference Remittance in Use Selected: The Create Exchange Difference Remittance option is enabled in the Settlement Pairing part of the Ledger Balances pairing window. The Create Exchange Difference Remittance as Zero Amount Remittance System Parameter is enabled.

Cleared: The Create Exchange Difference Remittance option is disabled in the Settlement Pairing part of the Ledger Balances pairing window. The Create Exchange Difference Remittance as Zero Amount Remittance System Parameter is disabled.

When a process ends up with an outstanding amount for the driving balance and one of the included balances has another currency than the driving balance, you can manually distribute the outstanding amount amongst the included balances by changing the Settlement amount in xxx (driving currency). By adjusting the Exchange rate an exchange difference in Base currency is calculated by the system.

Relevant when: You should select this parameter when you want to activate the functionality described in the Create Exchange Difference Remittance as Zero amount parameter and use the functionality connected to that parameter.

Applicable for: P&C, Life
Create Exchange Difference Remittance as Zero Amount Selected: You are allowed to select this parameter when the Remittance Parameter Is Exchange Difference Remittance in Use is selected.

The Exchange Difference Remittance Balance created in the Create Balance Pairing process has:
* An exchange difference amount in base currency. (The amount is based on the outstanding amount in driving balance currency converted to base currency.)
* Currency = one of the included balances currencies other than the driving.
* Amount to settle = 0 (zero)

Cleared: The Exchange Difference Remittance Balance created in the Create Balance Pairing process has:
* Exchange difference amount = 0 (zero)
* Currency = driving balance currency
* Amount to settle = the outstanding amount

Relevant when: The Create Balance Pairing process ends up with an outstanding amount for the driving balance and one or more of the included balances has another currency than the driving balance. In these situations you can select the Create Exchange Difference Remittance option to gather this difference on one separate balance instead of distributing the difference between the included balances. Selecting the parameter or leaving it cleared determines the creation of the Exchange Difference Remittance balance. (For further reference about the functionality, see the Create Exchange Difference Remittance chapter in the User’s Guide.)

Applicable for: P&C, Life
Grouping of Internal Remittances Selected: ‘Internal’ remittances will be grouped. You have created two or more remittances with type ‘Internal’. The system parameter is only applicable when ‘Internal Remittance equal zero’ system parameter is set. The grouping will happen when the remittances are set to ‘Final’, and the SICS validates that all included ‘Internal’ remittances sums up to zero.

Cleared: New remittance balances are created through the Reverse and Replace Remittance and the Reverse Worksheet/Balance functions without a link to the other remittances except from comments in the Notes field.

Relevant when: You create two or more remittances with the type ‘internal’ and you need to know, as part of your general ledger interface, which ‘Internal’ remittances that belong together.

Applicable for: P&C, Life
Is Classification Group Remittance in Use Selected: The Remittance Classification Group functionality is activated. When creating a Remittance worksheet, the menu option ‘Transform to Classfication Group’ is activated. And at the same time, the system will deselect and disable the parameter ‘Is Group Remittance in Use’.

Cleared: The Remittance Classification Group functionality is not active.

Relevant when: You activate the Remittance Classification Grouping functionality by selecting this parameter. With this new functionality, the source remittance worksheet can be broken down into multiple group internal remittance worksheets according to the different classifications. (Refer to the chapter Remittance Classification Grouping in the User’s Guide for further description about the functionality.)

Applicable for: P&C, Life, Cede
Mandatory - Rem Class 1 Selected: Indicates that Rem Class 1 field on the Remittance, More Details tab, under Classification, is mandatory. This is independent if Rem Class 2 or 3 is selected or not. If selected it becomes mandatory for both direction (Paid/Received) all all statuses.

If this parameter is selected in combination with the parameter Independent creation of Cash Paid Remittance not allowed under Accounting, Balance Pairing and a Paid remittance is manually created with the system defined value Cash Payment in the field Rem Class 1 the system will not allow this. A remittance with this combination must be paired and set to Settled immediately.

Cleared: The Remittance classification Rem Class 1 is not mandatory.

Relevant when: You want to force the user to enter Rem Class 1 on the remittance worksheet for better allocation to General Ledger and reporting of Remittance

Applicable for: P&C, Life, Cede
Mandatory - Rem Class 2 Selected: Indicates that Rem Class 2 field on the Remittance, More Details tab, under Classification, is mandatory. This is independent if Rem Class 1 or 3 is selected or not. If selected it becomes mandatory for both direction (Paid/Received) all all statuses.

Cleared: The Remittance classification Rem Class 2 is not mandatory.

Relevant when: You want to force the user to enter Rem Class 2 on the remittance worksheet for better allocation to General Ledger and reporting of Remittance

Applicable for: P&C, Life, Cede
Mandatory - Rem Class 3 Selected: Indicates that Rem Class 3 field on the Remittance, More Details tab, under Classification, is mandatory. This is independent if Rem Class 1 or 2 is selected or not. If selected it becomes mandatory for both direction (Paid/Received) all all statuses.

Cleared: The Remittance classification Rem Class 3 is not mandatory.

Relevant when: You want to force the user to enter Rem Class 3 on the remittance worksheet for better allocation to General Ledger and reporting of Remittance

Applicable for: P&C, Life, Cede
Paid Remittance as Default Selected: When this system parameter is selected, when creating a new Remittance worksheet from the scratch (i.e. not from any source balance), the system always opens it as a ‘Paid Remittance’by default. One can navigate to the ‘Received’ check box to create a Received remittance worksheet.

Cleared: When this System Parameter is switched off, ‘Received’ remittance worksheet will be opened by default when opened from the scratch (i.e. not from any source balance)

Relevant when: You want to open up a ‘Paid’ remittance as a default.

Applicable for: P&C, Cede, Life
Dummy Bus. Partner for Payment To define Dummy Business Partner for Payment:

1. Click the Edit button.
2. Select the Find button next to the field. The Find: Business Partner window appears.
3. Find and select the applicable Business Partner
4. Double-click or select Transfer from the pop-up menu. The Business Partner is transferred to the Dummy Bus. Partner for Payment field.

To remove Dummy Business Partner for Payment:

When a Dummy Business Partner for payment no longer is applicable, you can remove the defined Business Partner

1. Click Edit button.
2. Click the Remove button next to the Define Dummy Business Partner for Payment field.
3. Click OK. The window is updated with an empty field.

Selected: A Business Partner is defined. The Dummy Business Partner is used to determine the Business Partner Ledger to which a Settlement EDI Message is to be processed when the messages’ Business Partner unknown to SICS. Also Manually Remittances can be allocated to the defined business partner.

Cleared: A Settlement EDI Message failing to link to a business partner and not finding any dummy business partner will cause the whole batch to reject. (Settlement batches are processed ’en-bloc’, i.e. all messages are processed or all messages are rejected.)

Relevant when: When a Business Partner in a Settlement EDI Message is not recognised by SICS, the message will use a Dummy Partner. Dummy Partners are defined at two levels - by stamp number defined in Business Partner window or generally, i.e. in this parameter. Define a Business Partner in order to avoid Settlement EDI Message batches to be rejected because of one unknown Business Partner among the messages.

Manually registered remittance’s can also be allocated to the defined Dummy Partner, e.g. if the correct Business Partner is unknown.

Applicable for: P&C, Life
Book Bank Charges as separate Remittances Selected: When a Remittance is booked and the Bank Charges is booked in the Bank Charges field, a separate Bank Charges Remittance Worksheet is created automatically and linked to the “parent” remittance worksheet. This link is used when the Remittance is part of a balance pairing.

The Bank Charges Currency and Amount is shown in the Currency and Balance columns of the Business Partner Ledger as a separate row with a unique Worksheet ID and the Balance Type Bank Charge Remittance. I.e. the Bank Charge Currency and Bank Charge Amount columns of the Business Partner Ledger are empty.

You are also able to point to a net remittance already booked in the Business Partner Ledger and book the Bank Charges. A Worksheet with Balance Type Bank Charge Remittance is created with a link to the source remittance.

Cleared: When a Remittance is booked and the Bank Charges is booked in the Bank Charges field, the Bank Charges is shown in the Bank Charge Currency and Bank Charge Amount columns of the Business Partner Ledger. The Worksheet ID and Balance Type is the same as for the net Remittance.

Relevant when: The functionality only applies for Received Remittances. You should leave this parameter cleared if you from your bank receive information about both the ‘gross’ amount (paid by your client) and the bank charges. In these cases you record the ‘gross’ amount as Payment Amount and the Bank Charges as Charges.

You should select this parameter if you from your bank receive only the ’net’ amount (paid by your client less bank charges). The Bank Charges is not always given or it is given as separate information.

Applicable for: P&C, Life
Partner’s Bank Account Currency same as Payment Currency for Paid Remittance Selected: Applying a Paid Remittance Worksheet, the system validates that the Payment Currency corresponds with the Currency selected in the Partner’s Bank Account field.

Cleared: There is no validation between the Payment Currency field and the Partner’s Bank Account field in a Paid Remittance Worksheet. You are allowed to apply a worksheet with different currencies selected in these fields.

Relevant when: You should select this parameter when you want to an incorrect bank account being selected for a paid remittance.

Applicable for: P&C, Life
Partners Bank Account Optional for Pending Paid Remittance Selected: If this parameter is selected and the user creates a Paid Remittance of any status, the system will not validate the Partner’s Bank Account field at all, i.e. if it is present or missing.


Cleared: It is not be possible to finalize a Paid Remittance when status is pending if the Partner’s Bank Account is missing.

Relevant when: You select this parameter when information about the partner’s bank account is not necessary to be given on a paid remittance e.g. because this information is found outside SICS.

Applicable for: P&C, Life
Void Remittance when Reverse Selected: The default payment type of a reversed remittance is Void. For example, Void P-check for the reversal (annulling) of an original paid remittance of type check.

Cleared: This is the default value. The default payment type of a reversed (annulling) remittance is the same as the original (booked by a mistake) remittance.

Relevant when: Select this parameter when you eant to distinct between a real remittance and a remittance created to annul a remittance booked by mistake.

Applicable for: P&C
Allow Input of Wire ID on Remittance Worksheet Selected: Allows input of a Wire Id on a Remittance Worksheet if Payment Type is Wire, Wire2, Void P-Wire, Void R-Wire, Internal, Group Wire, Group Wire 2, Group Internal and Group External

Cleared: Input of a Wire Id on a Remittance Worksheet is not allowed

Relevant when: Select this parameter if you want the users to be able to enter a Wire Id on remittances with Payment Type Wire. If your company does not need this option, this parameter can be cleared and the Wire No field will not be shown on the Remittance Worksheet.

Applicable for: P&C, Life
Status Authorized is not available for status Write Off Selected: If this parameter is selected and the user creates a Write Off remittance, status Authorized is not available for selection.

If the Payment Type of an Authorized remittance is changed from f.ex.. Wire to Write Off, and the Status is not automatically reset to In Progress (this depends on other system parameter settings), then a validation error will prevent the Remittance from being saved as an Authorized Remittance.

Cleared: You are allowed to save a Write Off Remittance as Authorized.

Relevant when: You select this parameter when you want to avoid that Write Off remittances remains in status Authorized especially when already settled.

Applicable for: P&C, Life
Link Business Insured Period To Remittances Selected: A separate page/tab named Business Link on the Remittance Worksheet becomes visible. Two input fields are enabled in edit mode on this tab, one to enter a business and one to select a definite insured period on this business.

Cleared: The page/tab Business Link is not visible on Remittance Worksheets.

Relevant when: Select this parameter if you need to link the remittance balances to businesses and insured periods for reporting purposes. By linking the remittances to businesses/insured periods it is possible to determine the receivable and payable amounts per business or even down to the insured period through reports.

Applicable for: P&C, Life
Enable Remittance Bank Account Split Selected: A new option to split the Bank Currency/Amount in more than one Bank Accounts, becomes enabled on Remittance Worksheet. By selecting this option a table will appear where the user can split the Payment Amount into more Bank Currency/Amounts and Bank Accounts.

Cleared: The new option to split bank account amount is disabled.

Relevant when: When you have situations where a Paid Remittance is created in status Authorized and you need to split the bank currency/amount in different currencies e.g. because there is insufficient amount in the foreign currency bank account, then you should activate this system parameter.

Applicable for: P&C, Cede, Life
Prepopulate Due Date/Value Date for Remittance Creation Selected: When paid remittance is created with status Planned or In Progress and payment type is Wire, Check or eMessaging .Then system will set the Due Date and the Value Date equal the current calendar date (creation date of the remittance) + the number of days given in the new system parameter.NB! The number of days added are business days, i.e., Saturdays and Sundays are not counted.

Cleared: No Value date and Due date is prepopulated when paid remittamce is created .

Relevant when: You want to prepopulate Due date/Value for paid remittance creation with higher accuracy on Payment Date and less ‘urgent’ payments created in error by using the incorrect current date.

Applicable for: P&C, Life,Cede
Remittance creation Date plus no of days in future The number of days defined will set the Due date and Value date equal the current calendar date (creation date of the remittance) + the number of days given in the new system parameter.

Values: Any value between 0 and 99

Validations: Enabled when parameter Prepopulate Due Date/Value Date for Remittance Creation is selected

Applicable for: P&C, Life,Cede

Remittance Validation #

System_Parameter_Accounting_Remittance_Validation_23.4.PNG

Field Description
Own Bank Account Mandatory for Remittance Selected: The Base Company’s Bank Account Information is mandatory when the Remittance Worksheet is registered.

Cleared: You are allowed to save the Remittance worksheet when no Base Company bank account information has been entered.

Relevant when: Select this parameter when you want your own bank account to be mandatory for each remittance worksheet.

Applicable for: P&C, Life
All Paid Remittance Status Mandatory This system parameter can either be used alone or in combination with the Default is Authorized for Paid Remittance and Default is Authorized for Received Remittance system parameters.

Selected: A remittance must progress through each status before it can be closed as ‘Final’. This parameter applies for paid remittances only. When a paid remittance is created, the status is set to ‘In Progress’. It must be changed to ‘Authorised’ before the remittance can be closed with status ‘Final’. The ‘Default is Authorized for Paid Remittance’ and the ’ Default is Authorized for Received Remittance’ system parameters get enabled.

Cleared: You can select any status in the paid remittance worksheet regardless of any prior status that might have been in the same worksheet.

Relevant when: You select this parameter when you want paid remittances to progress through the different statuses. Each status is associated to security options allowing different staff members to have different authority levels when handling the remittance. One staff member might be allowed to initiate a remittance in the system, but might not be allowed to bring the remittance to the status of ‘Final’. For further information about the user authorisation for setting different statuses, see section 12.7 “Using Domain Restrictions”.

Applicable for: P&C, Life
Default is Authorized for Paid Remittance The ‘All Paid Remittance Status Mandatory’ system parameter must first be selected for SICS to enable this parameter.

Selected: If this parameter is selected and the user either manually creates a paid remittance (including reverse of a received remittance and copy of a paid remittance) or uses the function ‘Generate Payment Request’, the only available status is Authorized (or Inactive).When having saved the remittance as Authorized, update of the remittance is restricted to the following fields: Status, Value Date, Due Date, Date of Booking and Booking Year and Period. To be able to adjust any other value in the remittance worksheet, you have to change the status to Rejected. In Rejected status updates are not restricted. The remittance must be Authorized again before it can be finalized.

Cleared: The user can select any status on the paid remittance worksheet regardless of any prior status on the same worksheet (unless the parameter All Paid Remittance Status Mandatory is selected).

Relevant when: You select this parameter when you want paid remittances to be set to ‘Authorized’ as per default. For further information about user authorization for setting different statuses, see section 12.7 “Using Domain Restrictions”.

Applicable for: P&C, Life
Default is Authorized for Received The ‘All Paid Remittance Status Mandatory’ system parameter must first be selected for SICS to enable this parameter.

Selected: If this parameter is selected and the user manually creates a received remittance (including reverse of a paid remittance and copy of a received remittance), the only available status is Authorized (or Inactive).When having saved the remittance as Authorized, update of the remittance is restricted to the following fields: Status, Value Date, Due Date, Date of Booking and Booking Year and Period. To be able to adjust any other value in the remittance worksheet, you have to change the status to Rejected. In Rejected status updates are not restricted. The remittance must be Authorized again before it can be finalized.

Cleared: You can select any status on the received remittance worksheet regardless of any prior status on the same worksheet.

Relevant when: You select this parameter when you want received remittances to be set to ‘Authorized’ as default. For further information about user authorization to set the different statuses, see section 12.7 “Using Domain Restrictions “.

Applicable for: P&C, Life
Authorized Status Requires Different Signature Selected: If this parameter is selected the system requires that the person changing a Paid remittance to Authorized is not the same as the one that created the remittance.

Cleared: The system will not check the signature for any previous status when the user sets a remittance to Authorized.

Relevant when: Select this parameter if you want to be sure that one user alone can not complete a remittance with status Authorized. This parameter is dependent of the ‘All Paid Remittance Status Mandatory’ being active and the ‘Default is Authorized for Paid Remittance’ being inactive

Applicable for: P&C, Cede, Life
Final status requires different signature Selected: If this parameter is selected the system requires that the person changing the remittance (paid or received) to ‘Final’ is not the same as the one that set it to the previous status, e.g. Authorized. If different users have set the remittance to Authorized first and subsequent times, the one setting it to Final must be different from all of them.

Cleared: The system will not check the signature for the previous status when the user set a remittance to ‘Final’.

Relevant when: Select this parameter if you want to be sure that one user alone can not complete a remittance with status Final. This parameter is independent of the ‘All Paid Remittance Status Mandatory’, ‘Default is Authorized for Paid Remit- tance’ and means that you can select this parameter even if the parameter ‘Default is Authorized for Paid Remittance’ has not been selected. In the scenario where the ‘Default is Authorized for Paid Remittance‘has been selected a remittance could be set directly to ‘Final’ but if this parameter is selected the system will make sure that at least two different users have updated the remittance, one user sets the remittance to a pending status and another user to ‘Final’.

Applicable for: P&C, Life
Update Paid Remittance in Status Rejected only Selected: This parameter is enabled only if the above parameter Final status requires different signature is activated. If this parameter is selected the system disable all fields on a Paid remittance worksheet if the status is different than Rejected. The only fields open for input is the Partner’s Reference and the Notes. The status must be changed to Rejected if update is required and this is done by use of the menu button on the remittance by selecting the option Change Status To…

Cleared: The system will follow the existing rules for enabling and disabling fields on a Paid remittance worksheet.

Relevant when: Select this parameter if you want to be sure that the contents of a Paid remittance is not changed during the authorization and approval phases untilthe remittance becomes Final.

By use of this parameter in combination with other remittance parameters and domain restrictions it is possible to secure that at least two or even three users must be involved to get a Paid remittance from In Progress to status Final and to be sure that nothing is changed in between. If some information on the remittance is wrong the status must be set back to Rejected and the process starts all over again.

Applicable for: P&C, Life
Block Authorized Payments from Being Inactivated Selected: When this parameter is selected it is not possible to change the Status on a Remittance from Authorized to Inactivated. Affect both Received and Paid Remittances, both when the Status is changed manually and updated via Interfaces, e.g. web service.

Cleared: There is no restriction from setting the status to Inactivated, even for a Remittance in Status Authorized

Relevant when: You want to be sure that a remittance that has come to the Status of Authorized in the workflow are not set directly to Inactivated.

Applicable for: P&C, Life
Bank Currency same as Payment Currency for Paid Remittance Selected: When this system parameter is selected, when creating a Paid Remittance worksheet, the system validates the Bank currency against the Payment currency. If the two are not the same, it throws a validation message ’ Bank Currency not the same as Payment Currency’

Cleared: When the System Parameter is switched off, no such validations are made and a Paid Remittance worksheet can be created even if Bank Currency and the Payment Currency are not the same

Relevant when: You want to make sure that the bank currency and the payment currency are the same

Applicable for: P&C, Cede, Life
Own Bank Account Currency must match Bank Currency Selected: When creating a Remittance worksheet, both Paid and Received, the system validates the Bank Account Currencies for the given Base Company/R.U., against the Payment Currency. If there exists only ONE Bank Account Currency for the given Payment Currency this will be defaulted in the Bank Account field. If there exists MORE Bank Accounts for the given Payment Currency the system will default one of the bank accounts in the list with the possibility for the user to select any other bank accounts in the same currency. If NO Bank Account Currency matching the Payment Currency the Bank Account field is empty. The Bank Account field will only have bank account available with the same currency as the Payment Currency.

Cleared: All Bank Accounts defined for the Base Company/R.U. will be available and no accounts are defaulted unless there is ONLY ONE Bank Account Currency matching the Payment Currency, then this one is defaulted.

Relevant when: You want to make sure that you cannot select a bank account for the base company with a currency that does not match the Payment Currency

Applicable for: P&C, Cede, Life
Indicator for Level of Business on Remittance Worksheet Required Selected: The Level of Business Indicator field in the More Details tab of the Remittance Worksheet is enabled. You have to determine the Direction, i.e. Inward or Outward, in this field before you can complete your Remittance Worksheet. Additional it will not be possible to do settlement balance pairing between balances of different level.

Cleared: The Level of Business Indicator field in the More Details tab of the Remittance Worksheet is disabled.

Relevant when: You should select the parameter when you want to indicate the direction (inward or outward) for each balance of the worksheet. The direction may be required by the General Ledger system in order to record the remittance correctly.

Applicable for: P&C, Life
Balance Pairing across Level of Business Allowed Selected: Allows balance pairing across levels of business.

Cleared: Balance pairing across levels of business is not allowed.

Relevant when: You should select the parameter when the level of business indicator is set for other purposes than preventing balance pairing. The parameter is enabled only when the above system parameter ‘Indicator for Level of Business on Remittance Worksheet Required’ is selected.
Update of Level of Business Indicator on Final Remittances Allowed Selected: The Level of Business Indicator field in the More Details tab of the Remittance Worksheet is enabled even when the Remittance Worksheet status is Final. You can determine the Direction, i.e. Inward or Outward, in this field, but it is not mandatory and can be set blank/None as well. The Level of Business Indicator can only be updated on Remittances which are Unsettled.

Cleared: The Level of Business Indicator field in the More Details tab of the Remittance Worksheet which are in status Final is disabled.

Relevant when: You may select the parameter when incoming remittances are fetched e.g. from the GL into SICS automatically and you want to indicate the direction (inward or outward) for each balance of the worksheet which are in status Final. The direction may be required by the General Ledger system in order to record the remittance correctly. The parameter is enabled only when the system parameter ‘Indicator for Level of Business on Remittance Worksheet Required’ is selected.

Applicable for: P&C, Life
Update of Final Remittances Allowed through Web Services Selected: The fields of the Remittance Worksheet can be updated through Web Services even when the Remittance Worksheet status is Final same as Online. The update of Remittance can be done through updateRemittanceBalance API.

Cleared: The Remittance Worksheets are not allowed to update through Web Services which are in status Final.

Relevant when: You should select the parameter when you want to update the fields of remittances which are in status Final through Web Service to achieve Online functionality.
Value Date within Booking Year and Period Selected: Value Date must be within Booking Year and Period. Please note that if the parameter Value Date mandatory only on status Final is activated, the validation is only made when status is Final.

Cleared: No validation of Value Date against Booking Year and Period

Relevant when: Select this parameter if you want to make sure that the Booking Year and Period covers the Value Date on remittance bookings.

The following remittance types (values from table 00175 Reference Data) are excluded from the validation and no validation of value date within booking year and period will be performed irrespective of whether the above system parameter is selected or not:
BCHARGE - Bank Charge
EDI - EDI
EXDIFF - Exchange Difference
INT - Internal
WRITE_OFF - Write Off

Applicable for: P&C, Life
Value Date in Future Allowed Selected: You are allowed to enter a future date in the ‘Value Date’ field of the remittance worksheet. The value date is the date of the remittance given by the bank on the Bank Credit/Debit advice. This parameter in combination with selecting the parameter Validation of Value/Due Date on Remittance will also enable the field Number of days allowed in Future for Value/Due Date

Cleared: The value date on the remittance worksheet cannot be greater than today’s date. The validation does only apply when the status of the remittance worksheet is changed to ‘Final’.

Relevant when: You should leave this parameter cleared if you want to restrict the possibility to register future value dates in the Remittance Worksheets.

Applicable for: P&C, Life
Value Date Mandatory only on Status Final Selected: The system requires a value date only for the Status ‘Final’. If a value date is not entered when the status is Final, a validation message appears. For all other statuses the system accepts and updates the Remittance Worksheet when no Value Date is entered. The functionality only applies for Paid Remittances.

Cleared: The system follows the Interface Trigger Rule for Paid Remittances. If for instance ‘Authorised’ is a trigger for the interface, the Value Date is mandatory when the worksheet has the status Authorised.

Relevant when: Select the parameter when you want to overrule the Interface Trigger Rule for Paid Remittance. The Value Date is consequently only mandatory for Paid Remittances with the status Final.

Applicable for: P&C, Life
Give Warning Message when Due Date in Past Selected: If this parameter is selected and the user creates a Paid, pending Remittance (‘Open’, ‘Authorized’, ‘In Progress’ etc.), with a Due Date prior to the current date, the system issues a warning message. It will also disable the parameter Validation of Value/Due Date on Remittance since it makes no sense to define both.

Cleared: No validation of Due Date against current date is performed.

Relevant when: You select this parameter when you want the users to be aware that the Due Date is in past. The user can then change the Due Date of the Remittance or leave it unchanged.

Applicable for: P&C, Life
Give Warning Message when Due Date in Future Selected: A warning message is given when a Pending Remittance is created with Due Date higher than current date + number of days specified in parameter Number of days allowed in Future. It will also disable the parameter Validation of Value/Due Date on Remittance since it makes no sense to define both.

Cleared: No warning message given on pending Paid Remittances when Due Date is in the future

Relevant when: You want to prevent users from creating Paid Remittances with Due Date in the future by a mistake.

Applicable for: P&C, Life
Number of days allowed in Future The number of days higher than current date allowed for Due Date on Remittance Worksheet before warning is given

Values: Any value between 0 and 99

Validations: Enabled when parameter Give Warning Message when Due Date in Future is selected.

Applicable for: P&C, Life
Validation of Value/Due Date on Remittance Selected: It will enable the two input fields below; Number of days allowed in Future for Value/Due Date and Number of days allowed in Past for Value/Due Date. When selected, the system will present an error message to the user if the Value Date or the Due Date is either lower than the number of days allowed in past or higher than the number of days allowed in future.
Additional, this parameter also opens up for editing the Value Date/Due Date on a Final Remittance if it is Unsettled and not transferred to General Ledger.
It will also disable the parameters Give Warning Message when Due Date in Past and Give Warning Message when Due Date in Future since it makes no sense to define both.

Cleared: The Value Date/Due Date is not checked in relation to how many days it is in past/future.

Relevant when: Select this parameter and give number of days in past/future if you want to make sure that the Value/Due dates given are not too far in the past/futuer.

Applicable for: P&C, Life
Number of days allowed in Future for Value/Due Date The number of days higher than current date allowed for Value Date or Due Date if Value Date is blank on Remittance Worksheet before an error message is given

Values: Any value between 0 and 99

Validations: Enabled when parameter Validation of Value/Due Date on Remittance is selected in combination with selecting the parameter Value Date in Future Allowed.

Applicable for: P&C, Life
Number of days allowed in Past for Value/Due Date The number of days lower than current date allowed for Value Date or Due Date if Value Date is blank on Remittance Worksheet before an error message is given

Values: Any value between 0 and 99

Validations: Enabled when parameter Validation of Value/Due Date on Remittance is selected.

Applicable for: P&C, Life

Balance Pairing #

The system parameters related to Balance Pairing are located on the Balance Pairing subtab.

To open the Balance Pairing sub tab:

  1. Select System Administration from SICS Workstation desktop.
  2. Open System Parameter Maintenance.
  3. Select the Accounting tab
  4. Select the Balance Pairing tab

System_Parameter_Accounting_Balance_Paring_25.3.png

Field Description
Pairing allowed on Open Remittance Selected: During a settlement pairing process you are allowed to include a Remittance worksheet with a status that is different from ‘Final’, i.e. the worksheet is in a pending status.

Cleared: You are only able to include Remittance Worksheets with the status ‘Final’ in settlement pairing process.

Relevant when: You keep this parameter cleared when you do not want to include a pending remittance worksheet in a settlement pairing process. The open Remittance Worksheet might be subject to changes and approval before status is changed to Final.

Applicable for: P&C, Life
Pairing Allowed on Open Status Authorized only The Pairing allowed on Open Remittance system parameter must be selected before this system parameter is enabled.

Selected: During the pairing process the user is only allowed to include pending remittance worksheets with the status ‘Authorized’.

Cleared: Depending on the setting of the Pairing allowed on Open Remittance system parameter, the user is allowed to include remittance worksheets with all pending statuses in the settlement pairing process or not.

Relevant when: You select this parameter when you want to restrict the pairing process to only include pending remittances with the status ‘Authorized’ in the settlement pairing process. When this system parameter has been selected, SICS only allows the annulment of the pairing when the accounting remittance status has been changes to ‘Final’.

Applicable for: P&C, Life
Validate BYRP in Balance Pairing Selected: When creating a Balance Pairing, the Booking Year and Period on all balances included in the pairing is validated against the default Booking Year & Period for remittances in the <default settings> under Base Company Specific Settings. If any of the balances included in the Balance Pairing has a Booking Yearand Period higher than the default Period for remittances you will not be allowed to include these in the Balance Pairing.

Cleared: When creating a Balance Pairing, there is no validation of Booking Year and Period Relevant when: You want to make sure that balances included in a Balance Pairing do not have a Booking Year and Period higher than the default period for remittances.

Applicable for: P&C, Life
BYRP according to Technical Balance Selected: When creating a Balance Pairing, the Booking Year and Period will be set equal to the Booking Year & Period of the technical/claim balance in the pairing, if this period is among the open Booking Year and Periods for the actual Base Company, BUT ONLY if it is equal to or higher than the Booking Rules/Balance Pairing Default Booking Year/Period, if this is defined or the general Default Booking Year/Period for this Base Company, either the default for the balance pairing if defined or the general default. If the Booking Year and Period of the included technical/claim balance is not open for the actual Base Company, then the Default period is set.

Cleared: When creating a Balance Pairing, the Booking Year and Period will be set from the Default Booking Year & Period or the Overruled default Booking Year and Period defined for Balance Pairing, if defined, for the actual Base Company on the driving balance.

Relevant when: When having more than one booking period open so that technical/claim bookings get current booking period, you might want to process pairings in the previous booking period when the technical/claim balance inlcuded in the paring took place.

Applicable for: P&C, Life
Balance Pairing across Base Companies/Legal Reporting Units not allowed Selected: You are restricted from performing Balance Pairing as well as Annulling of settled balances including balances of different Base Companies and/or Legal Reporting Units. Selecting this parameter enables and selects also the parameter ‘Balance Grouping across Base Companies/Legal Reporting Units not allowed’.

Cleared: You are allowed to perform Balance Pairing as well as annulling of settled balances including balances of different Base Companies and/or Legal Reporting Units.

Relevant when: You should select this parameter if you want to prevent doing settlement as well as annulling of balance pairing between balances of different base companies.

Applicable for: P&C, Life
Restrictions when Pairing Write off Remittance Selected: When a Balance Pairing contains one or several Remittance balances with Type = Write Off, the system will do some extra validations with the following restrictions:
a) The system does not allow the pairing if it contains different currencies
b) The system does not allow the pairing if any of the included technical or claim balances contains details linked to insured period with different Base Company than the one on the Write Off remittance
c) You are not allowed to create a Write Off amount in the Pairing process when a Remittance balance with Type = Write Off is part of the Balance Pairing

Cleared: There are no specific restrictions when a Write Off Remittance is included in the Balance Pairing

Relevant when: You should select this parameter if you want to apply specific restrictions when a Remittance with Type = Write Off is included in a Balance Pairing.

Applicable for: P&C, Life
Balance Grouping across Base Companies/Legal Reporting Units not Allowed Selected: You are not allowed to group balances of different Base Companies/Legal Reporting Units in an Account Balance Group or in a Settlement Balance Group. Selecting this parameter also enables the parameter ‘Use Base Currency On Driving Balance Base Company In Exch Diff Calculation’.

Cleared: You are allowed to group balances of different Base Companies/Legal Reporting Units in an Account Balance Group or in a Settlement Balance Group.

Relevant when: You are only allowed to select this parameter in combination with the parameter ‘Balance Pairing across Base Companies/Legal Reporting Units not allowed’.
You should select the parameter when you want to avoid balances of different Base Companies and/or Legal Reporting Units to be grouped together in one Account Balance Group or Settlement Balance Group. You should leave this parameter cleared when you use the Remittance Grouping functionality. Using this functionality you are allowed to make settlement balances grouping balances of different base companies together and link the settlement balance group to a remittance.
A remittance group will be created if the Balance Group contains balances of different Base Companies. The Settlement Balance Group and the remittance (single or group) can be automatically paired when they are linked For further information about Account/Settlement Balance groups, refer to the Business Partner Ledger documentation in the User’s Guide.

Applicable for: P&C, Life
Use Base Currency On Driving Balance Base Company In Exch Diff Calculation Selected: The Exchange Difference and the Settlement Amount in the balance pairing are calculated via the Base Currency on the driving balance’s Base Company and is expressed in this Base Currency. The Settlement Amount in the Account Balance Group and Settlement Balance Group is calculated via the Base Currency on the first balance in the group.

Cleared: The Exchange Difference and the Settlement amount in the balance pairing are calculated via the default Base Currency set in the system. The Settlment Amounts in the Account Blance Group and Settlement Balance Group are also calculated via the default base currency.

Relevant when: You are only allowed to select this parameter in combination with the parameter ‘Balance Pairing across Base Companies/Legal Reporting Units not allowed’ and ‘Balance Grouping across Base Companies/Legal Reporting Units not Allowed’

Applicable for: P&C, Life
When Pairing, Always Use Remittance as the Driving Balance Selected: The Remittance Balance has to be used as the driving balance in order to be included in the pairing process. If e.g. a Technical balance is selected as the driving balance you are not able to include the Remittance Balance in the pairing process.

When selected together with the system parameter Pending Status for Balance Pairing in Use and starting a balance pairing from a partially settled remittance balance, the previous created balance pairings with this remittance will be shown in the pairing window and allow the user to continue the pairing by adding or removing more balances.

When continuing the balance pairing from a remittance balance which has also been an included balance in another pending pairing, the balances listed in the balance pairing container will be both the included balances of the pairing where this remittance was the driving balance AND the driving balance(s) of the other pairing(s) where this remittance was an included balance.

All the previously included balances when listed in the balance pairing container will be disabled i.e all fields will be non editable and they can only be removed from the pairing.

Cleared: Regardless of the Remittance Balance being used as driving balance or not, it is allowed to be included in the pairing process.

Relevant when: By selecting this parameter you will prevent mixing what type of balance is driving balance and what types is included. These are the rules: If the driving is technical or claim balance you cannot include remittance balances. If the driving is a remittance you can include technical balances (technical/claim/cession/retrocession worksheets) and remittance balances, but only if the system parameter “Balance Pairing Group in Use” is not activated. If this parameter is ON, then you cannot include remittance balances in combination with technical balances. The only exception to this is Bank Charges remittances can be included.

Applicable for: P&C, Life
Exclude Definite Pairings from the above restriction This parameter is enabled only when the parameter When Pairing, Always Use Remittance as the Driving Balance. Selected: Combination of technical/claim and remittance balances in the balance pairing is allowed except they are both in Pending status.

Cleared: Restrict mixing technical/claim and remittance balances in the balance pairing, independent of pairing status.

Relevant when: Use of the function ‘Replace Selected URB in Pairing’ to replace URB with e.g. a remittance balance and there already exists other definite pairing between technical/claim balances and the driving remittance balance .

Applicable for: P&C, Cede
Partial Pairing between Technical or Claim Balances Not Allowed This parameter is enabled only when the parameter When Pairing, Always Use Remittance as the Driving Balance is selected. Selected: Partial pairing between Technical and/or Claim Balances is not allowed. Partial pairing between a Write Off Remittance and Technical and/or Claim Balances is not allowed. When a normal Remittance balance is the driving balance partial pairing of a Technical or a Claim Balance is allowed.

Cleared: Partial pairing between Technical and/or Claim Balances is allowed.

Relevant when: When you allow partial pairing of Technical and Claim Balances only when it is between a Remittance as driving balance and Technical/Claim Balances as included balances.

Applicable for: P&C, Cede, Life
Keep Settlement Balance Group after Pairing Selected: When the Settlement Balance Group is included in a Balance Pairing and becomes fully settled, the Settlement Balance remains a group after pairing.
The Settlement Balance Group’s individual settled balances keep the ‘Included in Settlement Balance’ indicator as ‘Yes’.
The Settlement Balance can furthermore be searched for among the settled balances as a group. All the Settlement Balance Group members have to be included in the Balance Pairing process.
NB! If the currency of the driving balance (remittance) in the balance pairing is different from the Settlement Balance Group currency then the Settlement Balance Group is removed after pairing independent of this system parameter.

Cleared: This is the default value. When the Settlement Balance Group is included in a Balance Pairing and becomes fully settled, the group is removed after pairing. The ‘Include in Settlement Balance Group’ indicator is removed for the group’s individual settled balances. You are allowed to include some but not all members of a Settlement Balance Group in a Balance Pairing. The group will in this case also be removed.

Relevant when: Select the parameter when you want to be able to inspect the details of a Settlement Balance Group also after settlement.

Applicable for: P&C, Life
Enable Link between Remittance and Tech /Claim Balance pairing Selected: When generating a remittance based upon a technical worksheet balance or claim worksheet balance, the system creates a link between the two, and enables the Automatic Pairing functionality. The link also enables the creation of a Claim Remittance Advice although the selected claim balance has not yet been paired.

Cleared: This is the default value. The link between the claim or technical balance, and a pending remittance is not enabled, and automatic pairing is not enabled except for “Settlement Balance” members. Claim Remittance Advices cannot be produced unless a pairing link exists.

Relevant when: You want to maintain the link between the generated remittance and the technical/claim balance, and/or want to be able to produce Claim Remittance Advices although the system does not allow “Pairing Allowed on Open Remittance”.

Applicable for: P&C
Automatic Balance Pairing when change of Remittance Status The Enable Link between Remittance and Tech /Claim Balance pairing system parameter must be selected before this system parameter is enabled.
Selected: When the user changes status of an already linked but not paired to a balance remittance to the status ‘Final’, SICS automatically makes a balance pairing. If the Pairing Allowed on open Status Authorized only system pararmeter is selected, an automatic pairing is also made when the user changes the remittance status to ‘Authorized’

Cleared: No automatic balance pairing is performed when the user is changing the status on a remittance linked to a balance. (the user can make a balance pairing by selecting the Automatic Balance Pairing option from the menu in the Business Partner window.)

Relevant when: When you want SICS to make an automatic balance pairing between an unsettled remittance linked to a technical/claim /settlement group balance and the balance.

Applicable for: P&C, Life
Pending Status for Balance Pairing in Use Selected: When creating a Balance Pairing, the Pairing status is set to Pending. Setting the status to Definite has to be done in a new process, either from the Business Partner Ledger or through the Accounting Mass Update function Accounting Balance Pairing Status Mass Update. Setting the status to Definite can only be done bya user who has a User Role with the Use Case Accounting Balance Pairing Status Update.

When selected together with the system parameter When Pairing, Always Use Remittance as the Driving Balance and starting a balance pairing from a partially settled remittance balance, the previous created balance pairings with this remittance will be shown in the pairing window and allow the user to continue the pairing by adding or removing more balances.When continuing the balance pairing from a remittance balance which has also been an included balance in another pending pairing, the balances listed in the balance pairing container will be both the included balances of the pairing where this remittance was the driving balance AND the driving balance(s) of the other pairing(s) where this remittance was an included balance. All the previously included balances when listed in the balance pairing container will be disabled i.e all fields will be non editable and they can only be removed from the pairing.

Cleared: When creating a Balance Pairing, the Pairing status will always be set to Definite

Relevant when: You want to ensure that a second person is required to complete a balance pairing.

Applicable for: P&C, Life
Prevent Balance Pairing Annulling when IP Base Company is Changed Selected: You are not allowed to annul a Balance Pairing if the Pairing contains a balance where the balance Base Company is not equal to the Base Company on the Insured Period(s) the balance belongs to.

Cleared: You are allowed to annul a Balance Pairing even if the balance Base Company is different from the Base Company on the Insured Period(s) the balance belongs to.

Relevant when: You should select this parameter if you want to prevent annulling of Balance Pairings where the balance Base Company is different from the Base Company on the Insured Period(s) the balance belongs to. This situation can occur if the Base Company on the Insured Period is changed after balances related to this Insured Period are paired. Annulling the Balance Pairings will then create unsettled balances with a Base Company which does not exist on the Insured Period anymore.

Applicable for: P&C, Life
Suppress Creation Of Partially Settled Remittance Balances Selected: You are not allowed to leave the remittance balance as partially settled, during the pairing process, if all the remittance balance(s) involved in pairing are not fully settled..

Cleared: You are allowed to leave the remittance balance as partially settled, during the pairing process based on specific system setup where the system provides an alternative to the user to decide, whether to leave the remittance balance as partially settled or not.

Relevant when: You should select this parameter if you want the system to prevent the user from creating a Partially settled remittance during the pairing process, if all the remittance balance(s) involved in pairing are not fully settled. This is irrespective whether the remittance is a driving balance or included balance

Applicable for: P&C, Life
Allow Balances in Authorized Status in Settlement Balance Group Selected: System allows the user to include balances on worksheets with status Authorized in the Create Settlement Balance Group window and the Create Settlement Balance pop-up menu option becomes enabled also when a balance on Technical/Claim worksheet with status Authorized is highlighted on the BP Ledger. An SBG can contain balances both from worksheets with status Closed and Authorized. A new column named ‘Worksheet Status’ is shown on the SBG properties, the Worksheet Status for the balances on the worksheet is shown in this column so, that the user can recognize whether it is in Closed or Authorized Status.A new error message will appear, saying that “This is not allowed since the balance is part of an SBG”, if a balance in an Authorized worksheet that is part of an SBG is changed, e.g.:
1) When the user update a balance on a technical and claim worksheet, i.e., if the Currency is changed by using the option “Switch currency on all details”, or any of the details in the balance is changed or deleted, or the payment partner is changed on the balance (on the balance properties window).
2) If the user update the status of the worksheet to any other status than “Closed”, such as ‘In Progress’, ‘Rejected’, ‘Inactive’ on the worksheet closing window.
3) If the user is trying to do pairing of this balance, manual pairing or mass pairing or group pairing.
4) The user selects the option ‘Link To Remittance’ or ‘Create Remittance’ on the View Settlement Balance Group window.

Cleared: Balances on worksheets with the status Authorized cannot be included in an SBG and no ‘Worksheet Status’ columns are displayed on the SBG properties.

Relevant when: You should select this parameter when you want to be able to include balances on worksheet with status Authorized in Settlement Balance Groups already before it is set to Closed to complete the creation of the SBG on an earlier stage.

Applicable for: P&C
Keep SBG When Balance Is Settled and Removed From SBG After Reversal Selected: When this parameter is selected, and one of the balances within a Settlement Balance Group (SBG) is reversed, the user will be presented with a message: “At least one reversed balance belongs to a settlement balance. Do you want to pair the balance and remove it from the settlement balance?” offering two options: “Yes” or “No” when closing the reversed worksheet. Replying “Yes” will pair the reversed balance with the original balance and remove the original balance from the SBG. The total balance group amount will be recalculated. Replying “No” will not pair the reversed and original balance and keep the original balance in the SBG only.

Cleared: When this parameter is cleared, and the balance of a Settlement Balance Group is reversed and settled, the entire Settlement Balance Group will be deleted.

Relevant when: Select this parameter when you wish to reverse and settle one of the balances within a Settlement Balance Group but do not wish to delete the entire Settlement Balance Group.

Applicable for: P&C, Cede, Life
Set Due Date as Current Date for Account /Settlement Balance Group Selected: The Due Date is defaulted as the current date when an Account Balance Group or Settlement Balance Group is created.

Cleared: The Due Date is left blank as default when an Account Balance Group or Settlement Balance Group is created.

Relevant when: This parameter is relevant only while creating Account/Settlement Balance Group.

Applicable for: P&C, Cede, Life
Enable Proportional Split Selected: Enables to split a Technical- or Claim balance proportionally in two balances when it is paired with a smaller Remittance balance.

1. Original Technical Balance is reversed
2. Two other new balances are created proportionally, one shown as Settled and the other shown as Unsettled.
3. An Account Balance Group is created including the original balance in addition to the newly created balances.

The proportional split is triggered when you answer ‘Yes’ to the question if the proportional split is to be performed.

If you answer ‘No’, the system gives you the option to:

* Fully settle the driving balance and partially settled the included balances, or

* Partially settle the driving balance and fully settle all included balances.

Selecting this parameter also enables the parameters ‘Always Proportional Split of Partially Settled Balances’ and ‘Suppress Creation of Partially settled Technical and Claim Balances’ located in the Accounting/Miscellaneous tab.

Cleared: When a Remittance is paired with a Technical Balance of a different amount, the Technical Balance is kept as a Partially Settled balance and is not split.

Relevant when: A Remittance and a Technical- or Claim Balance of different amounts is to be paired. The Remittance balance is the driving balance and does not fully settle the Technical- or Claim balance. You select the parameter when you want to pair and settle the remittance with one part of the Technical/Claim balance and leave the remaining part of the Technical/Claim Balance as Unsettled.

Applicable for: P&C, Life
Always Proportional Split of Partially Settled Balances Selected: The parameter is only selectable in combination with the Accounting/Miscellaneous parameter ‘Enable Proportional Split’.

When a Remittance is paired with a Technical- or Claim Balance of a higher amount, the Technical/Claim balance is automatically split proportionally into one Settled- and another Unsettled balance.

A window with the suggested balance split is presented for you. You are not given the option to partially settle neither the driving balance nor the included balances.

Cleared: You are given the option to either proportionally split the included technical/claim balances or partially settle the driving balance or the included balances. (Refer to the parameter ‘Enable Proportional Split.’)

Relevant when: A Remittance and a Technical- or Claim Balance of different amounts is to be paired. The Remittance balance is the driving balance and does not fully settle the Technical- or Claim balance. You select this parameter in order to avoid having balances with settlement indicator ‘Partially Settled’.

Applicable for: P&C, Life
Suppress Creation of Partially Settled Technical and Claim Balances Selected: The parameter is only selectable in combination with the Accounting/Miscellaneous parameter ‘Enable Proportional Split’.

Selecting this parameter prevents the system from, in all pairing situations; partially settle a technical- or claim balance.

Cleared: You are allowed to partially settle a Technical- or Claim balance if not otherwise restricted by the System Parameter ‘Always proportional split of partially settled balances’.

Relevant when: Select this parameter when you want to prevent the system from creating partially settled Technical- or Claim balances.

Applicable for: P&C, Life
Rate as at Balance Value Date/Due Date for Exchange in Balance Pairing Selected: The parameter applies for Balance Pairing when balances with different currencies than the driving balance currency is included. The system calculates Settlement Amount in the driving balance’s currency using a rate at a specific date. When the driving balance is a remittance balance, the Value Date is used. When the driving balance is a technical-/claim-/cession (life) balance, the Due Date is used. The system finds and uses the Most Recent Daily Rate registered prior to the Value Date or Due Date.

Cleared: The system calculates Settlement Amount in the driving balance’s currency using the Most Recent Daily Rate registered prior to current date.

Relevant when: Select the parameter when you want to avoid exchange difference to be calculated as a result of new daily rates being registered in the time between the booking of the driving balance (e.g. remittance) and the time when the driving balance is included in balance pairing.

Applicable for: P&C, Life
Balance Pairing Group in Use Selected: Enables the function Balance Pairing Group which makes it possible to create pairing by use of more than one remittance balance as driving balance in one operation. This is additional to the existing Balance Pairing functionality where pairing can be made between ONE driving remittance balance and many included balances. By activating this parameter it will also affect the rule for what combination of balances you can have in normal pairing with only one driving balance, see the description of the system parameter “When Pairing, Always Use Remittance as the Driving Balance”

Cleared: The Balance Pairing Group function is not enabled and all relevant popup menu options are disabled from Business Ledger and Business Partner Ledger.

Relevant when: Select the parameter when you want to be able to use more than one driving remittance balance as settlement for one or many technical/claim/cession balances. The Balance Pairing Group makes it possible to do the above pairing in one operation to prevent partial settled balances in the system and to prevent that remittances are used as included balances (Balance 2 in the pairing object).

Note! It is recommended to define an Identifier Series for the type Balance Pairing in the System Parameters, Identifiers tab. When an Identifier Series is defined, this will set identifiers on pairings created in the Balance Pairing Group function, one common identifier for all pairings created in one operation. This will also be used to set an Identifier on normal individual balance pairings, and this is independent if this parameter is selected or not.

Applicable for: P&C, Life
Technical/Claim Pairing Across Responsible Business Partners Not Allowed Selected: Balance pairing between Technical-. Claim-, Cession balances withdifferent Responsible Business Partners are not allowed.

(Note: There is no restriction when Remittance is included in the Balance Pairing)

Cleared: You are allowed to make Balance Pairing between Technical-, Claim-, Cession balances with different Responsible Business Partners.

Relevant when: You should select this parameter if you want to prevent doing Balance Pairing between Technical-, Claim-, Cession balances with different Responsible Business Partners.

Applicable for: P&C, Cede, Life
Classification of Unallocated Remittance Mandatory Selected: When an Unallocated Remittance balance is created in the Balance Pairing process on the Business Partner Ledger, it is possible to classify the balance and to assign a Class of Business on the balance taken from the selected business. When this parameter is selected both of these fields are mandatory when the Unallocated Remittance is created.

Cleared: It is optional to enter a classification and a Class of Business when the Unallocated Remittance balance is created.

Relevant when: You want to be sure that all Unallocated Remittance balances contain both a classification and a Class of Business.

Applicable for: P&C, Life
Transfer Unallocated Remittances to General Ledger Selected: When the General Ledger Transfer based on Remittance is performed it will also include all Unallocated Remittance balances not previously transferred to General Ledger. The file GL_R_NEW and GL_R_ALL will contain both normal Remittance balances and Unallocated Remittance balances. The Unallocated Remittance balances will also have the Transferred to General Ledger date set (TRANS_DATE).

Cleared: Unallocated Remittance balances will not be transferred to general ledger when the General Ledger Transfer based on Remittance is performed.

Relevant when: You want to be able to report Unallocated Remittance balances in your General Ledger system.

Applicable for: P&C, Life
Show Payable Amount in Business Partner Ledger Selected: A new column called Payable Amount is shown on the Business Partner Ledger. The payable amount represents the settled rate of associated parent/children balances.Another effect is that a new option, View Associated Balances, appears on the popup menu in the Business Partner Ledger window. By Associated Balances we mean for example, a balance created automatically on Facultative Retrocessionaire, which is associated with the balance it came from on the parent Assumed Business.

In the View Associated Balances window, is the user will be able to Generate Payment Request for the Associated Balances.

It also enables the system parameter, Generate Payment Request in same.

Applicable for: P&C
Generate Payment Request in same Currency as for the Associated Balance Selected: When the Generate Payment Request option is selected in the View Associated Balances window, the system creates a new remittance with the same currency as the remittance that paired the parent (or children) balances and with an amount equal to a proportion of unsettled amount (equal to the proportion of settled part at children/parent balance level) of the starting balance converted in the new currency with the same exchange rate used for pairing the parent (or children) balances with their corresponding remittances.

You are only able to modify the proposed amount of the newly created remittance. If the corresponding parent (or children) balances have been paired with more than one remittance with one currency but different from the one of the starting balance, the system is using an average of the exchange rates used for pairing the parent (or children) balances. If the corresponding parent (or children) balances have been paired with more than one remittance with different currencies, you will be prevented from going further with the automatic function.

Cleared: The Generate Payment Request use the original currency (or the expected payment currency) of the associated balance itself.

Relevant when: In order to reduce the exchange rate fluctuation risk resulting from the normal elapsed time between payments on the assumed business and on the participations, you may want to generate payment remittances to the participants with the same currency and exchange rate as used for the payment of the associated assumed business balance.
Always keep Expected Payment Balance after Pairing Selected: The Expected Payment Balance information will be kept, once balances are settled after pairing, even if the Expected Payment Currency is different from the Payment Currency. NB! One exception, if the balance with the Expected Payment Balance becomes Partially Settled, then the Expected Payment Balance information will be removed after pairing, independent if this parameter is selected or not.

Cleared: The Expected Payment Balance information will only be kept in the database if the payment currency is the same as the Expected Payment Currency. If the Payment Currency is different from the Expected Payment Currency, the system will inform the user that the Expected Payment Balance will be removed after pairing.

Relevant when: You want to keep the Expected Payment Balances after balance pairing, e.g. of historical reasons. even if the Expected Payment Currency is not the same as the payment currency on the Remittance.
Independent Creation Of Cash Paid Remittance not allowed Selected: If selected, system prevents the user from creating a Paid remittance worksheet manually and leave it unsettled. It throws validation error message when the User tries to save ‘an independently’ created Remittance Worksheet that has the following combination i.e Direction as “Paid” and new system defined value as “Cash Payment” in Rem Class 1 field.

This new system parameter gets enabled and can be selected when both the system parameters “Rem Class 1” under Remittance & “Automatic balance pairing when change of remittance status” under Balance Pairing are checked.

Cleared: User will be allowed to create a Paid remittance worksheet manually and leave it unsettled, even when it has the following combination i.e Direction as “Paid” and new system defined value as “Cash Payment” for the field Rem Class 1 or anyother combinations.

Relevant when: When you want the system to throw a validation error message when user tries to save ‘an independently’ created Remittance Worksheet that has the following combination i.e Direction as “Paid” and new system defined value as “Cash Payment” set in the field Rem Class 1.

This combination to be

- only allowed

- automatically selected and

- the fields greyed out (not possible to be changed by User)

when the following options are used to create a ‘Paid’ Remittance Worksheet

1. Generate Payment Request from a payable balance.

2. Reverse from a Received Remittance Worksheet

When a Received Remittance is reversed to create a Paid Remittance and is left in pending status, say In Progress (or any other pending status), then

- A link is created between the 2 balances, so that none of them can be used for pairing with any other balance

When that ’target’ worksheet is opened again for edit,

- All the fields in the ‘Target’ worksheet that were originally disabled are still disabled

- When the Target Worksheet is made Final, the 2 balances (Source and Target) will be automatically paired

Applicable for: P&C, Cede, Life
Driving Balance String for Mass Pairing of TW/CW In this parameter it is possible to enter the text string to be used in the Mass pairing order for Technical/claim balances to make sure only balances with this string found in the Worksheet Title of worksheet for the balance are used as the driving balance in the pairing.

Values: Text string in the column in alphanumeric format up to 30 characters

Relevant: It is used to extract driving balance for Mass Pairing order for Technical/Claim Balance, where if the worksheet title of the balance contain the same string as defined in the system parameter and has same booking year and period as specified in the order then that balance can be taken as driving balance for pairing.

Applicable for: P&C, Cede
Prevent Over Settlement of Balances While Pairing Selected: When this parameter is selected, the system will prohibit the oversettlement of balances. It will display a validation error message, “Over Settlement of Balances not Allowed” whenever any of the balances (Driving Balance or Follower Balances) involved in the balance pairing process have an unsettled balance with a sign opposite to its original balance.

Cleared: When this parameter is cleared, oversettlement of balances will be allowed. The system will not give any validation error even if the unsettled balance has a sign opposite to its original balance.

Relevant when: Select this system parameter when you want to prevent oversettlement of all balances involved in the balance pairing process. It ensures that the unsettled balance does not have a sign opposite to its original balance amount and is applicable to both the driving balance and follower balances.

Applicable for: P&C
Partially settle the over-settled Remittance Selected: When this parameter is selected, the system will prevent the oversettlement of balances(driving remittance balances is lesser than the included technical /claim balance) involved in the balance pairing process which have an unsettled balance with a sign opposite to its original balance, with a question message,“The sum of the included balances exceeds the Unsettled Amount of the Driving Balance. If you continue the pairing, the Driving Balance will be Partially Settled” with an option to answer Yes or No”. Yes - would proceed the balance pairing and NO - would abort the pairing operation.

Cleared: When this parameter is cleared, oversettlement of balances(driving remittance balances is lesser than the included technical /claim balance) will be allowed. The system will give the exisitng another question message even if the unsettled balance has a sign opposite to its original balance and allow the pairing to proceed.

_Relevant when:_To prevent oversettlement of all balances(driving remittance balances is lesser than the included technical /claim balance) involved in the balance pairing process which have an unsettled balance with a sign opposite to its original balance. This is to ensure that when the driving balance is “over-settled,” the remittance is always partially settled during pairing.

Applicable for: P&C
Automatic BP Reference on SBG and selection on Mass Pairing Selected: When this parameter is selected, the Reference on a Settlement Balance Group will be automatically updated with the Expected Payment Partner’s short id and the selected Accounting Year and Period on the Settlement Balance Group. A field ‘Actual Date of Settlement/ Pairing’ will be available in the balance pairing window and open for input. On the Mass Pairing Order under Periodic Functions, all the BP references of the available Settlement Balance Groups where the selected business partner is an expected payment partner will be made available. On runnng the order all the SBGs and the linked remittances with the BP references will be automatically paired and the Actual Date of Settlement will be updated as per the input on the pairing order.

Cleared: When this parameter is cleared, it will not be possible to default a BP reference number on the SBG. It will also not be possible to select BP references on the Mass Pairing Order.

Relevant when: This system parameter should be selected only when you want the Mass Pairing order to use the BP references as selected for automatic balance pairing .

Applicable for: Life

Tolerance Limits #

You can define tolerance limits for rate of exchange differences, minor adjustments, functional currency exchange difference and for the Due Date (how far in the future/past the due date can be).

To define tolerance limits:

  1. Double-click the System Administrators folder on the SICS workstation desktop.
  2. Select the Accounting tab.
  3. Select the Tolerance Limit tab.

System_Parameter_Accounting_ToleranceLimit.png

Define Tolerance Limits for Exchange Difference #

You can define the tolerance limit between two currencies. The limit may be defined in percent and/or as amount in base currency. The exchange difference limits are taken into consideration in the following situations:

  • Creating Expected Payment Balances (For further information refer to the applicable User’s Guide chapter: Open and Manipulate the Worksheet Closing Window, Navigation and Operations from Business Ledger or Maintain Business Partner Balances)
  • Creating Settlement Balances (For further information refer to the User’s Guide chapter Maintain Business Partner Ledger Balances)
  • Doing Settlement Pairing (For further information refer to the applicable User’s Guide chapters: Navigation and Operations from Business Ledger or Maintain Business Partner Ledger Balances)

When the Warning Limit is exceeded a message is prompted. You are allowed to proceed with your work without making any adjustments. If however an Error Limit is defined and exceeded, you are prohibited from continuing your work until adjustments are made.

If Warning/Error Limits have been defined both in percent and amount, the lowest value applies.

  1. Open System Parameters, Accounting, Tolerance Limits tab and click the Edit button.
  2. Go to the Exchange Difference part
  3. Define the Warning Limit in % and/or Amount + Currency
  4. In addition or alternatively, define the Error Limit in % and/or Amount + Currency
  5. Click OK to save the defined limits

Field Descriptions - Exchange Difference #

Field Description
Warning Limit (%): The limit in % expressing the maximum allowable percentage difference between two amounts. The first amount is the ‘system’ amount (a1) calculated based on the current daily rate in the system and the second is the amount entered by the user (a2). The percentage difference is calculated as (a1-a2)/a1*100.

(For information about stored exchange rates, refer to Currency and Exchange Rates chapters of the System Administrator’s Guide.)

Values: Percentage

Functional Impact: If the calculated percent figure is greater than or equal the Warning Limit % a warning will be presented while creating expected payment balances, creating settlement balances or doing settlement pairing.

Mandatory: No
Warning Difference (Amount) in: The limit in Currency and Amount expressing the maximum allowable difference between two amounts. The first amount is the ‘system’ amount (a1) and the second is the amount entered by the user (a2). The difference is converted to the same currency as for the Warning Difference by use of the current daily rate in the system and compared with the Warning Difference Amount (For information about stored exchange rates, refer to_Currency and Exchange Rates_ chapters of the System Administrator’s Guide.)

Values: Amount + Base Currency(ies)/Primary Currency(ies)

Functional Impact: Warning Message if the converted amount exceeds the limit while creating expected payment balances, creating settlement balances or doing settlement pairing.

Mandatory: No
Error Limit (%): Same as for Warning Limit (%).

Values: Percentage

Functional Impact: If the calculated percent figure is greater than or equal the Error Limit % an error message will be presented while creating expected payment balances, creating settlement balances or doing settlement pairing.

Mandatory: No
Error Difference (Amount) in: Same as for Warning Difference (Amount) in. Values: Amount + Base Currency(ies)/Primary Currency(ies)

Functional Impact: Error Message if the converted amount exceeds the limit while creating expected payment balances, creating settlement balances or doing settlement pairing.

Mandatory: No

Applicable for: P&C, Life

Define Minor Adjustments Limits #

When entering details into a Technical Worksheet it is possible to make Minor Adjustment of balances, e.g. when you have used the Control Amount field and/or the Share functionality on the worksheet. (For further information refer to the User’s Guide chapter Open and Manipulate the Worksheet Closing window.)

  1. Open System Parameters, Accounting, Tolerance Limits tab and click the Edit button.
  2. Go to the Minor Adjustments part
  3. Select an Entry Code from the Entry Code used for Minor Adjustment drop-down list.
  4. Define a Maximum Value amount and select a Base Currency.
  5. Click OK to update the Minor Adjustments limits.

The Entry Code defined is booked in the Technical Worksheet when the Minor Adjustment is calculated automatically. The defined Max Value in Base Currency limits the adjustment amount.

Field Descriptions - Minor Adjustments #

Field Description
Entry Code Used for Minor Adjustment: The result Entry Code when Minor Adjustments are calculated in the Technical Worksheet.

Values: Entry Codes defined in the Entry Code Sub category Other Deductions

Mandatory: No
Max Value in: The maximum Minor Adjustment amount in Base Currency

Values: Amount (free input) + Base Currency/Primary Currency

Functional Impact: If max value is exceeded a message appears telling you that the minor adjustment amount will not be booked

Mandatory: No

Applicable for: P&C, Life

Define Tolerance Limits for Exchange Rate Difference in Functional Currency Maintenance #

You can define a special tolerance limit for functional currencies. The limit is defined in percent and/or as amount in base currency. The exchange difference limits are taken into consideration when manually overwriting the defaulted functional currency exchange rates.

When the Warning Limit is exceeded a warning message is prompted. You can proceed with your work without making any adjustments. If Warning Limit has been defined both in percent and amount, the warning should be given if at least one of them is above Tolerance Limit.

To define a special tolerance limit for functional currencies:

  1. Open System Parameters, Accounting, Tolerance Limits tab and click the Edit button.
  2. Go to the Functional Currency Exchange Difference part
  3. Define the Warning Limit in % and/or Amount + Currency.
  4. Click’ OK’ to save the defined limits.

Field Descriptions - Exchange Rate Difference for Functional Currency #

Field Description
Warning Limit (%): Expressing the maximum allowable percentage difference between two amounts. The first amount is the ‘system’ amount (a1) calculated based on the default rate for the worksheet and the second is the exchange rate entered by the user (a2). The percentage difference is calculated as (a1-a2)/a1*100.

(For information about stored exchange rates, refer to Currency and Exchange Rates chapters of the System Administrator’s Guide).

Values: Percentage

Functional Impact: If the calculated percentage figure is greater than or equal to the Warning Limit % a warning will be presented when saving a manual input of exchange rates.

Mandatory: No
Warning Difference (Amount) in (Curr): The limit in Currency and Amount expressing the maximum allowable difference between two amounts. The first amount is the calculated ‘system’ amount (a1) and the second is the amount entered by the user (a2). The difference is converted to the same currency as for the Warning Difference by use of the current daily rate in the system and compared with the Warning Difference Amount (For information about stored exchange rates, refer to Currency and Exchange Rates chapters of the System Administrator’s Guide.)

Values: Amount + Base Currency(ies)/Primary Currency(ies)

Functional Impact: Warning Message if the converted amount exceeds the limitwhile saving a manual Functional Currency rate of exchange.

Mandatory: No

Applicable for: P&C, Life

Define allowable years the Due Date can be in Future/Past, and allow change of Due Date on Closed Worksheets #

By activating this system parameter, you can define number of years the year in the Due Date can be in Future and in Past. The validation of the Due Date takes place when a manually created Technical or Claim worksheet is applied to the database and when the Status is changed to Closed.

If the year in the Due Date exceeds this limit a warning is presented when the worksheet is applied to the database.

By activating this system parameter, it is also possible for the user to update the Due Date even on a Closed worksheet. On the Worksheet Closing window for a Worksheet with status Closed, when the balance is Unsettled and not transferred to General Ledger, and the user has the Use Case Accounting Edit Due Date In Closed Worksheet assigned, it is possible to edit the Due Date.

To define a validation of the Due Date and allow edit of Due Date on a Closed Worksheet:

  1. Open System Parameters, Accounting, Tolerance Limits tab and click the Edit button.
  2. Go to the Validation of Due Date on Technical and Claim Worksheet part and select the Validate the Year in Due Date parameter
  3. Enter a number in the two fields Years allowed in Future and Years allowed in Past.
  4. Click OK to save the changes.

Field Descriptions - Validation of Due Date on Technical and Claim Worksheet #

Field Description
Validate the Year in Due Date: Selected: When this option is selected it enables the two fields Years allowed in Future and Years allowed in Past.

Additional it allows edit of the Due Date on Closed Worksheets; On the Worksheet Closing window, if the user is assigned the Use Case Accounting Edit Due Date In Closed Worksheet and the selected balance is Unsettled and not transferred to General Ledger, an option to Edit the Due Date is enabled.

Cleared: The year in the Due Date is not validated against the current calendar year and it is not possible to edit the Due Date on a Closed Worksheet.

Relevant when: This parameter should be used if you want to warn the user in case the year in the Due Date exceeds the normal range and to be able to edit the Due Date on Closed Worksheets in case the Due Date is wrong.

Mandatory: No
Years allowed in Future: Expressing the maximum number of years the Due Date can be in Future compared with current calendar year.

Values: A number between 0 and 99

Functional Impact: The number given will be added to the current calendar year and the sum will be compared with the year in the Due Date on the Worksheet. If the sum is higher than the year in the Due Date a warning will be presented.

Mandatory: Yes, if Validate the Year in Due Date is selected, else No.
Years allowed in Past: Expressing the maximum number of years the Due Date can be in Past compared with current calendar year.

Values: A number between 0 and 99

Functional Impact: The number given will be deducted from the current calendar year and the result will be compared with the year in the Due Date on the Worksheet. If this is smaller than the year in the Due Date a warning will be presented.

Mandatory: Yes, if Validate the Year in Due Date is selected, else No.

Applicable for: P&C, Cede, Life

Booking Dates #

You can define whether or not other values than current day are allowed in the Booking Date field of a Technical/Claim Worksheet and/or Remittance Worksheet.

Define Booking Dates #

  1. Select System Administrators from SICS Workstation Desktop
  2. Open System Parameter Maintenance
  3. Select the Accounting tab
  4. Select the Booking Dates tab
  5. Define Number of Days from Current in Future and/or in Past for Remittance- and/or Technical Worksheets

8_booking_dates_new.png

Field Descriptions - Booking Dates #

Field Description
Remittance - Number of Days from Current in Future/in Past: Determine the number of days in the past or future that the Date of Booking may be set to on Remittance Worksheet.

Values: Numbers

Functional Impact: A Validation Error Message appears if Date of Booking field is out of allowable range.

Mandatory: No

Applicable for: P&C, Life
Technical - Number of Days from Current in Future/in Past: Determine the number of days in the past or future that the date of Booking may be set to on Technical/Claim Worksheet.

Values: Numbers

Functional Impact: A Validation Error Message appears if Date of Booking field is out of allowable range. If number of days in the past and in future is set to zero (0), a special functionality takes place when the user opens up a pending technical/claim worksheet. In this case the Date of Booking on the worksheet is automatically re-set to current date (today’s date).

Mandatory: No

Entry Codes #

The Entry Codes used for booking the result of various Automatic Accounting functions in SICS are defined on the Entry Code tab of the Accounting system parameters.

  1. Select System Administrators from SICS Workstation desktop.
  2. Open System Parameter Maintenance.
  3. Select the Entry Codes page under Accounting.

The functionality connected to each Accounting function is documented in the User’s Guide.

Information about the following Accounting functions are found in the Accounting chapter:

Refer to the Automatic Premium Accounting chapter for details about:

  • Adjustment Premium, Fac
  • Adjustment Premium, Treaty
  • Instalment Premium, Fac
  • Instalment Premium, Treaty Inward
  • Instalment Premium, Treaty Outward
  • Ceded Accounting
  • Ceded Facultative Premium
  • Vat Calculation

Refer to the Automatic Premium Reserve Accounting- and Automatic Claims Reserve Accounting chapters for details about:

  • Financial Premium Reserve Calculation
  • Original Premium Reserve Calculation
  • Unearned Premium Calculation
  • Balance Reserve Calculation
  • Financial Claims Reserve
  • General Reserve Calculation

Refer to the chapter Accrual Accounting on Estimates for details about:

  • Estimated Written and Accrued Figures

Refer to the chapter Manual Bookings on a Worksheet for details about:

  • Automatic Booking
  • Vat Calculation
  • Vat Calculation based on EC Groups

Refer to the chapter Claim Accounting (Inward) for details about:

  • Vat Calculation
  • Vat Calculation based on EC Groups

Refer to the chapter Handle Insurance Premium Tax to Tax Authority for details about:

  • Automatic Outward Insurance Premium Tax

Information about the following Accounting Functions are found in the Retrocession Accounting chapter:

  • Loss Recovery, Non-Proportional Treaty/Fac
  • Retrocession Per Insured
  • Retrocession Accounting Proportional Treaty
  • Retrocession Estimation Accounting Proportional Treaty

For details of the Vat Calculation function, see the following chapters in the User’s Guide:

  • Calculate and Book Value Added Tax Automatically in the Accounting chapter
  • Book Instalment Premium/Adjustment Premium in the Accounting Chapter
  • Book on a Claim Worksheet in the Accounting chapter

Refer to the chapter Commutation of Proportional/Non Proportional Retrocessionaire for details about:

  • Commutation Non Proportional

Refer to the chapter Event IBNR Mass Update Order for details about:

  • Event IBNR

Refer to the chapter Recovery Calculation Order for US Quota Share for details about:

  • Loss Recovery, US Quota Share

Refer to the chapter Reinstatement Calculation for Assumed Business for details about:

  • Reinstatement Premium, Non-Proportional AB

Refer to chapter Retrocession Calculation Order for Non-Proportional for details about:

  • Retrocession Accounting Non-Proportional Treaty

Refer to chapters Maintain Special Acceptance Premium and Handle Special Acceptance Premiums Accounting for details about:

  • Special Acceptance Premiums, Treaty Inward

System_Parameter_Accounting_EntryCodes.png

Field Description - Entry Codes #

Applicable for: P&C

Field Description
Accounting Function Code/Description: The various Automatic Accounting Function values defined in SICS.

Values: The Code and Name of the Accounting Function. (Defined in the Reference Date table Accounting Function/Code 00198.)
Entry Code Usage/Calculation: Different Accounting Calculations are defined for each Accounting Function. An Accounting Calculation may only be defined for one Accounting Function.

Values: Accounting Calculation names, e.g. Commission, Premium Portfolio Entry, Original Loss Reserve. (Defined in the Reference Date table Accounting Function/Code 00199).
Entry Code: The Entry Codes available for mapping against each Accounting Calculation. Defined per Entry Code Sub Category in the Entry Code Maintenance.

Values: Code and Description

Selected: The field is selected if an Entry Code is defined. The result of the calculation is booked with the defined Entry Code in the Business Ledgers.
Entry Code Group: The Accounting Functions Unearned Premium Calculation, Ceded Accounting and Ceded Facultative Premium, as well as some of the Calculations in Reinstatement Premium Non-Proportional AB use an Entry Code Group as calculation basis for the respective Entry Code. The groups must be defined in the Entry Code Group Category Unearned Reserve Basis, Ceded Premium, Ceded Facultative Premium, and Subject Premium Income, Non-Proportional respectively.

Values: The name of the defined Entry Code Group
Deduction on Costs %: This field appears when you edit one of the Calculations under the Entry Code Usage. Used in Accounting Functions Original Premium Reserve Calculation(for all Calculations), Retrocession Accounting Proportional Treaty and Retrocession Estimation Accounting Proportional Treaty (for the Calculations Additional Commission Reserve and Deduction Reserve).
Values: Percentage (0-100%)

Functional Impact: The field is used in the calculation of the deduction reserve and the additional commission reserve. For inward businesses, the deduction reserves are calculated and booked through the original premium reserve order, and the respective deduction on cost calculation is only triggered for businesses having the ‘Calculate Deduction On Cost’ condition selected.

For outward proportional treaty businesses the deduction reserves are calculated running the retrocession calculation order, retrocession calculation group order or retrocession estimation calculation order. In the case of outward facultative businesses, the deduction reserves are calculated automatically when entering a deduction reserve booking detail for the protected inward business. The calculation formula is the same for both an outward treaty and a facultative business. (For further information about the Retrocession Calculation orders and the calculation formula, refer to the Retrocession chapters in the P&C User Guide.)

Relevant when: Due to legal reasons in some countries, the unearned premium has to be reduced by an additional deduction called ‘Deduction on Cost’. You should enter the applicable fixed percentage in this field if your country has such law regulations.

Applicable for: P&C

Add/Change Entry Code #

The Accounting Functions and Calculations are system defined and cannot be changed. You must however define an Entry Code for each calculation that the system will use in an Automatic Accounting Function.

  1. Select the applicable Accounting Function in the Entry Code tab.
  2. Select the Calculation for which the entry code is to be added or changed.
  3. Double-click or select Edit from the pop-up menu. The Entry Code Edit window appears.
  4. Select the appropriate Entry Code from the Drop-down list.
  5. Click Save to update the Entry Code selection.

The Entry Codes displayed in the drop-down list are dependent on the type of calculation. If for example the calculation Commission is selected, all Entry Codes defined in the Entry Code Sub Category Original Commission is displayed. For further information see the Handle Reference Items/Entry Code Maintenance chapter of the System Administrator’s Guide.

Note! If you have selected the Accounting Function Unearned Premium Calculation, Ceded Accounting and Ceded Facultative Premium, as well as some of the Calculations in Reinstatement Premium Non-Proportional AB, you select an Entry Code Group before you select one of the group’s Entry Codes. The Entry Codes available for a selected Calculation will be those within the Entry Code Sub Category that is linked to this Calculation as a Parent Value in reference table 199.

System_Parameter_Accounting_EntryCodes_Edit.png

Validation Rules #

In the Validation Rules parameters you define the validations of amounts manually booked in technical worksheets. The booked amounts are checked against their corresponding business conditions.

If the amount booked on the worksheet exceeds the discrepancy limit, certain validations can be triggered to warn the user. Also missing conditions on the contract , missing entry code expected to be booked or unexpected sign on amount being booked can trigger warning to inform the user about this.

  1. Select System Administrators from SICS Workstation Desktop
  2. Open System Parameter Maintenance
  3. Select the Accounting tab
  4. Select the Validation Rules tab

System_Parameter_Accounting_ValidationRules.png

View Validation Rule #

Each row in the table represents one validation rule. You can see the details of each validation rule in the View Accounting Validation Rule window.

  1. Select the Validation Rule that you want to view
  2. Select View from the pop-up menu or double-click.
  3. The View Accounting Validation Rule window appears.

Add Validation Rule #

You create a validation rule when you want to validate your technical bookings. The validations ensure that the bookings are in accordance with corresponding business conditions.

  1. Click the edit button from the accounting parameters.
  2. Select the Validation Rule tab. The window is now in edit mode.
  3. Select Add from the pop-up menu.
  4. The Create Accounting Validation Rule window appears.
  5. Define the various attributes of the validation rule.
  6. Click Save to update the new validation rule.
  7. Click OK from the Validation Rule tab to update the window.

Edit Validation Rule #

If an existing validation rule needs to be modified you can open the Edit Accounting Validation Rule window.

  1. Click the edit button from the accounting parameters.
  2. Select the Validation Rule tab. The window is now in edit mode.
  3. Select the Validation Rule that you are going to modify.
  4. Select Edit from the pop-up menu.
  5. The Edit Accounting Validation Rule window appears.
  6. Make your changes in the applicable fields.
  7. Click Save to update your changes to the validation rule.
  8. Click OK from the Validation Rule tab to update the window.

Remove Validation Rule #

A validation rule may no longer be valid or it has been entered by mistake. You can then remove the validation rule.

  1. Click the Edit button on the System Parameter window.
  2. Click the Validation Rule tab. The window is now in edit mode.
  3. Select the Validation Rule to be removed.
  4. Select Remove from the pop-up menu.
  5. A Message appears asking you to confirm your action.
  6. Click Yes to confirm your action.
  7. Click OK in the Validation Rule window to update your changes.

System_Parameter_Accounting_ValidationRules_Edit.png

Field Description - Accounting Validation Rule #

Applicable for: P&C

Field Description
Name: The name of the validation rule

Values: Free text of letters/numbers

Mandatory: Yes
Description: Text to describe the validation rule

Values: Free text of letters/numbers

Mandatory: No
Worksheet Type: The type of worksheet the validation rule applies for.

Values: Technical Worksheet

Mandatory: Yes
Level of Business: The level of business the validation rule applies for.

Values: <None>, Administrative Business, Assumed Business, Outward Cedent’s Contract, etc. <None> means all Level of Business.

Default: Assumed Business

Mandatory: Yes
Type of Business: The type of business the validation rule applies for.

Values: <None>, Non-Prop. Direct, Non-Prop. Facultative, Non-Prop. Treaty, Proportional Direct, Proportional Facultative, Proportional Treaty. <None> means all Type of Business.

Default: Proportional Treaty

Mandatory: Yes
Attribute on Condition: The Business Condition the validation rule applies for.

Values: Acquisition Cost, Brokerage, Commission, Insurance Premium Tax, Fronting Fee, Tax on Premium, Premium Deposit Retained, Interest on Loss Deposit, etc

Mandatory: Yes
Error Type: Determines if an error message or a warning message is to be presented when your booking exceeds the discrepancy limit. An error message will prohibit you from completing your entry before the amount is corrected, while a warning will allow you to continue your bookings.

Values: Error, Warning

Default: Error

Mandatory: Yes
Tolerance Type: Determine if the Discrepancy is to be defined as percentage or amount

Values: Percentage, Value

Default: Percentage

_Functional Impact:_If Percentage is selected: Discrepancy (%) is enabled, Discrepancy (amount) is disabled.

If Value is selected: Discrepancy (%) field is disabled, Discrepancy (amount)- and Base Currency fields are enabled.

Mandatory: Yes
Discrepancy (%): The discrepancy limit in % between the booked amount and the business condition applicable for this validation rule.

Values: Percentage

Default: 0,00

Functional Impact: Included in calculation of possible discrepancy between booked amount in Technical Worksheet and business condition.

Mandatory: Yes, when the Tolerance Type is defined as Percentage
Discrepancy (amount): The amount that determines the discrepancy limit between booked amount and business deduction condition selected for this validation rule.

Values: Numeric value

Functional Impact: Included in calculation of possible discrepancy between booked amount in Technical Worksheet and business condition.

Mandatory: Yes, when the Tolerance Type is defined as Value
Base Currency: Currency(ies) ISO.

Values: The Currency(ies) defined as Base Currency(ies)/Primary Currency(ies) are listed here.

Mandatory: Yes, when Tolerance Type selected as Value
Source Group: The Entry Code Group to be used in the calculation. The Groups are defined in the Entry Code Group Category Entry Code Validation. (Refer to Entry Code Maintenance in the Administrator’s Guide for further details about Entry Code Group.)

Values: Entry Code Group Names, e.g. Commission, Brokerage, Provisional Commission, Premium Deposit retained

Mandatory: Yes
Worksheet Origin/All Excluding EDI Selected: The Validation Rule applies for all Worksheet Origins except from the worksheet origin EDI JV and EDI LIMNET. Worksheet origin EDI JV has to be activated by the check box below. The Accounting Validation Rules have no impact on EDI LIMNET.

Cleared: The Validation Rule is not active.

Relevant when: Select this check box to activate the validation rule.
Worksheet Origin/EDI JV Selected: The Validation Rule applies for the worksheet origin EDI JV.

Cleared: The Validation Rule does not apply for the worksheet origin EDI JV.

Relevant when: Select the check box if the validation rule applies for Worksheets Origin EDI JV only or in combination with all other worksheet origins.

Calculation

Sample 1: Validation Rule for Brokerage

Discrepancy (%) = 5%

Brokerage condition: 10% of Gross Premium

Booked in Technical Worksheet:

Gross Premium: NOK 10.000,-

Brokerage NOK 1.100,-

Computed value: NOK 10.000 x 10% = NOK 1.000,-

Discrepancy in %: NOK 1.100 - NOK 1.000 / NOK 1.000 x 100 =10%

Validation Error- or Warning message because discrepancy is outside tolerated limit of 5%

Sample 2: Validation Rule for Premium Deposit Retained

Discrepancy (amount) = NOK 500,-

Premium Deposit Retained condition: 30% of Gross Premium

Booked in technical Worksheet:

Gross Premium: NOK 10.000,-

Brokerage NOK 4.000,-

Computed value: NOK 10.000 x 30% = NOK 3.000,-

Discrepancy in amount: NOK 4.000 - NOK 3.000 = NOK 1.000,-

Validation Error- or Warning message because discrepancy is outside tolerated limit of NOK 500,-

Sample 3: Validation Rule for Premium Deposit Retained Discrepancy (amount) = NOK 500

Discrepancy (amount) = NOK 500,-

Premium Deposit Retained condition: User Defined/ original/Percent of original(10%) deposits/Percent of Premium Portfolio(10%)/ Percent of Premium Reserve(10%)

Booked in technical Worksheet:

Gross Premium: NOK 10.000,-

Premium Deposit Retained booking is missing

Validation Error- or Warning message because condition is defined and PDR entry code is missing to be booked on the worksheet(validation here is triggered irrespective of the discrepancy limit been defined on the rule)
Raise Warning Message when Business Condition is Changed and Booking Exists Selected: A warning message appears if a condition is edited and bookings already exist on the business.

Cleared: No warning message appears.

Relevant when: You should select this parameter when you want to be warned, while changing a business condition, that bookings already made may have to be altered to comply with the changed condition.

Applicable for: P&C
RaiseWarning Message when Payment Currency is Not Represented on the Administration Conditions Selected: When a Technical-/Claim Balance is included in a Balance Pairing and the currency of the driving balance is different from the Technical-/Claim balance, the driving balance currency is validated against the Payment Currencies of the Administration Conditions and the Main Currency of the business.

Cleared: No validation between a currency of the driving balance in a balance pairing process and Payment Currencies + Main Currency of the corresponding business for the included balances.

Relevant when: Select the parameter when you want to be warned that the currency on the driving balance in the balance pairing is not represented in the business’ Administration Conditions or as the business’ Main Currency.

Applicable for: P&C
Present Collated Errors and Warnings in a Text Box if Error Raised Selected: When you apply the Accounting Validation Rules from the Open Technical Worksheet window and one or more errors are raised then (in addition to the first being presented as a normal error dialog) a separate text box will be presented listing all of the errors and warnings from the rules.

Cleared: No separate text box will be presented if there are any Accounting Validation Rule errors or warnings.

Relevant when: Select the parameter when you want to list all Accounting Validation Rule errors (any warnings are additionally included) in a separate text box that may be reviewed independently from the worksheet, copied from or printed.

Applicable for: P&C
Present Text Box if only Warnings Raised Selected: When you apply the Accounting Validation Rules from the Open Technical Worksheet window and one or more warnings are raised (but no errors) then (in addition to the normal confirm dialogs) a separate text box will be presented listing all of the errors and warnings from the rules.

Cleared: No separate text box will be presented if there are Accounting Validation Rule warnings but no errors.

Relevant when: If Present collated errors and warnings in a text box if error raised is selected then select the parameter when you want to additionally list all Accounting Validation Rule warnings in a separate text box, even if there are no errors.

Applicable for: P&C

Retrocession #

Retrocession system parameters are related to functionality in the Proportional- and Non-Proportional Retrocession Accounting areas.

  1. Double-click the System Administration icon from SICS workstation desktop.
  2. Double-click the System Parameter Maintenance icon.
  3. Click the arrow in front of Accounting.
  4. Click the arrow in front of Retrocession.

General #

accnt_retro_gnl.png

Field Description
Same as Inward Selected: Booking Year and -Period values on balances from:

* Outward Cedent’s Contract (OCC) ‘as Original’ Business Ledger

* XL CA for Outward Booking Currency ledger (if applicable/indicated on the Retrocession Calculation order)are allocated to the OCC- and Retrocessionaire’s Participation (RP) Booking Currency ledgers when Retrocession Calculation order is run. The balances booked in Booking Currency ledgers are split according to the various original Booking Year and -Periods.

Note! If a Booking Year/Period value is selected in the Worksheet Details Override field of the Retrocession Calculation order, this value overrides the Inward Booking Year/Periods in booking currency ledger.

This parameter applies for Proportional OCC- and RP treaty businesses.

Cleared: The Retrocession System Parameter ‘Defined on Order (To Period)’ is automatically selected. (Refer to the Accounting/Retrocession System Parameter ‘Defined on Order (To Period).

Relevant when: This parameter should be selected when the original Booking Year and - Period are required for the Retrocession Accounting process, e.g. for reporting purposes.

Applicable for: P&C, Life
Defined on Order (To Period) Selected: The Booking Year- and Period values defined in the ‘Last Accounting Year and Period to be Extracted’ fields of the Retrocession Calculation order are allocated to the balances in the Booking Currency business ledgers of the Outward Cedent’s Contract (OCC) and Retrocessionaire’s Participations (RP).

The original Booking Year and -Periods from OCC ‘as Original’ ledger, are overridden by Year and Period defined on the order.

Note! If an other Booking Year/Period value is selected in the Worksheet Details Override field of the Retrocession Calculation order, this value overrides the Defined on Order (To Period) Booking Year/Period in booking currency ledger.

This parameter applies to Proportional OCC- and RP Treaty businesses.

Cleared: The Retrocession System Parameter ‘Same as Inward’ is automatically selected. (Refer to the Accounting/Retrocession Parameter ‘Same as Inward’).

Relevant when: You select this parameter when the original Booking Year and -Period are not required and you want to limit the number of balances in the OCC- and RP business ledgers.

Applicable for: P&C, Life
Booking Period For Reserve /Portfolio Entries Increased By One Selected: The booking period of the reserve details/the portfolio entry details booked into the next open insured period are increased by one compared to the ordinary bookings. If the booking period of the ordinary bookings is the last booking period of the period set also the booking year will be increased by one.

This parameter applies to retrocessionaire participations on proportional treaty business bookings produced when running the retrocession calculation order.

Cleared: The original booking year/period is assigned to the reserve/portfolio entry bookings. (Original Booking Year/Period for Reserve/Portfolio Entry bookings means that the booking year is increased by one compared to the booking year/period of the ordinary bookings and the booking period is set equal to the from period of the base company specific settings)

Note! If another booking year/period value is selected in the ‘Worksheet Details Override’/Portfolio Entry BYRP’ field of the Retrocession Calculation Order window, that value will be assigned the bookings.

Relevant when: You select this parameter when the booking period will be increased with one (if the booking period is the last for the period set the booking year is increased with one and the booking period is set to the first for the same period set) for the reserve/portfolio entry bookings compared to the ordinary bookings.

Applicable for: P&C
Keep Due Date as Original Selected: Due Dates on balances from:

* Outward Cedent’s Contract (OCC)‘as Original’ ledger

* XL CA for Outward Booking Currency ledger (if applicable/selected on the calculation order) are allocated to the OCC- and Retrocessionaire’s Participation (RP) Booking Currency ledgers running the Retrocession Calculation order. The balances booked in Booking Currency ledgers are split according to the various original Due Dates.

The Due Dates are compared with the date in the field ‘Acct as of’ of the account ordered from the Administration conditions of the OCC. If Due Dates of the bookings <= date in the field ‘Acct as of’ of the ordered account, the bookings are allocated the Accounting Year and -Period from the ordered account. If Due Dates of the bookings > date in the field ‘Acct as of’ of the ordered account, the bookings are not booked to the OCC/RPs ‘as Booking’ business ledger unless the system parameter ‘Book Future Due Items on RP’ is selected.

This parameter applies for Proportional OCC- and RP Treaty businesses.

Cleared: Running the Retrocession Calculation order for an account, the account’s ‘Acct .as of’ date overrides the original Due Dates in the OCC- and RP’s Booking Currency ledgers. The accounts ‘Acct. as of’ date is defined in the Administration Conditions of the OCC.

Relevant when: You select this parameter when the original Due Dates are required for the further Retrocession Accounting process (e.g. for reporting purposes), and if you want to avoid bookings not yet due to be retroceded.

Applicable for: P&C, Life
Keep Accounting Period as Original Selected: Accounting Periods From and -To dates on balances from:

* Outward Cedent’s Contract (OCC)‘as Original’ ledger

* XL CA for Outward Booking Currency ledger (if applicable/selected on the Retrocession Calculation order) are allocated to the OCC- and Retrocessionaire’s Participation (RP) Booking Currency ledgers running the Retrocession Calculation order. The Business Ledger column labelled ‘AccPeriod From- To’ is updated with the original Accounting Period dates. The details are split according to the various original Accounting Periods.

This Parameter applies to Proportional OCC- and RP Treaty Businesses.

Cleared: The ‘AccPeriod From -To’ date of the account is allocated to the OCC- and RP’s Booking Currency ledgers running the Retrocession Calculation order. The account is selected from the Administration Condition of the OCC.Relevant when: You select this parameter when the Original Accounting Period From and -To dates are required for the further Retrocession Accounting process, e.g. for reporting purposes.

Applicable for: P&C, Life
Book Future Due Items on RP Selected: The Due Dates of the bookings coming from:

* Outward Cedent’s Contract (OCC) ‘as Original’ ledger

* XL CA for Outward Booking currency ledger (if applicable/selected on the Retrocession Calculation order) are compared with the date in the field ‘Acct as of’ of the account ordered from the Administration Conditions of the OCC.

If Due Dates of the bookings <= date in the field ‘Acct as of’ of the ordered account, the bookings are allocated the Accounting Year and -Period from the ordered account.

If Due Dates of the bookings > date in the field ‘Acct as of’ of the ordered account, the date in the filed ‘Acct as of’ of the next account number is checked. If Due Date <= this date, the corresponding Accounting Year and -Period is allocated to the bookings.

The next Account number(s) within the Insured Period are checked until all bookings have an Accounting Year and -Period allocated.The bookings allocated to a newer Account will have the Due Date same as the ‘Payment Cedent’ date allocated according to the ‘Acct as of ’ date of hte new account, unless the Retrocession system parameter ‘Keep Due Date as Original’ is selected. For bookings allocated to a newer Account, no special calculations like Reserve, Deposits, or Portfolio etc. will be performed. Calculation of Deductions will be performed.

This parameter applies to Proportional OCC- and Retrocessionaire Participation (RP) Treaty Businesses.

Cleared: Running the Retrocession Calculation order, the bookings are allocated the Accounting Year and -Period of the ordered account, unless the Retrocession System Parameter ‘Keep Due Dates as Original’ is selected.

Relevant when: You select this parameter when balances are to be allocated to Accounting Years and Period of ordered account and/or future accounts in accordance with the due dates of the original balances.

Applicable for: P&C, Life

(For Life business it is recommended to leave this parameter cleared).
Automatically Create Retrocession Calculation Orders Selected: A Retrocession Calculation order is automatically created when the “as Original” ledger of an Outward Cedent’s Contract (OCC) is updated with figures from a linked Assumed Business.

The Retrocession System Parameter check box ‘Use Default Booking Year Period’ is enabled. (Refer to this Parameter for information about which account is automatically selected from the OCC’s Administration Conditions when the Retrocession Calculation order is created.)

The parameter applies to OCC Proportional Treaty Business.

Cleared: No Retrocession Calculation order is automatically created. You have to create the order manually from the Administration Conditions of the OCC.

Relevant when: You select this parameter when the conditions relevant for the Retrocession Calculation order are limited to the ones listed above and you want to automate the process creating the orders.

Applicable for: P&C, Life

(For Life business it is recommended to leave this parameter cleared.)
Automatically Create Retrocession Estimation Calculation Orders Selected: A Retrocession Estimation Calculation order is automatically created when the “as Original” ledger of an Outward Cedent’s Contract (OCC) is updated with figures made on the Estimation tab from a linked Assumed Business.

The Retrocession System Parameter check box ‘Use Default Booking Year Period’’ is enabled when either of or both the system parameters ‘Automatically Create Retrocession Calculation Orders’ and_‘Automatically Create Retrocession Estimation Calculation Orders_’ is/are selected. (Refer to this Parameter for information about which account is automatically selected from the OCC’s Administration Conditions when the Retrocession Estimation Calculation order is created).

The parameter applies to OCC Proportional Treaty Business.

Cleared: No Retrocession Estimation Calculation order is automatically created. You have to create the order manually from the Administration Conditions of the OCC.

Relevant when: You select this parameter when you want the system to automatically create new Retrocession Estimation Calculation orders.

Applicable for: P&C, Cede
Close Worksheet on Orders Automatically Created Selected: The field ‘Close Worksheet’ is selected by default on a Retrocession Calculation order/Retrocession Estimation Calculation order automatically created.

The system parameter applies to OCC- and ORP Proportional Treaty Businesses.

You are only able to select this system parameter in combination with the Retrocession System Parameter ‘Automatically Create Retrocession Calculation Orders’ and/or ‘Automatically Create Retrocession Estimation Calculation Orders’(refer to these system parameters for further information).

Cleared: The field ‘Close Worksheet’ is deselected by default on a Retrocession Calculation order/Retrocession Estimation Calculation order automatically created.

_Relevant when:_You select this parameter when you want the system to select the field ‘Close Worksheet’ on Retrocession Calculation orders/Retrocession Estimation Calculation orders automatically created.

Applicable for: P&C, Cede
Use Default Booking Year Period Selected: A Date field is enabled in the ‘Base Company Specific Settings/Booking Terms/ Open Booking Years and Periods on Local’ System Parameters. This date restricts the selection of accounts to be selected when a Retrocession Calculation order is created automatically.

Whenever the “as Original” ledger of the Outward Cedent’s Contract (OCC) is updated with figures from a linked Assumed Business, the date entered in the Booking Terms is checked against the ‘Acct as of’ dates of the accounts defined in the Administration Conditions of the OCC. The account with an ‘Acct. as of’ date equal to or the first higher than the Booking Terms Date, is to be considered the correct account.

If the Booking Terms Date field is empty, today’s date is default value.

When an account is considered for selection from the Administration Conditions of the OCC, the following apply:

* No new Retrocession Calculation order is created if an account already exists for the same Accounting Year/Period not yet run.

* If order exists for same Accounting Year/Period, but this order is already run/closed a new order is created.

* A new order is created when no order exists for the same Accounting Year/Period

This parameter applies to OCC- and RP Proportional Treaty Businesses.

You are only able to select this parameter in combination with the Retrocession System Parameter ‘Automatically Create Retrocession Calculation Orders’. (Refer to this parameter for further information).

Cleared: In order to find the correct account for which the Calculation order is to be automatically created, the system checks the latest Insured Period. The 1staccount following the last account having the status ‘Converted to Account Currency’ or ’ Document Produced’ is selected.

Relevant when: Select this parameter if you want to determine/limit the selection of account for which the Retrocession Calculation order is automatically created.

Applicable for: P&C, Life

(For Life business it is recommended to leave this parameter cleared.)
Ignore Manual Bookings on RP in Calculation Order Selected: Running a Retrocession Calculation order, the system will ignore any bookings made manually in the Retrocessionaire’s Participation’s (RP) Business Ledger in Booking Currency.

Cleared: Running a Retrocession Calculation order, the system will reverse any bookings made manually into the RP’s Business Ledger in Booking Currency.

This parameter applies to Outward Cedent’s Contract- and RP Proportional Treaty Businesses.

Relevant when: It is only relevant to select this Parameter when Retrocession Calculation order is run on a Cumulative Basis.

Applicable for: P&C, Life

(For Life business it is recommended to leave this parameter cleared.)
Show Cumulated Reserves on TA Selected: The cumulated Premium and Loss Reserve figures, shown in the Technical Account, are shown on detail level also when there is no new booking for the same detail in the current Account.

(On detail level means; per Currency, Insured Period, Accounting Classification, Occurrence Year and Original Accounting Year and Period).

This parameter applies to Technical Accounts produced when running the Retrocession Account order for Proportional Outward Cedent’s Contract and Retrocessionaire Participations.

Cleared: The cumulated Premium and Loss Reserve figures, shown in the Technical Account, are not shown on detail level when no new booking for the same detail is included in the current Account.

Relevant when: You should select this parameter when you want the Technical Account to show cumulated Reserve figures on detail level also when there is no new booking for the detail included in the current Account. Also relevant if you want to produce the Technical Account including only Reserve bookings (without any Technical Worksheet).

Applicable for: P&C
Use RU from OCC/ORP in AC Selected: The reporting unit value(s) in the accounting classification for the proportional outward cedent’s contract bookings ‘As Original’/the retrocessionaire participation bookings ‘as Booking’ are not copied from the assumed business, but are replaced by the reporting unit value(s) from the OCC respectively RP business insured period section. For non-proportional recovery bookings, the reporting unit value in the accounting classification is taken from the outward cedent’s contract or the facultative retrocessionaire’s participation instead of the reporting unit of the assumed business claim detail(s).

This parameter applies to OCC/RP treaties and to proportional and non-proportional facultative RPs.

Note! The reporting unit assigned to the bookings depend on the definition of the system parameter Classification Rules 1 in Base Company Specific Settings.

If the OCC/RP insured period section has more than one value within each category of the mandatory reporting unit(s), the first value found by the system is assigned. If no reporting unit is defined for the mandatory reporting unit category for the base company of the OCC/RP insured period, the reporting unit of the accounting classification will have no value for these categories.

Cleared: The reporting unit of the accounting classification made on the OCC business ledger ‘as Original’ and the RP business ledger ‘as Booking’ are copied from the reporting unit of the accounting classification of the assumed business booking detail. For non-proportional recovery bookings, the reporting unit in the accounting classification is set from the assumed business claim detail(s).

Relevant when: You select this parameter when you want to replace the reporting unit of the accounting classification of the assumed business booking detail, by the reporting unit of the outward cedent’s contract respectively the retrocessionaire participation/facultative retrocessionaire participation insured period section (i.e. the main section).

* when bookings are made automatically on the OCC business ledger ‘as Original’ by closing the technical/claim worksheet on the assumed business.

* when bookings are made automatically on the retrocessionaire business ledger ‘as Booking’ when running the retrocession calculation/retrocession estimation calculation order.

* when bookings are made automatically on the proportional facultative retrocessionaire participation business ledger’as Booking’ by closing the technical/claim worksheet on the assumed business.

* when automatic recovery bookings are made on non-proportional outward cedent’s contract or facultative retrocessionaire’s participation through recovery calculation orders.

* when bookings are made automatically on retrocessionaire’s participation by closing the worksheet on a non-proportional outward cedent’s contract.

Applicable for: P&C, Life
Keep Description Of Account As Original Selected: A list of all available Accounting Period Classifications appears (refer to Reference Data Maintenance Handling). The Accounting Period Classifications selected from the list will be kept unchanged and will not be replaced by the default value Regular Account. The Accounting Period Classification is shown in the field Description of Account on the Business Ledger, Account Balances tab, details part. This parameter applies to Proportional Retrocession Accounting - (when running the Retrocession Calculation order, Retrocession Estimation Calculation order and Retrocession Calculation Group order).
The system parameter Keep Description Of Account For Commission becomes enabled.

Cleared: The default Accounting Period Classification Regular Account will be assigned in the field Description of Account for bookings made on the Business Ledger of the Outward Cedent’s Contract/Retrocessionaire Participation.

Relevant when: Select this parameter and select the Accounting Period Classifications you want to be kept as original when running the Retrocession Calculation order, the Retrocession Estimation Calculation order or the Retrocession Calculation Group order. The result can be shown on the Business Ledger As Booking for the Outward Cedent’s Contract/Retrocessionaire Participation.

Applicable for: P&C, Life
Keep Description Of Account For Commission Selected: When Commission is calculated as a Percentage of Premium the system will copy the Description Of Account from the basis Premium

Cleared: The default Accounting Period Classification Regular Account will be assigned in the field Description of Account for Commission bookings made on the Business Ledger of the Outward Cedent’s Contract/Retrocessionaire Participation.

Relevant when: Select this parameter if you want the calculated Commission bookings to have the Description of Account copied from the basis Premium.

Applicable for: P&C, Life
Figures without Decimals for Retrocession Participation Selected: The Retrocession Accounting amounts are booked without decimals in the Booking- and Account Currency Business Ledgers of the Retrocessionaire’s Participation (RP) business. Consequently the documents created, e.g. Technical Account and Profit Loss Account, display amounts without decimals.

This parameter applies to RP Proportional and Non-Proportional Treaty and Proportional Facultative Businesses.

Cleared: The Retrocession Accounting amounts are booked with decimals in the RP’s Booking- and Account Currency Business Ledgers.

Relevant when: You select this parameter when it is sufficient to handle your Proportional Retrocession Accounting and -Document Production using amounts rounded to the nearest whole amount.

Applicable for: P&C, Life

(For Life business it is recommended to leave this parameter cleared).
Profit/Loss in Main or Base Currency Selected: P/L Account is produced in the Main or Base Currency only.

Cleared: P/L Account is produced in all account currencies.

Applicable for: P&C
Transfer Details with Accounting Currency Flag to General Ledger Selected: The Retrocessionaire’s Participation (RP) technical bookings in Account Currency are transferred to General Ledger in addition to the bookings in Booking Currency.

This parameter applies to RP Proportional Treaty and - Facultative businesses.

Cleared: The RP technical bookings in Booking Currency are transferred to General Ledger

Relevant when: Technical Bookings in Accounting Currency are required for transfer to the General Ledger system.

Applicable for: P&C, Life
Retrocession based on Net Retroceded Share Selected: Enables the field ‘Exclude Contribution to Net Quota Share OCC(s) on the Insured Period tab of a Proportional Outward Cedent’s Contract and the fields ‘Contribute to Net Quota Share OCC’/ ‘Percentage’ on the Insured Period tab of a Non-Proportional OCC.

Furthermore, when this system parameter is selected, there will be no check of the sort order on the Proportional Protection Assignment list of an Outward Cedent’s Contract with Cover Basis ‘Original Cost Participation’ (OCC Net Quota Share), meaning that it is not necessary to have this OCC as the last OCC in the Protection Assignment list.

This system parameter will also have impact on the retroceded figures, as retrocession to Net Quota Share OCC will be based on the net retroceded share percentage defined in the Proportional Protection Assignment for this OCC. This means that bookings made on the protected business (e.g. Assumed Business) will use the net percentage for calculating figures to the OCC Net Quota Share. When running the Retrocession Calculation Order for the remaining OCCs on the Proportional Protection Assignment list, bookings will be made to Net Quota Share OCC based on ORPs figures multiplied with the net retroceded share percentage. In addition, contribution will be automatically made from a Non-Proportional OCC when a Net Quota Share OCC/percentage is entered in the fields ‘Contribute to Net Quota Share OCC’/ ‘Percentage’.

Cleared: Field ‘Exclude Contribution to Net Quota Share OCC(s) on the Insured Period tab of a Proportional Outward Cedent’s Contract and the fields ‘Contribute to Net Quota Share OCC’/ ‘Percentage’ on the Insured Period tab of a Non-Proportional OCC are disabled.

The OCC with Cover Basis ‘Original Cost Participation’ must be defined with highest sort order (last in sequence) on the Proportional Protection Assignment List.

The net retroceded share percentage is not used to calculate figures to the Net Quota Share OCC.

Relevant when: You need to retrocede figures to Net Quota Share OCC multiplied with the net retroceded percentage before bookings are made to the NQS OCC ‘as Original’ business ledger. The calculation of net retroceded share figures are performed for all original figures coming from Assumed Business, Proportional/Non-Proportional Retrocessionaires.

Applicable for: P&C, Cede
Proportional Protection Assignment on Non Prop OCC in Use Selected: Proportional Protection Assignment is enabled on a Non-prop OCC and bookings are proportionally retroceded to the protecting OCC.

Cleared: Proportional Protection Assignment on a non-prop OCC is disabled.

Relevant when: You need to proportionally retrocede bookings from a Non-prop OCC to calculate proportional retrocession after a non-prop protection.

Note: When neither Retrocede Informational Entry Codes from Non Prop OCC nor Keep Sign from Non Prop OCC is selected, net figures (considering unplaced share) are negated and retroceded to As Original ledger of Prop OCC.

Applicable for: P&C
Retrocede Informational Entry Codes from Non Prop OCC Enabled when Proportional Protection Assignment on Non-Prop OCC in use is activated and can be selected if Keep Sign from Non Prop OCC is not.

Selected: Only informational recovery bookings, such as Recovery Paid Retention and Recovery Reserve Through Top on a Non-Prop OCC will be transferred to As Original ledger of the protecting Prop OCC.

The proportional retroceded amounts are displayed on the Headline Loss, Non-Proportional Recovery List.

Relevant when: You need to proportionally retrocede informational recovery bookings from a Non-Prop OCC to calculate proportional retrocession net after a non-prop protection.

Applicable for: P&C
Keep Sign from Non Prop OCC Enabled when Proportional Protection Assignment on Non-Prop OCC in use is activated, and can be selected if Retrocede Informational Entry Codes from Non Prop OCC is not.

Selected: All bookings on the Non-Prop OCC will be transferred to As Original ledger of the protecting Prop OCC with the same sign as bookings at Non Prop OCC. Figures are taken 100% from Non Prop OCC ledger. The retroceded amounts from the Non-Prop OCC are not displayed on the Headline Loss.

Relevant when: You need to transfer all bookings from a Non-Prop OCC to the protecting Proportional OCC.

Applicable for: P&C
Book Zero Reserves in OCC/RP Business Ledger Selected: When reserve bookings summing to zero (booked as 0,00 or debit/credit summing to 0,00) on a Source (Assumed) Business will not be suppressed on outward business ledgers.

When reserves are booked on an assumed business with a zero value or when the debit credit of the reserves total to zero, and a retrocession calculation order and a retrocession account order are run for the OCC attached to the assumed business, the zero values will be displayed in the business ledger of the OCC and the RPs When the Retrocession Account Order (Treaty Outward/Fac) is run for the FAC RPs attached to the assumed business, the reserve bookings booked as zero values are displayed in the business ledger of the RP.

Reserve bookings totalling to a debit credit value of 0 are displayed as they are booked on the Source business. i.e, the amounts will not be totalled up as a zero value

Cleared: When reserve bookings amounting the zero are booked on an Assumed (Source) business, the zero bookings are suppressed on the OCC/RP when running a Retrocession calculation order and a Retrocession account order.
Override Booking Period on As Original Correction Bookings Selected: When correction bookings are created on a proportional treaty Outward Cedent’s Contract because the Retroceded Share for this OCC has been changed on the Protection Assignment, then the system will check if the source booking’s Booking Year and Period is an open period for the Base Company on the correction booking (the Base Company on the correction booking is copied from the source booking). If it is not then the system will override this period with the first open booking period for the Base Company on the booking.

Cleared: When correction bookings are created on a proportional treaty Outward Cedent’s Contract because the Retroceded Share for this OCC has been changed on the Protection Assignment, then the system will take and accept the Booking Year and Period from the source booking.

Relevant when: Select this parameter if you want all correction bookings that are created on a proportional treaty Outward Cedent’s Contract because the Retroceded Share for this OCC has been changed on the Protection Assignment, get an open Booking Year and Period.

Applicable for: P&C, Life
Keep Booking Year/Period from Source Business Selected: The booking year/period from the source detail will be copied to the columns Orig Book Year and Orig Book Per (Original Booking Year and Period) on the target detail.

The fields will be populated in the following situations:

* Reverse a Worksheet, Balance or Detail

* Reverse and Replace a Worksheet, Balance or Detail

* Split Balance into details

* Perform balance split in Balance Pairing

* Run the Unearned Premium Reserve Order

* Automatic booking of As Original amounts on outward

* Run Retrocession Calculation Order

* Run Retrocession Account Order

Calculated details e.g. commission (when in percent of premium) will have the same original booking year/period as the basis booking e.g. premium. For Reverse and Replace, the Booking Year/Period from the source will be copied to both the reversal and replacement booking. However, it will not be copied to any additional details added to the worksheet. In all the above processes; If Orig Book Year and Orig Book Per already exists on the source detail, this will be copied to the target detail.

When Retrocession Account order is run with the Exchange Rate option ‘Period End Rate - Original BYRP’ selected, the system will convert from As Booking to As Account using the Period End Rate for the Original Booking Year and Period. Furthermore, when a booking is reversed (and replaced) or split, the Functional Currency amounts on the new (target) details will be calculated using the Period End Rate of the Original Booking Year and Period. When this parameter is selected, the Accounting/Currency parameter Reverse with Re-Calculation will not have any effect. When the Orig Book Year and Orig Book Per are set on the detail then the system will calculate Functional Currency by use of Period End Rate independent of the Functional Currency Calculation Rules defined.

Cleared: The Orig Book Year and Orig Book Per fields are not populated and not shown on the business ledgers.

Relevant when: Select this system parameter when you want the outward booking details to be shown with original booking year/period equal to the booking year/period of source business’ booking and to be able to convert ORP booking details from Booking Currency to Account Currency using ‘Period End Rate - Orig BYRP’.

Note that this system parameter must be activated before any bookings are made on the source business to have the outward booking details converted to Account Currency using ‘Period End Rate - Orig BYRP’.
Not Allowed to Remove Protection Assignment If Its Bookings Are not Reversed Selected: When remove the Proportional or Non-Proportional OCC completely from the assumed business PP and NP conditions, SICS will check bookings on OCC coming from the assumed business and manual bookings on OCC having this particular assumed business as Source Business. For preliminary bookings only those coming from protected section and its sub sections of the assume business will be included in validation, while bookings directly booked on OCC with linkage to the insured period of the assumed business will always be considered. If the sum of all these bookings per aggregation level are all zero, then OCC protection can be removed. If closed bookings are not reversed to zero for all booking dimensions (UWY, Insured Period, Section, Accounting Classification, Currency, OccYr, Claim No, Entry Code and etc.) or having any bookings on worksheet which status not being ‘Closed’ or ‘Inactive’, i.e. any pending statuses, removal protection assignment isn’t allowed.

Cleared: SICS allow to remove Proportional or Non-Proportional Protection assignment from assumed business even when bookings not reversed to zero on OCC and Placements.

Relevant when: Select this parameter if you want to prohibit removing Proportional or Non-Proportional protection assignment from a protected assumed business if having bookings on OCC are not reversed to zero.

Applicable for: P&C, Life
Populate Original Booking Year and Period from Source Includes a drop down with possible values <None>, Local, Legal and Global.

Only enabled when parameter Keep Booking Year/Period from Source Business is selected

Selected: Determines which booking term (Local, Legal or Global) from the source detail that will be copied to the Orig Book Year and Orig Book Per fields on the target detail as described under parameter Keep Booking Year/Period from Source Business.

Cleared: If <None> is selected, the Booking Year and Period (Local) will be copied.

Relevant when: You have different booking terms for different base companies and you want to populate Original Booking Year and Period for the booking term which is common to all base companies.
Set default Order Status of Retrocession Calculation Order Selected: According to the system parameter setting, system sets default values for Order status in Retrocession Calculation order. This includes a drop down with possible values Partial, Final and Adjustment for slelection.

Cleared: The order status would be empty and needs to be manually selected.


Relevant when: If Order status required to be automatically defaulted in Retrocession Calculation Order.

Applicable for: P&C, Life
Default Booking Year Period for Retrocession Calculation Order Selected: The system will set the Default value of Last Booking Year Period in Retrocession Calculation order according to the value of System Administration»Booking Terms Maintenance»Default Booking Year Period.

Cleared: The Last Booking Year Period would be empty and needs to be manually selected.


Relevant when: If the corresponding base company has separately configured Booking terms in System Administration » Booking Terms Maintenance, the default value required to be the Default Booking Year Period corresponding to the base company.

Applicable for: P&C, Life
Default Booking Year Period for Retrocession Estimation Calculation Order Selected: The system will set the Default value of Last Booking Year Period in Retrocession Estimation Calculation order according to the value of System Administration»Booking Terms Maintenance»Default Booking Year Period.

Cleared: The Last Booking Year Period would be empty and needs to be manually selected.


Relevant when: If the corresponding base company has separately configured Booking terms in System Administration » Booking Terms Maintenance, the default value will be the Default Booking Year Period corresponding to the base company.

Applicable for: P&C, Life
Set default Order Status of Retrocession Account Order Selected: According to the system parameter setting, system sets default values for Order status in Retrocession Account order. This includes a drop down with possible values Converted To Account Currencies, Document Produced for slelection.

Cleared: The order status would be empty and needs to be manually selected.


Relevant when: If Order status required to be automatically defaulted in Retrocession Account Order.

Applicable for: P&C, Life
Create figures in Booking Currency when executing Reserve and Deposit Detail Mass Update Selected: system always creates open worksheets in Booking Currency while executing Reserve and Deposit Detail Mass Update, for business level Retrocessionaire Participation (ORP). While closing the open worksheets from View Worksheet window or through Open Worksheet Mass Update function, the worksheet will remain in Booking Currency (as existing). The figures in Account Currency of the ORP can be generated via the standard Retrocession Account order if required.

Cleared: System keeps the original function that only generate open worksheets in Account Currency.


Relevant when: ‘As Booking’ figures are required to be generated when closing the ORP worksheets.

Applicable for: P&C, Life

P&C Miscellaneous #

AccountingRetrocessionPCMiscellaneous.png

Field Description
Keep Underwriting Year from Source Business Selected: The underwriting year of the source business (e.g. Assumed Business, Policy Cede) will be kept and shown in the column ‘Original UwYR’ on the outward business ledgers. Original detail bookings like premium, claims etc. are split according to original underwriting year. Deductions, when calculated as a percent of premium, will be split according to the original underwriting year of the basis premium bookings. Calculations are performed per underwriting year of the outward business.

This parameter applies to Proportional Retrocession Accounting - i.e. when running the Retrocession Calculation order, Retrocession Estimation Calculation order and Retrocession Calculation Group order.

Note! that activating this system parameter, will disable the field ‘Details per Ins. Period’ on the Administration Conditions of the proportional Outward Cedent’s Contract)

Cleared: The Original Underwriting Year of the OCC/ORP ‘as Booking’ will be set equal to the Underwriting Year of the booking detail.

Relevant when: Select this parameter when you want that the outward booking details to be shown with the underwriting year from the source business’ booking and the calculated ORP deduction details with the original underwriting year equal to the basis premium details. The result can be shown on the Business Ledger As Booking for the Outward Cedent’s Contract/Retrocessionaire’s Participation and on the As Account ledger for the Retrocessionaire’s Participation since the Retrocession Account order copies these values independent of this parameter.

Applicable for: P&C
Booking on Accounting Classification valid for Original Base Company Selected: When an Assumed Businesses is protected by a prop treaty OCC and the system recognize that the Reinsurer on the protected business is not equal to the Cedent of the OCC then the user will be asked if the Base Company on the AB should automatically be set on the OCC if it is not present from before. If that is wanted the new Base Company is added on the Partners tab on the OCC. Both the Main Base Company and the Separate Balance flag are NOT selected as default.

Additional, when manual booking takes place on the OCC/ORP, when an Original Base Company is assigned to a detail, the system will present the ACs valid for this Original Base Company, even if this AC is not visible as valid on the business.

Cleared: The Reinsurer on the protected Assumed Business is NOT added on the prop treaty OCC, and the Cedent marked as Main Base Company or the first Base Company listed on the Partners tab if none is marked as Main, will be used to present the ACs valid for details booked on the OCC.

Relevant when: You want to associate all the relevant Base Companies, from the Assumed Business, with a single ceded OCC business, and to apply the appropriate Accounting Classifications to the business ledger on that OCC. This is done with reference to the Base Company AC rules for the Original Base Company assigned to the details on the worksheet. This is also relevant if you have associated Functional Currency rules per Base Company and you want these rules to set the Functional Currency on the bookings.

Applicable for: P&C
Maintain Balances for Fac. Retro. Participations via TOF Order This parameter applies to Retrocessionaire’s Participation (RP) Proportional Facultative business.

Selected: The balances in As Booking Business Ledger get the indicator Settled. A Treaty/Outward Fac. (TOF) order has to be run in order to transfer the balances to the As Account Business Ledger in where the balances get the indicator Unsettled.

The balances in Account Currency are displayed in the Business Partner Ledger.

Cleared: The balances are displayed in As Booking Currency Business Ledger and get the indicator ‘Unsettled’.

The balances are also automatically displayed in the Business Partner Ledger.

Relevant when: Select this parameter if you want to produce premium and loss documents to your Facultative RP businesses through the Tof order If you want to display the balances for the Facultative RP businesses on the BP ledger without running the TOF order, the parameter must be cleared.

Note! This parameter must not be changed unless you know the consequences. It is also important that the parameter is selected if you are running the Treaty/Outward Fac order.
Distribute RP Figures on Multiple Effective Periods Selected: Retroceded figures are distributed according to ORP shares defined on the Effective Periods within an Insured Period. Also the OCC’s Claim Basis(Claims Conditions) is checked when distributing the Retroceded figures (refer to User Guide chapter ‘Distribute RP figures on Multiple Effective Periods…’ for more information regarding the rules for the various Claim Basis).This parameter applies to retrocessionaire participations on proportional treaty business bookings produced when running the Retrocession Calculation order

Cleared: Retroceded figures are distributed according to the RP share defined on the newest Effective Period within an Insured Period.

Relevant when: You select this system parameter when retroceded figures should be split according to ORP shares entered on multiple Effective Periods instead of the ORP share from the newest Effective Period within the Insured Period.

Applicable for: P&C, Cede
Allow Booking/Use Conditions on OCC/RP Section Level Selected: Enables the flag Automatically booked figures on section level on the Business tab of a Proportional OCC. When that flag is selected, automatic bookings on Proportional OCC business ledger ‘As Original’ will be done on section level. To have the flag Automatically booked figures on section level automatically selected on the Business tab of a Proportional OCC when the OCC is renewed/created, you can activate the system parameter Do not allow create Technical Worksheet for non-leaf sections. When running the Retrocession Calculation Order, conditions on Section level will be used to calculate bookings to be made on the Retrocessionaires’ ledgers.

Cleared: The flag Automatically booked figures on section level on the Business tab of an Proportional OCC is disabled. Automatic bookings on Proportional OCC business ledger ‘As Original’ are done on Main Section. The Retrocession Calculation Order only considers conditions on Main Section.

Relevant when: Select this parameter if you want to allow for conditions on Section level to be used by the Retrocession Calculation Order.

Applicable for: P&C, Cede
Only Mandatory Items in Accounting Classifications Selected: When closing a worksheet on a Source (Assumed) Business (either manually or automatically), the Accounting Classifications created for the outward bookings will include classification items defined as mandatory only. All non mandatory classifications will be disregarded.

Cleared: When closing a worksheet on a Source (Assumed) Business (either manually or automatically), the Accounting Classifications created for the outward bookings will include the same classification items as the source business bookings.

Relevant when: Select this parameter when you want to aggregate the outward bookings by disregarding non mandatory classification items of the inward bookings’ Accounting Classifications.

Applicable for: P&C, Cede
Convert Figures to Account Currency According to Orig Acc Year and Period Selected: The field Period End Rate (Original AYRP) on the Administration Conditions of the proportional OCC is enabled and the corresponding Exchange Rate option on the Retrocession Account order is defaulted. The Retrocessionaire Participation figures converted to Account Currency are converted using Period End Rates corresponding to the Original Accounting Year and Period of the detail booking. Also figures included in the Profit/Loss calculation performed when running the Retrocession Calculation order are converted using the Period End Rate.

This parameter applies to Proportional Retrocession Accounting (when running the Retrocession Calculation/Account order).

When this parameter is selected, also the columns for Original Accounting Year and Original Accounting Period are available for input on manually created technical worksheets on Level of Business Retrocessionaire Participation.

Cleared: The RP figures are converted to Account Currency using the Exchange Rate selected on the Retrocession Account order.

Relevant when: You have retroceded figures with Original Accounting Year and Period older than the Accounting Year and Period of the current Account and you want these figures to be converted to Account Currency using the exchange rate ‘End Period Rate’ matching the Original Accounting Year and Period_.

Applicable for: P&C, Cede
Retrocede to Own Retention Selected:* Automatic assignment of Own Retention is included as part of Automatic Protection Assignment of policies and fac/direct business
* Applicable for Generate Automatic Protection Assignment of single business and Multi Business Auto Protection order
* Policy Light specific (NON Life):
* Manual assignment of Own Retention enabled
* Viewing Target Details allocated to Own Retention is available from light ledger
* Preliminary Booking order and Booking Correction order will distribute Light details applying to Own Retention
* Light details are transferred to Own Retention ledger ‘As original’ for inspection only. Manual update of the Own Retention as original ledger is not available

Cleared:* Automatic Protection Assignment does not include assignment of Own Retention
* Manual assignment of Own Retention is NOT available for policy light and light details are NOT allocated to Own Retention as part of preliminary booking orders.
* Own Retention Business Ledger is NOT enabled

Functional impact:
* Protection Assignment of Policy Light
* Automatic Protection Assignment
* Own Retention
* Preliminary Booking Order
* Preliminary Correction Order

Relevant when e.g.: The company requires to explicitly show their retention both as part of policy allocation and the ceded distribution.

Applicable for: P&C, Cede
Set all Policy details included in PB order to Retroceded Selected: The system marks all Policy Light / Policy Ceded booking details as Retroceded = Yes if no proportional protection found when processing through Preliminary Booking order.

Cleared: The system keeps booking details as Retroceded = No. Update to Yes when proportional retrocession is processed via Preliminary Booking order.

Default: Selected

Relevant when: If client has Policy Light / Policy Ceded booking details which are not protected by a proportional protection, and want to avoid that the same unprotected figures are included in the Preliminary booking order every time. This system parameter should only be used if the Multi Business Protection Assignment order is always run before Preliminary booking order.

Note: System considers only booking details which have Retroceded = No in PB order.

Applicable for: Cede
Default Items Included ‘Reserves Pro rata Temp’ on REAC Orders Selected: The field Reserves Pro rata Temp in section Items Included on the Retrocession Calculation Order is selected by default.

This parameter applies to Proportional Retrocession Accounting (when running the Retrocession Calculation).

When this parameter is selected, the field Reserves / Portfolios is deselected (as cannot calculate both reserves in the same order).

Cleared: The field Reserves Pro rata Temp in section Items Included on the Retrocession Calculation Order is deselected by default

Relevant when: You want the Premium Reserve calculated based on the Calculation Method Pro Rata Temporis instead of e.g. Percent of Premium or Percent Of Original

Applicable for: P&C, Cede
Aggregate by sign in REAC Selected: Booking details produced by the Retrocession Calculation Order/Retrocession Estimation Calculation Order/Retrocession Account Order are aggregated according to the sign of the details.

Cleared: No aggregation of booking details due to different sign of the details is performed when running the Retrocession Calculation Order/Retrocession Estimation Calculation Order/Retrocession Account Order.

Relevant when: You want the system to aggregate booking details according to sign so that the Functional Currency Amount always is shown with the same sign as its Original Amount

Applicable for: P&C, Cede
Automatic Release Pairing on Prop Fac Retrocessionaire Selected: Retained and released pairing for proportional fac protection is updated accordingly when doing pairing on the protected assumed business. The automatic pairing is triggered either when closing a Technical WS which contains a paired release detail or when doing a manual pairing for retained and release amount. Entry code categories included in the retained/release functionality are: Premium/Claim Deposit, Non Liquid Premium/Claim Deposit, Cash Claim and Premium due later.

Cleared: No automatic pairing takes place for proportional fac protection when doing pairing for protected assumed business. Pairing must be done manually for the retrocessionaire participation.

Relevant when: Select this parameter if you want automatic pairing of retained and released details for proportional fac retrocessionaires when pairing is done for the protected Assumed Business. The automatic pairing leaves the assumed and outward bookings more in sync, avoiding missing pairings due to delayed manual updates.

Applicable for: P&C, Cede
Facultative Netting Premium Selected: When a Policy Ceded is protected by a Non Proportional Facultative protection, any premium bookings on the Non Proportional Facultative protection will automatically create identical informational bookings on the Policy Ceded. See the chapter Netting of Facultative Premium in the Cede User Guide for more information about this functionality

Cleared: No informational bookings will be made on the Policy Ceded when booking premiums on a Non Proportional Facultative protection.

Relevant when: You have a Policy Ceded which is protected by a Proportional Treaty and or a Proportional Fac in combination with one or several Non Proportional Facultative protections, and the Proportional reinsurers should partake in the payment of the non-proportional premium.

Applicable for: Cede
Fac Netting Not Booked on Policy Selected: The informational netting amount is not booked on the Policy, but directly on the Proportional Treaty’s As Original Ledger.

Cleared: The Netting Amount is booked on the Policy

Relevant when: You want the netting amounts to be reflected directly on the Proportional Treat, without being booked on the Policy first.

Applicable for: Cede
Netting of Non-Prop Treaty Premium Selected: When Non Prop Treaty Protection is defined in same programme as a Prop Treaty US Quota Share, the premium bookings made on a non-prop treaty ORP is netted directly on the prop treaty’s “As Original Ledger”, without being booked on the policy level.

Cleared: The netting premium amount is calculated based on the premium booked on policy and the premium rate defined on the Non-Prop Treaty OCC. The netting is calculated and booked on Policy through an order, and then carried over to the Prop Treaty As Original ledger via the Preliminary Booking Order.

Relevant when: You want the netting to be restricted to OCCs within same program, and be based on actually booked reinsurance premium amounts.

Applicable for: Cede
Transfer Premium/Portfolio on Prop Treaty OCCs with claim basis Losses Occurring Selected: When running the Retrocession Calculation Order, Premium Portfolio Withdrawal representing the premium from source business made with Accounting Period beyond the Insured Period of the OCC. If OCC is renewed to the next Insured Period, also a Portfolio Entry with the same amount as the Portfolio Withdrawal, but with reversed sign will be booked on OCC/ORP.

Claim Date of Loss/Claims Trigger Date will be checked and Claim detail is being booked on the Insured Period matching the Date of Loss/Trigger Date (current IP or next open IP).

Cleared: a) When Claim Basis of OCC is ‘Losses Occurring’, the system split premium related bookings according to the PA% and according to number of days of the source business’ Insured Period which are within the Insured Period of the OCC, divided by the total number of days in the source business’ Insured Period.

b) When Claim Basis of OCC is not defined, the system is booking the premium/claim bookings according to the PA% of the source business Insured Period.

Relevant when: Running the Retrocession Calculation Order you need to book Portfolio Withdrawal/Entry representing the source business premium amount which are beyond the Insured Period of the OCC and when you need the claim bookings to be booked according to the Date of Loss/Claims Trigger Date.
Book Estimates on Intra Group Contracts Selected: The As Booking estimation figures produced by the Retrocession Estimation Calculation Order on a proportional treaty retrocessionaire participation or the estimate/accrual bookings produced by the Multi GAAP Retrocession Order on a proportional/non-proportional treaty retrocessionaire participation are transferred to linked Assumed Business in an Intra Group arrangement.

Cleared: The As Booking estimation figures produced by the Retrocession Estimation Calculation Order on a proportional treaty retrocessionaire participation or the estimate/accrual bookings produced by the Multi GAAP Retrocession Order on a proportional/nonproportional treaty retrocessionaire participation are NOT transferred to linked Assumed Business in an Intra Group arrangement.

Relevant when: Since it is not possible to include estimate figures in the Retrocession Account Order and since it is the bookings created by the Retrocession Account Order that are transferred to the linked Assumed Business in an Intra Group arrangement, you must activate this parameter if you also want estimate figures created by the Retrocession Estimation Calculation Order on a proportional treaty retrocessionaire participation or the estimate/accrual bookings produced by the Multi GAAP Retrocession Order on a proportional/non-proportional treaty retrocessionaire participation to be transferred to linked Assumed Business in an Intra Group arrangement.
Automatic Detail Pairing of ORP Deposits Selected: A detail pairing between the Deposit Retained in a previous Account and a Deposit Released in current Account is automatically created. The detail pairing is created for the Retrocession Participations when closing the Worksheet created by a Retrocession Calculation order and when closing the Worksheet of the corresponding Retrocession Account order. The Release Indicator will be set to ‘Released’ for the details included in the pairing. (No detail pairing will be created if Retained/Released detail amounts are not equal due to different exchange rate used when converting figures to Account Currency).

Note! A detail pairing should be manually created between all existing Deposit Retained/Released details before activating this system parameter. (If not, an additional debet/credit Deposit Release detail will be created to automatically settle existing details).

Cleared: No detail pairing between the Deposit Released detail and the Deposit Retained detail is created when running the Retrocession Calculation order and the Retrocession Account order. (Detail pairing can be manually created from the Business Ledger of the Retrocessionaire Participation).

Relevant when: You have run the Retrocession Calculation Order/the Retrocession Account Order and you want the system to create a detail pairing between the Deposit Retained and the Deposit Released made on the ORP Business Ledger.

Applicable for: P&C, Cede
Convert ORP Deposit Retained/Released with same Exch. Rate Selected: The Deposit Released amount in Booking Currency is converted to Account Currency with the same Exchange Rate as used when converted the corresponding Deposit Retained amount in a previous Account.

Cleared: The Deposit Released amount in Booking Currency is converted to Account Currency using the Exchange Rate option defined on the Retrocession Account Order.

Relevant when: Proportional Treaty Retrocession Accounting when Account Currency is different from Booking Currency. Select this system parameter if you want to convert the Deposit Released amount from Booking Currency to Account Currency using the same Exchange Rate as used when converted the corresponding Deposit Retained amount in a previous Account. The corresponding Deposit Retained amount is found through the Retro Detail Pairing and the Detail Pairing between Deposit Retained/Released.

When this system parameter is selected, booking details with Entry Codes within the following calculations (refer to system parameter Accounting/Entry Codes - Accounting Function ‘Retrocession Accounting Proportional Treaty’) are converted according to above rules; ‘Premium Deposit Released’, ‘Non Cash Premium Deposit Released’, ‘Loss Deposit Released’ and ‘Non Cash Loss Deposit Released’.

This system parameter is dependent on the system parameter ‘Automatic Detail Pairing of ORP Deposits’ being active.

Applicable for: P&C, Cede
FC Deposit Released equal FC Deposit Retained Selected: The Functional Currency of the Deposit Released amount in Account Currency is set equal to Functional Currency of the corresponding Deposit Retained amount booked in a previous Account.

Cleared: The Functional Currency of the Deposit Released amount in Account Currency is set equal to Functional Currency of the Deposit Released amount in Booking Currency.

Relevant when: Select this system parameter if you want that the Functional Currency of the Deposit Released amount in Account Currency is set equal to Functional Currency of the corresponding Deposit Retained amount booked in a previous Account. The corresponding Deposit Retained amount is found through the Retro Detail Pairing and the Detail Pairing between Deposit Retained/Released.

When this system parameter is selected, booking details with Entry Codes within the following calculations (refer to system parameter Accounting/Entry Codes - Accounting Function ‘Retrocession Accounting Proportional Treaty’) are converted according to above rules; ‘Premium Deposit Released’, ‘Non Cash Premium Deposit Released’, ‘Loss Deposit Released’ and ‘Non Cash Loss Deposit Released’.

This system parameter is dependent on the system parameter ‘Convert ORP Deposit Retained/Released with same Exch. Rate’ being active.

Applicable for: P&C, Cede
Additional Premium added to the Deposit Conditions on Outward Cedent Contracts Selected: An Additional Premium tab is displayed in the Deposit Conditions on Outward Cedent’s Contracts. The tab is similar to the Premium tab. It is for information only, except if the flag Special Interest and Tax is selected in the Insured Period tab of an Outward Cedent’s Contract.

Cleared: The Additional Premium is not shown in Deposit Conditions.

Relevant when: Select this if you want to show the Additional Premium tab in Deposit Conditions, either for informational purposes, or if you want to apply a special handling of deposits, interest and taxes on some of your Outward Cedent’s Contracts .

Applicable for: P&C, Cede

Life Miscellaneous #

Retrocession_Life_Miscellaneous.PNG

Field Description
Manual Bookings on Prop. RP Unsettled and in Acct. Currency Selected: Manual bookings made on a Retrocessionaire’s Participation of a Proportional OCC are shown on the Business Ledger both ‘As Booking’ and ‘As Account’. For liquid bookings, the Settlement Indicator is set to Unsettled, and the balances are shown on the Business Partner Ledger.

Cleared: Manual bookings made on a Retrocessionaire’s Participation of a Proportional OCC are shown on the Business Ledger ‘As Booking’ only. The balances are Settled and are not shown on the Business Partner Ledger.

Relevant when: You want that manual bookings on a proportional Retrocessionaire’s Participation are unsettled and shown on the Business Partner Ledger without having to run the Retrocession Account Order.

Applicable for: P&C, Life

Non Prop Retrocession #

SystemParameters_Acc_NonPropAccounting.png

Field Description
Split Recoveries Proportionally on Accounting Classifications Selected: Recoveries calculated automatically by the Recovery Calculation order, are proportionally split by using the accounting classification of the assumed claims. When running the Recovery Calculation order, the system identifies the From Ground Up loss to the layer, and finds the Accounting Classification split of the assumed claim details. Using this proportional split, the system calculates each Accounting Classification’s share of the recoveries, and books it to the Outward Cedent’s Contract (OCC).

This parameter applies to recovery calculations for Non-Proportional OCC- and RP Treaty business, and cannot be activated if Split Recoveries Proportionally on Original Responsible Partner or Split Recoveries Proportionally on Source Business is activated.

Cleared: The System splits the Accounting Classification according to the first come first served principles.

Relevant when: You should select this parameter when you want the recoveries to be booked on Accounting Classifications proportionally according to the Assumed Claims.

Applicable for: P&C, Cede
Distribution of Recovery Reserves Based on Incurred Figures Selected: Paid Recoveries will be allocated first. The Recovery Reserves are allocated according to the Incurred amount to the layer using the Date of Loss order. The Recovery Reserve amount is calculated as the Incurred Loss to the layer less Paid Loss to layer. If the Incurred amount is less than the Paid amount to layer, it will result in a negative reserve.

The parameter applies to for Outward Non-Proportional protections (Facultative and Treaty).

Cleared: Calculation of Recoveries for both Claim Sequences and all Claim Basis is done by allocating Paid recoveries first, and thereafter adding the Recovery Reserves “on top” of the allocated paid figures.

Relevant when: You should select this parameter when you want the Recovery Reserves to be allocated according to the Incurred amount to the layer using the Date of Loss order.

Applicable for: P&C, Cede
Recovery Calculation for Multi Currency Protections Based on Incurred Currency Split Selected: The Recoveries are allocated to the limit currencies in the same proportion as they bear to the total From Ground Up (FGU) loss. Paid Recoveries are split into currencies according to the currency split of paid FGU loss. The currency split of Recovery Reserves is calculated as the currency split of Recovery Incurred (using the currency split of the Incurred FGU loss) less currency split of Recovery Paid (using the currency split of paid FGU loss).

The parameter applies to Outward Non-Proportional Protections (Facultative and Treaty).

Cleared: The Recoveries are allocated to the limit currencies in the same proportion as they bear to the total FGU loss. Paid Recoveries are split into currencies according to the currency split of Paid FGU loss. Recovery Reserves are distributed “on the top”, using the currency split of the reserves FGU loss

Relevant when: You should select this parameter when you want the currency split of the Recovery Reserves to be calculated as difference between the currency split of Recovery Incurred and Recovery Paid.

Applicable for: P&C `
Recovery Calculation for Multi Currency Protections Based on Incurred Currency Split Selected: The Recoveries are allocated to the limit currencies in the same proportion as they bear to the total From Ground Up (FGU) loss. Paid Recoveries are split into currencies according to the currency split of paid FGU loss. The currency split of Recovery Reserves is calculated as the currency split of Recovery Incurred (using the currency split of the Incurred FGU loss) less currency split of Recovery Paid (using the currency split of paid FGU loss).

The parameter applies to Outward Non-Proportional Protections (Facultative and Treaty).

Cleared: The Recoveries are allocated to the limit currencies in the same proportion as they bear to the total FGU loss. Paid Recoveries are split into currencies according to the currency split of Paid FGU loss. Recovery Reserves are distributed “on the top”, using the currency split of the reserves FGU loss

Relevant when: You should select this parameter when you want the currency split of the Recovery Reserves to be calculated as difference between the currency split of Recovery Incurred and Recovery Paid.

Applicable for: P&C `
Claim Creation Limit% Selected: You can enter a percentage in this field. When calculating Recoveries the system will include claims not yet affecting the protection if the Incurred claim exceeds the amount which corresponds to this percentage of the Excess Amount.
Include ACR in Recovery Calculation Selected: Additional Case Reserve (ACR) calculation is included for Non-Proportional Recovery calculation. When activated, ACR is calculated and booked at Outward Cedent’s Contract (OCC) and Retrocessionaire’s Participation (ORP) level. Recovery ACR is allocated in sequence after paid recoveries and reserve recoveries.

Cleared: Additional Case Reserve (ACR) is not considered in recovery calculation for Outward Non-Proportional Protections.

Relevant when: You should select this parameter when you want to include values of Additional Case Reserve (ACR) in Recovery Calculation for Outward Non-Proportional protections.

Applicable for: P&C, Cede
Stop Loss / Agg XL Recovery for Linked Assumed Business Selected: Menu options- Add OCC Stop Loss, Add OCC Aggregate XL, Add Prot Program Stop Loss & Add Prot Program Aggregate XL are made available on the Non Proportional Protection tab of the Assumed Business. Stop Loss / Aggregate XL Recovery Calculation considering these protection allocations are available to be run.

Cleared: Menu options for protection allocation of Stop Loss / Aggregate XL are not available on the Non Proportional Protection tab of the Assumed Business, and the related Stop Loss / Aggregate XL Recovery Calculation is unavailable for run. The regular Stop Loss / Aggregate XL Recovery Calculation without linked Assumed Business can be run.

Relevant when: Select this System Parameter when you want the possibility to select which Assumed Business sections to protect by a Stop Loss or Aggregate XL when running recoveries. Option to run Stop Loss / Aggregate XL considering Assumed Business protections are available for Protection Program and Single Outward Cedent’s Contracts.

Applicable for: P&C, Cede

Insured Based Protection #

System_Parameter_Accounting_Retrocession_InsuredBasedProtection.png

Field Description
Parallel Retrocession Selected: You are allowed to place (protect) a Proportional Assumed Business with more than 100%. This is performed from the Assumed Business’ Proportional- and Non-Proportional Protection Assignment buttons.
On the Insured Period tab of the Outward Cedent’s Contract (OCC) properties, the following fields become available:

Premium %: The booked premium amounts to be retroceded from the Assumed Business according to the retroceded percentages of the Protection Assignment will be multiplied with the percent entered (if any). The result will be transferred to the Preliminary (‘as Original’) Ledger of the OCC.

Cause of Loss: The Causes of Loss covered by the OCC are entered. When claim adjustments are booked on the Assumed Business (with transfer to ledger), the system checks against the Protection Assignment if the cause of loss on the claim matches one of the causes of loss covered by each OCC. Only the OCC’s covering this cause of loss will receive the claim booking on the Preliminary (‘as Original’) Ledger according to the Protection Assignment.
A warning will be given if claims on the Assumed Business are not established with a Cause of Loss.
On the Business tab of the OCC properties the following check box becomes available:
Ignore Technical Claims: When this check box is selected, bookings made on the Assumed Business’ Technical Worksheets with certain predefined Entry Code Subcategories will not be transferred to the Preliminary (‘as Original’) ledger of this protecting OCC.

Note: When these Entry Codes are used on Claim Worksheet for the same Assumed Business, the bookings find the correct protecting OCC according to Cause of Loss and transfer to the Preliminary Ledger of the OCC as usual.
This parameter applies to Proportional Assumed Business.

Cleared: The system will not allow that an OCC protects the same Assumed Business from two different Protection Program’s in parallel.

Relevant when: This Parameter enables the system to handle situations where the Assumed Business is retroceding to an Outward Cedent’s Contract (OCC) participating in two different Protection Programs in parallel. The reason for this would be that claims shall be covered according to cause of loss and the OCC in one Protection Program cover some causes of loss and the OCC in another Protection Program cover other causes of loss.

Applicable for: P&C
SOC (Scope of Cover) Classification for Insured Based Protection Selected: You select a Coverage Classification Type from the drop-down list. The selected classification determines the lowest SOC Classification level of Assumed Businesses extracted and displayed in the Insured Based Protection tab of the ‘Accumulation Control for Insured’ window. The Limit- and Premium amounts in this window are displayed per Classification, i.e. the classification defined by this System Parameter. (Refer to the Insured Based Protection chapter of the User’s Guide).
The parameter applies to Direct- and Facultative Assumed Businesses.

Cleared: All SOC Classification levels of the Assumed Businesses are extracted and displayed in the Insured Based Protection tab of the ‘Accumulation Control for Insured’ window.

Available: All Coverage Classification types defined in the system.

Relevant when: Insured Based Protection is in use and you want to define the lowest limit of SOC Classifications by which the Premium and Limits are displayed.

Applicable for: P&C
RU (Reporting Unit) Category for Insured Based Protection Selected: You select a Reporting Unit Category from the drop-down list. The selected Reporting Unit determines which Assumed Businesses extracted and displayed in the Insured Based Protection tab of the ‘Accumulation Control for Insured’ window. The Limit- and Premium amounts in this window are displayed per Reporting Unit value, i.e. values of the RU Category selected in the System Parameter. (Refer to the Insured Based Protection chapter of the User’s Guide).
The parameter applies to Direct- and Facultative Assumed Businesses.

Cleared: All RU Categories of the Assumed Businesses are extracted and displayed in the Insured Based Protection tab of the ‘Accumulation Control for Insured’ window

Available: RU Categories defined in the system

Relevant when: Insured Based Protection is in use and you want to filter the Assumed Business, for which the Premium and Limits are displayed, by a Reporting Unit Category.

Applicable for: P&C

Trace Options #

trace_option.png

Field Description
Trace Source Business from Outward Bookings Selected:
* A link is created between each outward booking and the source business’ insured period when running the Retrocession Calculation/Account orders. Information about the source business is transferred through all calculations to the OCC and RP business ledgers in booking- and account currencies of the source business.
* For SICS Life, this only applies to Quota Share Retrocession.This link is an additional link to the detail-to-detail link that is automatically created between the source detail and the outward detail.
* Enables establishing a link to the source business when booking manually on the outward business. Refer to Link Bookings on Outward Business to Insured Period from Protected Business in the P&C User’s Guide.
* Enables establishing a link to the source business through Automatic Premium Accounting for Non-Proportional Outward Cedent’s Contracts, provided an appropriate AC Split % for the combination of AC and inward business is defined in premium and limit conditions. Refer to Maintain AC Allocation when split into combinations of AC and parameters representing the source bookings in P&C User’s Guide.

When a link is established between an outward business and a source business, the identifiers of the linked source businesses are displayed in the Business Ledger of the outward business. A column called Source Business appears in the Business Ledger’s booking details display lists (booking details on the Account Balances, Cash Claims, Premiums Due Later, Deposits, Non-Liquid Deposits and Reserves tabs).

Activating the system parameter disables the business trace option Source Business.

(Refer to Add Business Information in the P&C User Guide).

Cleared: Only the automatically created detail-to-detail link is established. The source business identifier column is not displayed in the Outward Business Ledgers.

Relevant when: You select the parameter when you want to have information about the source business transferred to the OCC-and RP businesses ledgers by running the Retrocession Calculation -/Account orders, or by manually linking an outward booking to an insured period of a protected business. Some companies also want to link outward premium bookings to the assumed business where the premium originated from through the Automatic Premium Accounting for Non Prop OCC (P&C/CEDE).

The additional link created from selecting this parameter also supports Business Objects reporting. By selecting this parameter, you also activate the Source Business Identifier column on the Outward Business Ledgers, which allows you to view, extract and sort booking details per source business identifier.

Applicable for: P&C, Cede, Life
Exclude Policy Ceded when Trace Source Business Selected: The businesses with Level of Business ‘Policy Ceded’ are excluded from being traced (i.e. no link is created between the outward booking and the source business) when either the system parameter ‘Trace Source Business from Outward Business’ is active or the Trace Option ‘Source Business’ on the Outward Business is selected.

Cleared: The business with Level of Business ‘Policy Ceded’ are traced depending on the definition of system parameter ‘Trace Source Business from Outward Bookings’ or the Trace Option ‘Source Business’ on the Outward Business.

Relevant when: You select the parameter when you want to exclude businesses with Level of Business ‘Policy Ceded’ from being traced.

Applicable for: Cede
Mandatory Retro Bookings Detail Link Selected: This is available for selection only when the Trace Source Business from Outward Business is selected. When this is selected and a manual booking is made on an outward business or an installment is booked on an outward business, it is mandatory to link all the details on the technical worksheet with one or more inward business that is protected by the outward business in order to close or validate the technical worksheet The linked inward business will be displayed in the Business Ledger of the Outward Business in the Details tab and on the More Details Information of the details.

If a detail with link to a source business is copied from the outward business ledger the source business should NOT be copied. Only reversed details should keep the source business from the source details.

Cleared: The linking of inward businesses to the details on technical worksheets is not mandatory. If a detail with link to a source business is copied from the outward business ledger the source business should ALWAYS be copied, both copied and reversed details should keep the source business from the source details.

Applicable for: P&C, Life
Auto Link When Only One Protected Business Selected: This is available for selection only when the Mandatory Retro Booking Detail Link is selected.

When this is selected and a booking is made on an outward business/insured period protecting only one business, the system will automatically link the details to the protecting business/insured period in order to close or validate the technical worksheet.

The linked inward business will be displayed in the Business Ledger of the Outward Business in the Details tab and on the More Details Information of the details.

Cleared: No automatic linking of bookings made on an outward business protecting only one business is performed.

Relevant when: You select the parameter when you want the system to automatically link an outward booking detail to a protecting business/insured period when outward business protects only one inward business.

Applicable for: P&C, Cede, Life
Create Retro Link of Source Business Selected: This is available for selection only when the the Auto Link When Only One protected Business is selected. When selected, a column “Source Assumed Business” is available on ‘AB’ condition of the OCC.

Column:

1.It defines the source business to be selected and to be used by the system to link the detail for the Source Business IP in case of manual booking on the OCC or running MultiGAAP Retrocession order.

2.This column will have value ‘Yes’ or ‘No’. When the column is checked it will result in Display of ‘Yes’ and when it’s not then displays ‘No’. Only 1 IAB-IP is possible to select as ‘YES’.

3.The column will have ‘No’ as default.

Worksheet:

1.The above value of ‘Yes’ against a IAB is to automate the update of the source business in worksheet for all details in 1 go. All the details in the worksheet will have the value of the ‘Source Business’ as default as defined in the AB condition(‘Yes’).

2. However, user can still manually change the detail of the ‘Source Business’ in the worksheet to assure errors can be manually corrected if happen.

3.The above-mentioned new functionality will let the system to update the detail for the source business in the worksheet irrespective of its origin- Manual and Automatic (only in case of MG order)

Cleared: The New column ‘Source Assumed Business’ will not be available in the AB condition of OCC.

Applicable for: P&C, Life
Trace Claim from Outward Bookings Selected: A link is created between each Outward Booking and a claim on the source business when running the Retrocession Calculation/Account orders. Information about the original claim is transferred through all calculations to the OCC and RP business ledgers in Booking- and Account currencies. A corresponding link is also created if the source Claim is booked directly as an OCC Claim. This link is an additional link to the detail-to-detail link that is automatically created between the inward detail and the outward detail. Activating the system parameter disables the business Trace open Claim’. Refer to Add Business Information in the P&C User Guide.

Cleared: Only the automatically created detail-to-detail link is established. Information about the original claim is not transferred through all calculations to the OCC- and RP business ledges by running the retrocession calculation/account orders.

Relevant when: You select the parameter when you want to have information about the original claim transferred through to the OCC-and RP businesses ledgers by running the Retrocession Calculation -/Account orders or by manually linking a claim. from the source business to the outward booking.

Applicable for: P&C, Life

(It is recommended to leave this Parameter cleared for SICS Life)
Trace Headline Loss from Outward Bookings Selected: A link is created between each outward booking and the headline loss assignment of a claim on the source business when running the Retrocession Calculation/ Account orders. Information about the original headline loss is transferred through all calculations to the OCC- and RP business ledgers in Booking- and Account currencies. This link is an additional link to the detail-to-detail link that is automatically created between the inward detail and the outward detail.

Activating the system parameter disables the business trace option: Headline Loss. (Refer to Add Business Information in the User Guide).

Cleared: Only the automatically created detail-to-detail link is established. Information about the original headline loss is not transferred through all calculations to the OCC- and RP business ledgers by running the retrocession calculation/account orders.

Relevant when: You select the parameter when you want to have information about the original headline loss transferred through to the OCC-and RP businesses ledgers by running the Retrocession Calculation -/Account orders.

Applicable for: P&C
Trace Base Company from Outward Bookings Selected:
* A link is created between each outward booking and a base company of the source business’ insured period when running the Retrocession Calculation/ Account orders. Information about the base company is transferred through all calculations to the OCC and RP business ledgers in booking- and account currencies. The link is an additional link to the detail-to-detail link that is automatically created between the source detail and the outward detail.
* Enables establishing a link to the base company when booking manually on the outward business. Refer to the Link Base Company in the P&C User’s Guide for more details.
* Enables establishing a link to the base company through Automatic Premium Accounting for Non-Proportional Outward Cedent’s Contracts, provided an appropriate AC Split % for the combination of AC and inward business is defined in premium and limit conditions. Refer to Maintain AC Allocation when split into combinations of AC and parameters representing the source bookings in the P&C User’s Guide for more details.

When such link is established, the name of the linked base company is displayed for the ledger details in the Original Base Company column of the OCC and RP Business Ledgers and in the Detail Properties, More Information tab, accessed from the Business Ledger of the outward business.

Activating the system parameter disables the business trace option Base Company. (Refer to Add Business Information in the P&C User Guide).

Cleared: Only the automatically created detail-to-detail link is established. The name of the base company is not displayed in the Detail Properties, More Information tab.

Relevant when: You select the parameter when you want to have information about the original base company transferred to the OCC- and RP business ledgers by running the Retrocession Calculation - /Account orders, or by manually linking an outward booking to a base company of the source business’ insured period. Some companies also want to link outward premium bookings to the base company from which the premium originated, through Automatic Premium Accounting for Non-Prop OCC.

Applicable for: P&C, Cede
Trace Original Responsible Partner from Outward Bookings Selected:
Enables creation of a link between the outward booking and the original responsible partner of the source business for:
* Preliminary Bookings and Retrocession Calculation/Account orders. Information about the original responsible partner is transferred through all calculations to the OCC and RP business ledgers in booking- and account currencies
* Automatic Premium Accounting for Non-Prop OCC provided an appropriate combined AC Split % for the combination of AC and original responsible partner is defined in the premium and limit conditions. Refer to the Maintain AC Allocation when split into combinations of AC and parameters representing the source bookings in the P&C User’s Guide.
* Manual booking of Technical Worksheet on outward business

When such link is established, the name of the linked partner is displayed for the ledger details in the Original Responsible Partner column of the OCC and RP Business Ledgers and the name and id can be inspected in the Detail Properties, More Information tab accessed from the Business Ledger of the outward business.

Selecting this system parameter disables the business trace option Original Responsible Partner. Refer to Add Business Information in the P&C User Guide.

Cleared: Link to Original Responsible Partner is not enabled in general neither for bookings made by the system nor manually.

Relevant when: Some companies want information about the original responsible partner transferred to the OCC- and RP business ledgers by running the Retrocession Calculation - /Account orders or by manually linking an outward booking to an original responsible partner.

Some companies also also want to link outward premium bookings to the original responsible partner where the premium originated from through Automatic Premium Accounting for Non-Prop OCC.

Applicable for: P&C, Cede, Life
Trace Cession from Outward Bookings Selected: A link is created between each Outward Booking and a cession of the assumed business. This link is an additional link to the detail-to-detail link that is automatically created between the inward detail and the outward detail.

Cleared: Only the automatically created detail-to-detail link is established.

Relevant when: You want the additional link between the Outward Booking and the Assumed Business’ Cession, e.g. to support Business Objects reporting.

Applicable for: P&C

Reserve Calculations #

The parameter settings of the Reserve Calculations tab affect the Automatic Reserve Calculation functions in SICS.

To open the Reserve Calculations tab:

  1. Double-click the System Administrators folder on the SICS Workstation desktop.
  2. Double-click the System Parameter Maintenance icon. you see the System Parameters window.
  3. Click the arrow in front of Accounting and then the arrow in front of the Reserve Calculation.

The following Automatic Reserve Calculations are linked to the parameters in the

Reserve Calculation tabs:

  • Balance Reserves
  • Financial Claims Reserves
  • Original/Financial Premium Reserves
  • Unearned Premium Reserves General subtab

RESERVE_CALCULATION_GENERAL_TAB.png

Field Description
Earliest Booking Year and Period for Reserves Selected: The Booking Year and Period defined in these fields determine the earliest period from when the data for Balance Reserve calculation are selected. The Booking Year and Period range for calculation is further defined in the Balance Reserve order. In the order you are not allowed to define a Booking Year and Period earlier than the one defined in this parameter. (Refer to the Balance Reserve order chapter of the User’s Guide for further information).
The functionality applies for Administrative- and Assumed Business.

Cleared: All Open Booking Year and Periods are available for selection in the Booking Year and Period Range From field in the Balance Reserve order. (For information about Open Booking Year and Periods, refer to the Booking Terms in the Accounting/Terms chapter in the System Administrator’s Guide.)

Relevant when: Define a Year and/or Period if you want to determine the earliest period from when Technical Balances can be included in the calculation of Balance Reserves in future Balance Reserve orders.
% to apply to Original Loss Reserve Selected: A percentage limited up to 200% can be defined. The percentage is displayed in the Calculation Rule field in the Financial Claim Reserves order and cannot be overwritten. (For information about Financial Claim Reserve order, refer to the Financial Claim Reserves chapter in the User’s Guide).
The functionality applies for Administrative- and Assumed Business.

Cleared: No percentage (or 0,00%) is defined. No Financial Claim Reserves are calculated by the Financial Claim Reserve order, as the percentage is part of the Calculation rule.

Relevant when: Define a percent when you want to use the Financial Claim Reserve functionality in SICS. The Financial Claim Reserve calculation and bookings are relevant when your company wants to calculate and book Loss Reserve on Insured Periods where no Original Loss Reserves have been booked already.

Applicable for: P&C
Default Financial Premium Calculation Method Selected: One of the following values is always selected:
* Calculate and Book Difference to Original Premium Reserve
* Calculate Independent of Original Premium Reserve
* Exclude Businesses with Original Premium Reserve

The selected value defines which relation the Financial Premium Reserve should have to any previously booked Original Premium Reserve on the same business. The selected value is defaulted as Calculation Method in the Financial Premium Reserve order, but can be changed in the individual order. (For further information about the Financial Premium Reserve order, see the Automatic Premium Reserve Accounting/Financial Premium Reserve chapter in the User’s Guide.)
The Financial Premium Reserve calculation applies to Administrative- and Assumed Businesses.

Cleared: Not relevant as a value is always selected. However, the value selected in the field does not apply to any other parts of SICS than the Financial Premium Reserve order.

Relevant when: Due to legal reasons some Reinsurers have to provide Premium Reserves on all Proportional Assumed Businesses with certain classes of business in their balance sheets, even if there are no Original Premium Reserve on the businesses. You should select the appropriate method and run the Financial Premium Reserve order to calculate and book these reserves.

Applicable for: P&C
Create Internal Premium Reserve Condition with defaults Selected: When a new facultative business is created, the following values are defaulted in the Internal Premium Reserve Conditions window:

Original Premium Reserve: System Calculated
Calculate Original Deduction Reserve using Commission Percentage Selected: The Original Deduction Reserve (ODR) is calculated even when Premium and Commission are not present as calculation basis. In that case one of the following values are used calculating the ODR:
* Commission percent value defined in the Commission field of the Deduction Conditions
* Provisional Commission percent value in case of Sliding Scale Commission, also defined as Deduction Conditions

The functionality applies for Outward Proportional Treaty business and calculation is performed running the Retrocession Calculation order, Retrocession Calculation Group order or the Retrocession Estimation Calculation order. (For further information about the calculation formula and the orders, see the Retrocession chapters in the User’s Guide.) If the system finds, running the Calculation order, that Premium and Commission bookings are present, it calculates using these bookings and not the Deduction Condition percent even though the parameter is selected.

Cleared: Bookings of Premium and Commission have to be present in order to calculate Original Deduction Reserve.

Relevant when: You should select the parameter if you want to make sure that the Original Deduction Reserve is always calculated.

Applicable for: P&C
Accounting Period- and Year defined in OPR Order Selected: Gives user opportunity to select Accounting Reference Period in the Original Premium Reserve Order

Cleared: Drop-down for selection of Accounting Reference Period is hidden for Original Premium Reserve Order

Relevant when: If one want to define in the order what should be the Accounting Reference period for calculated and booked Original premium Reserves. If one for example runs this order every quarter one can select e.g. 1 of 4, 2 of 4 etc in the order to give a reference to the OPR bookings to see which quarter they belongs to. This might also be useful when looking at Online Statistics of a Business to see the reserve per Accounting Period.

Applicable for: P&C
Default OPR Percent Over Extended Accounting Period Selected: When this parameter is selected the user will get the parameter ‘Calculate OPR % Over Extended Accounting Period’ selected as default in creation of an Original Premium Reserve Order.

Cleared: Create an Original Premium Reserve Order and ‘Calculate OPR % Over Extended Accounting Period’ is cleared as default.

Relevant when: When Original Premium Reserves shall be calculated by the order it is two different methods, refer to the User Guide. Dependent of which method that is preferred you should decide what default value that is relevant for your company.

Applicable for: P&C
Update UPR Calculation Information table Selected: When the UPR Order is run, the table UPR_CALC_INFO is populated with information on how each UPR detail is calculated. See table description below

Cleared: No information is populated to the UPR_CALC_INFO table.

Relevant When: You want to be able to check the calculations made by the UPR Order. The information in this table is useful when UPR Order is run with option Use Earning Method from System Parameters selected, and/or IR condition is defined with Calculation Options Linear Over Selected Period or Earning Based On Pattern. Some information is populated also for other Calculation Options, but with limited value.

Applicable for: P&C, Cede
Calculate outward UPR on own bookings only Selected: The following applies when running the UPR Order on outward businesses:
* When the UPR Order is run on a Proportional OCC, UPR is calculated and booked on the As Original Ledger Order. Only basis premium and existing UPR bookings with Origin of Worksheet different from REACPREL, REACTEMP, REACPCOR and REACACCT are considered in the calculation
* When the UPR Order is run on a Proportional ORP, only basis premium and existing UPR bookings with Origin of Worksheet different from REACPREL, REACTEMP, REACPCOR and REACACCT are considered in the calculation
* The UPR Order cannot be run on Non Proportional OCCs

Cleared: On Proportional outward business, the UPR Order is calculated on the As Booking ledger, considering all relevant basis premium bookings and all existing UPR bookings. The UPR Order can also be run both on Non Proportional OCC and ORP.Relevant when: You want the UPR Order to calculate UPR based on premiums being made directly on each outward business. Meaning you do not want the UPR to consider premium coming from other businesses, e.g. As Original bookings coming from assumed businesses or ORP bookings coming from the linked OCC.

Applicable for: P&C, Cede
Warning if no Portfolio Earning Curve is defined Selected: A warning is given when you create the Portfolio Condition if no Portfolio Earning Curve is defined in the Internal Premium Reserve Condition.

Cleared: No warning for missing Portfolio Earning Curve is given when creating the Portfolio Condition.

Relevant when: You want to make sure a Portfolio Earning Curve is always defined when you have Portfolio Conditions.

Applicable for: P&C

Table description: UPR_CALC_INFO. Related to parameter Update UPR Calculation Information table (see above)

Field Data type Description
OBJECT_ID Text Object Id
OVERR_SYS_PAR Boolean When the Order is run with option “Use Earning Method from System Parameters” and the option “Override Earning Method in system Parameters” is selected in the IR condition on the Insured Period, this boolean is set to Yes. Otherwise it is set to No.
PERCENTAGE Number The percentage from the Earning Method used in the calculation. In case there is a percentage split defined for the Earning Method, one row is created for each split percentage.

Applicable to Linear and Pattern Earning Methods
USED_FACTOR Number When Value Type = Decimal, it shows the Factor value found in the used Pattern. When Value type = Fraction, it shows a Factor calculated as Dividend / Divisor

Applicable to Pattern Earning Methods
PER_FACTOR Number The unearned factor. Calculated as (EARNING_PER - EARNED_PER)/EARNED_PER.

Applicable to Linear Earning Methods
PER_OFFSET Number The Financial Year Offset Period defined in System Parameters - Base Company Specific Settings/Miscellaneous
DED_PERIOD Number The Deductible Period defined in the Earning Method.

Applicable to Linear Earning Methods
USED_PERIOD Number The period from which the pattern value is taken.

Applicable to Pattern Earning Methods
EARNING_PERIOD Number Earning Period defined on the Earning Method.

Applicable to Linear Earning Methods.
EARNED_PERIOD Number Number of periods earned. Calculated as the As Of Date Month on the Order (+/- PER_OFFSET), less Deductible Period, less Booking month of the source premium.

Applicable to Linear Earning Methods
NUM_EXTENDED Number Number of Months Extended, defined in IR conditions.

Applicable to Calculation Options Linear Over Extended Accounting Period and Parabola Over Extended Accounting Period.
DIVIDEND Number The Numerator used in the calculation.

Applicable to Pattern Earning Methods with Value Type = Fraction
DIVISOR Number The Denominator used in the calculation.

Applicable to Pattern Earning Methods with Value Type = Fraction
FSK_EARN_METH Number Reference Type (Code) where the Earning Methods are defined. Will always be 83
FSK_EARN_METH_SRC Number Reference Type (Code) where the source of the Earning Methods are defined. Will be 83, when populated

Applicable to Linear and Pattern Earning Methods
FSK_VAL_TYPE Number Reference Type (Code) where the Value Types are defined. Will be 1202, when populated

Applicable to Pattern Earning Methods
FSK_PER_TYPE Number Reference Type (Code) where the Period Types are defined. Will always be 69, when populated

Applicable to Pattern Earning Methods
FSK_EARN_PER_BAS Number Reference Type (Code) where the Earning Period Bases are defined. Will be 69, when populated.

Applicable to Linear Earning Methods
FSK_EARN_PTYP Number Reference Type (Code) where the Earning Period Types are defined. Will be 1203, when populated.

Applicable to Linear Earning Methods.
FSK_CALC_OPTN Number Reference Type (Code) where the Calculation Options are defined. Will always be 250
IR_COND_ID Text Object Id of related Internal Premium Reserve Condition, from table BUS_INT_PREM_RES.
RES_COND_ID Text Object Id of related Reserve Condition, from table BUS_RESERVE_COND.
EARN_METH_ID Text Object id of related Earning Method, from table AC_EARN_M.

Applicable to Linear and Pattern Earning Methods
EM_SPLIT_ID Text Object Id of related Earning Method Split, from table AC_EARN_M_SPL.

Applicable to Linear and Pattern Earning Methods
PATTERN_ID Text Object Id of related Unearned Pattern, from table AC_UNEAR_P.

Applicable to Pattern Earning Methods
PATTERN_VAL_ID Text Object Id of related Unearned Pattern Value, from table AC_UNEAR_P_VAL.

Applicable to Pattern Earning Methods
METHOD_NAME Text Name of the Earning Method used in the calculation.

Applicable to Linear and Pattern Earning Methods, when taken from system parameters
PATTERN_NAME Text Name of the Pattern used in the calculation.

Applicable to Pattern Earning Methods
FK_DETAIL Text Foreign key to AC_LEDGER_DETAIL, to each UPR detail created by the Order
FK_SRC_DETAIL Text Foreign key to AC_LEDGER_DETAIL, to the premium detail being the source of the calculated UPR detail. If multiple source details have created one UPR detail, there is one record in the table for each source detail.
FK_ACCT_ORDER Text Foreign key to ACCOUNTING_ORDER, to the Accounting Order that has created the UPR detail.
FK_BASIS_ECG Text Foreign key to ENTRY_CODE_GROUP. Entry Code Group defined in Entry Code Usage in system parameters, being the basis for the UPR calculation
FRK_EARN_METH Text Earning Method (Code) found in Reference Tables with Reference Type Code 83. Shows one of the following values:
1) Shows LINEAR if the Earning Method used in the calculation is found a) in the IR Conditions, and the Calculation Option is Linear Over Selected Period, or b) in the system parameters and the Earning Method is Linear.
2) Shows PATMET, when the Earning Method for the calculation is found a) in the IR Conditions and the Calculation Option is Earning Based On Patter, or b) in the system parameters and the Earning Method type is Pattern.
3) Shows OTHER, for all other Calculation Options
FRK_EARN_METH_SRC Text Earning Method Source (Code) found in Reference Table with Reference Type Code 83. Shows SYSPARDEF if Earning Method is found in System Parameters, otherwise it shows IRCONDDEF.

Applicable to Linear and Pattern Earning Methods
FRK_VAL_TYPE Text Pattern Value Type (Code) from the pattern used in the calculation. Found in Reference Tables with Reference Type Code 1202.

Applicable to Pattern Earning Methods
FRK_PER_TYPE Text Earning Period Type (code) from the used Pattern. Taken from Reference Type Code 69. Can be MLY (Monthly) or YLY (Yearly)

Applicable to Pattern Earning Methods
FRK_EARN_PER_BAS Text Earning Period Basis (Code) taken from Reference Type Code 69.

Applicable to Linear Earning Methods
FRK_EARN_PTYP Text Earning Period Type (code) taken from Reference Type Code 1203.

Applicable to Linear Earning Methods
FRK_CACL_OPTN Text Calculation Option (Code) defined in IR condition on the business. Taken From Reference Type Code 250.

Portfolio Earning Curve sub tab

System_Parameter_Accounting_ReserveCalculation_PortfolioEarningCurve.png

Field Description
Default Portfolio Earning Curve Relevant when: The Portfolio Earning curve has various default values defined as percentages. These percentage values are used as default values on the internal premium reserve conditions when these are created. The values on the internal premium reserve conditions can be overwritten on the business and will be used further in the calculation of unearned premium portfolio amounts in the unearned premium reserve order.

Applicable for: P&C

Unearned Premium Reserve sub tab #

System_Parameter_Accounting_ReserveCalculation_UnearnedPremiumReserve.png

Unearned Premium can be calculated by the Unearned Premium Reserve Order. This Order can use specific Earning Methods defined in the System Parameters. The Earning Methods can be Linear or based on Unearned Patterns. Unearned Patterns to be used in pattern based Earning Methods must be defined separately and referred to in the Earning Method. Each Earning Method must be defined with a set of criteria and classifications to determine which premium bookings the method is applicable for.

Each Earning Method can be defined with a split so that Unearned Premium for part of the premium is calculated with e.g. one Earning Period and another part is calculated with another Earning Period. E.g. you can define that 50% of the premium should be earned over 12 months and 50% over 24 months. Alternatively, you can define that 80% of the premium should be earned using one Unearned Pattern and 20% using a different Unearned Pattern.

In Pattern based Earning Methods, you can also refer to different patterns for different valid periods within the same Earning Method.

For the actual formulas used in the calculation, refer to Unearned Premium Reserve Order chapter in the P&C User Guide.

Define Unearned Patterns #

CREATE_UNEARNED_PATTERNS_new.png

  1. Right mouse click in the Unearned Pattern container and select Create from the menu
  2. Give the Unearned Pattern a name
  3. Select Period Type. Available values are Monthly and Yearly
  4. Select Value Type. Available values are Decimal and Fraction
  5. Enter required number of periods in the Add Periods field and press the Add Periods button. Alternatively you can right click in the container and select Add Value from the menu to add one period.
  6. Enter Factor values (for value Type = Decimal) or Numerator and Denominator values (for Value Type = Fraction) for all periods
  7. Press OK to save

Define Linear Earning Method #

DEFINE_LINEAR_EARNING_METHOD_new.png

  1. Right mouse click in the Earning Method container and select Create Linear from the menu
  2. Give the Earning Method a name
  3. Enter Booking Year/Periods, Valid Dates and Classifications to specify which premium entries the Earning Method is applicable for. See Field Description below for further information on the different criteria
  4. Right click in the Classifications container and select Add from the menu if additional Classification Types are required, and select one or multiple values for the selected Classification Type(s)
  5. Select Earning Period Type and Earning Period Basis.
  6. Right click in the Splits container and select Add from the menu. Enter one or several lines with Deductible Period(s) and Earning Period(s) which should be used in the calculation. The total for all lines must add up to 100%
  7. Press OK to save the Earning Method

Define Pattern based Earning Method #

define_pattern_based_earning_new.png

  1. Right mouse click in the Earning Method container and select Create Pattern from the menu
  2. Give the Earning Method a name
  3. Enter Booking Year/Periods, Valid Dates and Classifications to define which premium entries the Earning Method is applicable for. See Field Description below for further information on the different criteria
  4. Right click in the Classifications container and select Add from the menu if additional Classification Types are required, and select one or multiple values for the selected Classification Type(s)
  5. Right click in the Splits container and select Add from the menu. Enter one or several lines with Unearned Patterns to be used in the calculation, and a Valid Date From - To for each. You can select separate patterns for different Valid Date ranges within the main Valid Date range for the Earning Method. The total percentage for each Valid Date range must be 100.
  6. Press OK to save the Earning Method

Field description: Unearned Premium Reserve - Earning Methods

Field Description
Earning Method Name The name of the Earning Method

Values: String, max 30 characters

Functional Impact: None

Relevant for: Earning Methods of type Linear and Pattern

Mandatory: Yes
Booking Year/Period From The first Booking Year/Period the Earning Method is applicable to

Values: Booking Year and Booking Period

Functional Impact: Validated against the Booking Year/Period (Local) on the premium entry. The Earning Method is applicable to premium entries with Booking Year/Period equal to or higher than the specified period.

Relevant for: Earning Methods of type Linear and Pattern

Mandatory: Yes
Booking Year/Period To The last Booking Year/Period the Earning Method is applicable to

Values: Booking Year and Booking Period

Functional Impact: Validated against the Booking Year/Period (Local) on the premium entry. The Earning Method is applicable to premium entries with Booking Year/Period equal to or less than the specified period.

Relevant for: Earning Methods of type Linear and Pattern

Mandatory: Yes
Valid Date From The first Insured Period From Date the Earning Method is applicable to

Values: Date

Functional Impact: Validated against the Insured Period From Date. The Earning Method is applicable to premium entries on Insured Periods with an Insured Period From Date equal to or later than the specified date.

Relevant for: Earning Methods of type Linear and Pattern

Mandatory: Yes
Valid Date To The last Insured Period From Date the Earning Method is applicable to

Values: Date

Functional Impact: Validated against the Insured Period From Date. The Earning Method is applicable to premium entries on Insured Periods with an Insured Period From Date equal to or prior to the specified date.

Relevant for: Earning Methods of type Linear and Pattern

Mandatory: Yes
To be used in IR Conditions only Values: Selected or Cleared

Selected: The Earning Method is not validated for overlaps with other Earning Methods. When the Unearned Premium Reserve Order is run with option Use Earning Method from System Parameters selected, this Earning Method will not be considered. However, the Earning Method is used if selected in Internal Premium Reserve Conditions.

Cleared: The Earning Method is validated for overlap with other Earning Methods. The Earning Method is considered when Unearned Premium Reserve Order is run with option Use Earning Method from System Parameters.

Relevant for: Earning Methods of type Pattern. Relevant if you want to set up some Earning Methods which are only to be used when selected in Internal Premium Reserve Conditions.
Classification/Base Company The Base Company the Earning Method is applicable to

Values: One or multiple Business Partners defined as Base Company

Functional Impact: Validated against the Base Company on the Insured Period. The Earning Method is applicable to premium entries on Insured Periods with a Base Company equal to one of the selected Base Companies.

Relevant for: Earning Methods of type Linear and Pattern

Mandatory: Yes
Classification/Type of Business The Type of Business the Earning Method is applicable to

Values: One or multiple Types of Business

Functional Impact: Validated against the Type of Business on the Insured Period. The Earning Method is applicable to premium entries on Insured Periods with a Type of Business equal to one of the selected Types of Business.

Relevant for: Earning Methods of type Linear and Pattern

Mandatory: Yes
Classification/Type of Participation The Type of Participation the Earning Method is applicable to

Values: One or multiple Types of Participation

Functional Impact: Validated against the Type of Participation on the Insured Period. The Earning Method is applicable to premium entries on Insured Periods with a Type of Participation equal to one of the selected Types of Participation.

Relevant for: Earning Methods of type Linear and Pattern

Mandatory: Yes
Classification/Main Class of Business The Main Class of Business the Earning Method is applicable to

Values: One or multiple Main Classes of Business

Functional Impact: Validated against the Main Class of Business on the Accounting Classification on the premium entry. The Earning Method is applicable to premium entries with a Main Class of Business equal to one of the selected Main Classes of Business.

Relevant for: Earning Methods of type Linear and Pattern

Mandatory: Yes
Classification/Class of Business The Class of Business the Earning Method is applicable to

Values: One or multiple Classes of Business

Functional Impact: Validated against the Class of Business on the Accounting Classification on the premium entry. The Earning Method is applicable to premium entries with a Class of Business equal to one of the selected Classes of Business.

Relevant for: Earning Methods of type Linear and Pattern

Mandatory: Yes
Classification/Sub Class of Business The Sub Class of Business the Earning Method is applicable to

Values: One or multiple Sub Classes of Business

Functional Impact: Validated against the Sub Class of Business on the Accounting Classification on the premium entry. The Earning Method is applicable to premium entries with a Sub Class of Business equal to one of the selected Sub Classes of Business.

Relevant for: Earning Methods of type Linear and Pattern

Mandatory: Yes
Classification/Claim Basis The Claim Basis the Earning Method is applicable to

Values: One or multiple Claim Bases

Functional Impact: Validated against the Claim Basis on the Insured Period. The Earning Method is applicable to premium entries on an Insured Period with a Claim Basis equal to one of the selected Claim Bases.

Relevant for: Earning Methods of type Linear and Pattern

Mandatory: Yes
Classification/Additional Classifications Any other Classification Type(s) the Earning Method is applicable to by selecting the option Add Type from the popup menu in the Classification list.

Values: One or multiple Classifications on the selected Classification Type

Functional Impact: Validated against the relevant Classification on the Accounting Classification on the premium entry. The Earning Method is applicable to premium entries with a Classification equal to one of the selected Classifications

Relevant for: Earning Methods of type Linear and Pattern

Mandatory: No
Earning Period Type The Type of Earning Period

Values: Fixed, Insured Period or Accounting Period

Functional Impact: Impacts which formula that is used in the Unearned Premium calculation.

Relevant for: Earning Methods of type Linear

Mandatory: Yes, for Linear Earning Methods
Earning Period Basis The Basis of the Earning Period

Values: Month(s) or Year(s)

Functional Impact: Impacts which formula that is used in the Unearned Premium calculation.

Relevant for: Earning Methods of type Linear with Earning Period Types Fixed and Insured Period

Mandatory: Yes, for Linear Earning Methods with Earning Period Types Fixed or Insured Period
Splits/Percentage The percentage of the premium to be calculated using this period or pattern

Values: A Percentage

Default: 100

Validation: Total percentage for the Earning Method must be 100

Functional Impact: Calculation of Unearned Premium

Relevant for: Earning Methods of type Linear and Pattern

Mandatory: Yes, for Linear Earning Methods with Earning Period Types Fixed and Insured Period
Splits/Deductible Period The Number of months or years before the premium earning will start

Values: Number

Default: 0

Functional Impact: Calculation of Unearned Premium

Relevant for: Earning Methods of type Linear with Earning Period Types Fixed or Insured Period

Mandatory: Yes, for Linear Earning Methods with Earning Period Types Fixed or Insured Period
Splits/Earning Period Number of months or years in the Earning Period

Values: Number

Default: 12

Functional Impact: Calculation of Unearned Premium

Relevant for: Earning Methods of type Linear with Earning Period Types Fixed or Insured Period

Mandatory: Yes, for Linear Earning Methods with Earning Period Types Fixed or Insured Period
Splits/Unearned Pattern The Unearned Pattern to be used

Values: Name of an Unearned Pattern

Functional Impact: Calculation of Unearned Premium

Relevant for: Earning Methods of type Pattern

Mandatory: Yes, for Earning Methods with type Pattern
Splits/Valid Date From The first Insured Period From Date the selected Pattern is applicable to

Values: Date

Default: The main Valid Date From on the Earning Method

Validation: Must be within the main Valid Date From - To range

Functional Impact: Validated against the Insured Period From Date. The selected Pattern is applicable to premium entries on Insured Period with an Insured Period From Date equal to or later than the specified date.

Relevant for: Earning Methods with type Pattern

Mandatory: Yes, for Earning Methods with type Pattern
Splits/Valid Date To The last Insured Period From date the selected Pattern is applicable to

Values: Date

Default: The main Valid Date To on the Earning Method

Validation: Must be within the main Valid Date From - To range

Functional Impact: Validated against the Insured Period From Date. The selected Pattern is applicable to premium entries on Insured Periods with an Insured Period From Date equal to or prior to the specified date.

Relevant for: Earning Methods with type Pattern

Mandatory: Yes, for Earning Methods with type Pattern

General Reserve Calculations #

When you as a reinsurer (base company) want to be able to calculate and book your own reserve, e.g. IBNR reserves, in addition to the cedent’s reserve, you define the percentages that apply in the General Reserve Calculations tab. The General Reserve is calculated per Business, per Underwriting Year, per Section, per Accounting Classification and per Original Currency.

  1. Select System Administrators from SICS Workstation Desktop
  2. Open System Parameter Maintenance
  3. Select the arrow in front of Accounting.
  4. Select the arrow in front of General Reserve Calculations.

System_Parameter_Accounting_GeneralReserveCalculations.png

Add Item to General Reserve Calculation Table #

You define the reserve percentages in a table. In the same table you define the level of detail on which each reserve percentage applies.

  1. Click Edit button from the Accounting tab
  2. Open the General Reserve Calculation tab
  3. Select Add Item from the pop menu. A line is added to the table with <None> as default value in text fields and zero in number fields.
  4. Select Main Class of Business from drop-down list_. Class of Business_, Type of Business, Type of Participation and Base Company can be selected from respective drop-down lists if applicable.
  5. Define a Development Year number and the Reserve percentage in the respective fields.
  6. Click OK in order to save the new input when you have added all the necessary items or applied your changes.

To populate the table, at least a Main Class of Business value has to be selected. The other fields are optional depending on the level of detail on which the reserve percentage applies.

Example:

Booking Year on the order = 1999, and reserve percentage are defined for Development Year 0 and 1. These will then be applied to Underwriting Year 1999 and 1998 respectively.

Running the General Reserve order, the system will first check whether there is a reserve percentage defined on the lowest level. If yes, it will apply the percentage on this detail level. If not, it will check the next higher detail level etc.

Reserve percentages are defined for:

  • Main Class of Business = Motor,
    Class of Business = Motor Liability

  • Main Class of Business = Motor,
    Class of Business = <None>

Then the system will:

  • Apply the percentage defined for 1.: All selected bookings with an Accounting Classification with Main Class of Business = Motor and Class of Business = Motor Liability
  • Apply the percentage defined for 2.: All selected items booked with an Accounting Classification with Main Class of Business = Motor and Class of Business different from Motor Liability.

(For further information, see the General Reserve order chapter in the User’s Guide.)

Delete Item from General Reserve Calculation table #

When a Reserve Calculation item is no longer valid or it has been added erroneously, you can remove it from the table.

  1. Click Edit button from the Accounting tab
  2. Open the General Reserve Calculation tab
  3. Place cursor on the line you want to remove
  4. Select Delete Item from the pop menu. The line is removed.
  5. Click OK in order to save your changes.

Field Descriptions - General Reserve Calculation tab #

Applicable for: P&C

Field Description
Main Class of Business: The major line of business covered by your agreements and for which your reserve percentage applies.
Values: The available values depend on set up made in the Reference Data Maintenance by a System Administrator, e.g. Property, Casualty, Marine, etc.

Mandatory: Yes
Class of Business: The general insurance classification covered by agreements and for which your reserve percentage applies.

Values: What you see depends on the selected Main Class of Business. If for example Property is selected as Main Class of Business, the Class of Business could be Fire Insurance, Business Interruption insurance, Robbery insurance, etc.

Mandatory: No
Type of Business: The type of underlying business covered by agreements and for which your reserve percentage applies.

Values: Proportional- and Non-proportional Direct, Proportional- and Non-proportional Facultative and Proportional- and Non-proportional Treaty

Mandatory: No
Type of Participation: The type of portfolio covered by agreements and for which your reserve percentage applies.

Values: What you see depends on the selected Type of Business. If for instance Proportional Treaty is selected as Type of Business, available Type of Participation values could be Surplus, Quota Share, Open Cover, etc

Mandatory: No
Base Company: The Base Company defined on your agreements and for which the Reserve percentage applies.

Values: Business Partners with Base Company status

Mandatory: No

Note! If a column is defined with a value other than None (except for Main Class of Business) then columns to the left of this column (except for Type of Participation) must also be defined with a value other than None.
Development Year: The reserve percentage will be applied to the premium of the respective Underwriting Year = Booking Year on order screen minus Development Year. (Refer to the User’s Guide chapter General Reserve order for further information about the calculation of reserves.)

Values: Figure between 0 and the maximum allowable value, which is defined in the field Maximum Development Years at the bottom of the window.

Mandatory: No

Example:
Booking Year on order screen = 1999
Reserve % defined for Development Year 0 and 1
The reserve percentages will then be applied to U/w year1999 and 1998 respectively.
Reserve %: The Reserve percentage that applies to the level of detail defined by the other fields of the Calculation line.

Values: An amount greater than or equal 0 (zero) (Maximum 9999.999999%)

Mandatory: No
Maximum Development Years: The maximum numbers of years you are allowed to define in the field Development Year.

Values: A number greater than or equal 0 (zero)

Mandatory: No

Currency #

General #

  1. Select System Administration from SICS Workstation desktop
  2. Open System Parameter Maintenance
  3. Select the arrow in front of Accounting
  4. Select the arrow in front of Currency
  5. Select General
  6. Define System Parameters according to your requirements

SystemParametrs_Currency_General.png

Field Description
Functional Currency 1 in Use Selected: For each Entry Code detail amount, the system calculates an equivalent functional currency value. The system saves both the original booking and the equivalent functional currency to the database. The functional currency is defined in the Default functional Currency 1 drop-down field. The Exchange Rate at the time of booking is used calculating the functional currency.
The calculated Functional Currency/- Amount 1 can be viewed in the Detail Properties window for each booking detail. The window is available from the Account Balances Details of the Business Ledger. (For more information, refer to the Open and maintain More Details Information from Business Ledger chapter sorted under the Navigation and Operations from Business Ledger chapter in User’s Guide.)
By selecting the check box the following fields become available:
* Default functional Currency 1 (mandatory)
* Functional Currency 2 in use (optional)
* Reverse with Re-Calculation(optional)

Functional Currency 1 is used unless a functional currency for a legal entity is defined in the table window. (Refer to the Define New Functional Currency per Legal Reporting Unit chapter.)

Cleared: No Functional Currency amount is calculated.

Relevant when: Select this parameter when a functional currency is to be defined and calculated for General Ledger transfers and reporting purpose.

Applicable for: P&C, Life
Default Functional Currency 1 Selected: The defined currency is used calculating and booking a functional currency amount for each entry code booking detail. The value may be overridden by a functional currency defined for a legal entity. (Refer to the Define New Functional Currency per Legal Reporting Unitchapter.)
Also if functional currency 1 has been defined for a business, the default functional currency is overridden. (Refer to description of the parameter Allow override Func. Currency In Business.)

Cleared: Only if Functional Currency 1 in use parameter is not selected.

Relevant when: Functional Currency 1 in use Check Box is selected.

Applicable for: P&C, Life
Functional Currency 2 in use Selected: You can select this field when the Functional Currency 1 in Use Check box is selected. The default currency defined as Functional Currency 2 is used unless the business has its own Functional Currency 2 defined. (Refer to the Business tab.) The Functional Currency 2 field located on the Business tab becomes available upon selection of this check box. Also when creating New Businesses a Functional Currency 2 field becomes available in the Create New Business wizard.
The calculated Functional Currency/- Amount 2 can be viewed in the Detail Properties window for each booking detail. The window is available from the Account Balances Details of the Business Ledger. (For more information, refer to the Open and maintain More Details Information from Business Ledger chapter sorted under the Navigation and Operations from Business Ledger chapter in User’s Guide.)

Cleared: No functional currency 2 is calculated.

Relevant when: Select this parameter when a second functional currency is to be defined and calculated for General Ledger transfers and reporting purpose in addition to Functional Currency 1.

Applicable for: P&C, Life
Default functional Currency 2 Selected: The defined currency is used calculating and booking a second functional currency amount for each entry code booking detail. If a functional currency 2 has been defined for a business, the default functional currency is overridden.

Cleared: Only if Functional Currency 2 in use parameter is not selected.

Relevant when: Functional Currency 2 in use Check Box is selected

Applicable for: P&C, Life
Allow Override Func. Currency in Business Selected: You are allowed to define a Functional Currency 1 in the business properties overriding the default Functional Currency 1 defined in the System Parameters. A Functional Currency 1 field becomes available in the Business tab for existing businesses and in the wizard creating new businesses. The field is only available on the business if the Functional Currency 1 in use check box is selected in addition to this parameter.
Note! If this parameter has been in use and you switch it off, there can still exist businesses with a defined Functional Currency 1. When calculating the Functional Currency 1, SICS uses the currency shown on the business. If you want to use the default Functional Currency 1 in the calculation, you must remove the Functional Currency 1 on the business before switching off the parameter.

Cleared: You are not allowed to override the default Functional Currency 1 on business level.

Relevant when: Select this parameter when you want to be able to override the default Functional Currency 1 on Business level.

Applicable for: P&C, Life
Reverse with Re-Calculation Selected: Whenever a Worksheet or Remittance is reversed the Functional Currency calculation will always be reversed using the rate of exchange at the date the reversal is made.
Note! For Remittance balances, when a reversal is created, then the flag Functional Currency is Manually Set by User is set to true and this flag is used to keep the FC amounts also when status is changed on the remittance. This flag is visible on the remittance only if the system parameter Change Functional Currency Rate For Pending Remittance is ON, else it is hidden. If information on the remittance is manually changed by the user, e.g. if Currency or Amount is changed or other information that trigger recalculation, then the FC amounts are recalculated and the flag is set to false.

Cleared: The Functional Currency amount is recalculated using the original rate of exchange that applied when the Worksheet or Remittance was originally created, i.e. the Functional Amounts on the source balance are copied and negated to the reversal balance.

Relevant when: Select this parameter when you want the reversed functional currency amount to be calculated using the rate of exchange at the date the reversal is made
Note! This parameter cannot be set if the ‘Overrule the copied Functional Currency Amount ‘system parameter has been selected
Note! If Accounting/Retrocession/General parameter Keep Booking Year/Period from Source Business is selected, the Functional Currency on Reversed worksheets will always be calculated using the Period End Rate of the period from the Original Booking Year and Period on the detail.

Applicable for: P&C, Life
Use special rule for Unallocated Remittance Selected: Whenever an Unallocated Remittance balance is created the Functional Currency Calculation will always be calculated by use of the same rate of exchange as for the Functional Currency calculation on the Driving balance in the current balance pairing (from where the creation of the Unallocated Remittance started). The system will calculate the rate used for the driving balance by use of the functional amount and the original amount on the driving balance.

Cleared: The Functional Currency amount on the Unallocated Remittance balance is calculated using the current daily rate.

Relevant when: Select this parameter when you want the system to use the same rate for the Unallocated Remittance as used for the driving balance it will be paired with

Applicable for: P&C, Life
Manually change the Functional Currency Rate Selected: The user is allowed to overrule the defaulted exchange rate for a worksheet. The user can override current or copied rate of exchange for a reversal and current rates for a not reversed worksheet.

Cleared: The Functional Currency calculation cannot be manually overridden.

Relevant when: Select this parameter when you need an option to set a manual rate of exchange on the Worksheet Closing window.
Note! To get the Functional Currency Maintenance option enabled on Worksheet Closing window, you cannot select any of the system parameters Allow Override Func. Currency in Business and Reverse with Re-Calculation.

Applicable for: P&C, Life
Overrule the copied Functional Currency Amount Selected: The user is allowed to overrule the copied original rate of exchange for a reversed worksheet. The user can override using the current rate of exchange for the reversal, or it could be manually set if system parameter Manually change the Functional Currency Rate is activated.

Cleared: The functional currency calculation for a reversal is copied from the original rate of exchange with no option to overrule it.

Relevant when: Select this parameter when you want the reversed functional currency amount to be calculated using the copied rate of exchange from the original booking date, but with an option to overrule the values. This parameter cannot be set if parameter Reverse with Re-Calculation is selected.

Applicable for: P&C, Life
Change Functional Currency Rate For Pending Remittance Selected: The user is allowed to overrule the defaulted exchange rate for a new Remittance balance in any statuses and for pending Remittance balance. The user can override the copied or calculated exchange rate. The user can also override the Functional Amount directly.
The overruled Functional Currency rate/amounts will be recalculated and and reset on the Remittance balance if the user change the Payment Amount or Currency, if the user change the Bank Amount or Currency (if the system parameter Use Bank Amount on Remittances in FC calculation is selected) or if the user switch the direction on the remittance (the Received/Paid indicator).

Note! When the Functional Currency rate/amount is manually changed, the flag ‘Functional Currency is Manually Set by User’ is set to true. When a pending remittance is reopened, this flag remains true which means that the FC is not being recalculated. Furthermore, the FC is not being recalculated when changing e.g. the Partner’s Reference or when changing the Status to another pending remittance status or to ‘Final’.

When changing the following information, the field ‘Functional Currency is Manually Set by User’ is set to False and the FC is recalculated;
Received/Paid Indicator
Payment Currency/Amount
Bank Currency/Amount (but only if system parameter ‘Use Bank Amount on Remittances in FC calculation’ is ON)
Base Company,
Reporting Unit (but only if special FC Currency is defined for the Reporting Unit)
Value Date/Due Date (but only is special are defined for Remittance)
Date of Booking (but only is special Functional Currency Exchange Rules are defined for Remittance).

Note! This flag is also set to True when a reversal remittance is created and the system parameter Reverse with Re-Calculation is OFF, independent if the Change Functional Currency Rate For Pending Remittance is selected or not

Cleared: The Functional Currency calculation on remittances cannot be manually overridden.

Relevant when: Select this parameter when you need an option to set manually the rate of exchange for the functional currency calculation.

Applicable for:_ P&C, Life
Use Bank Amount on Remittances in FC calculation Selected: When a Remittance balance is created and the Functional Currency amount is calculated the system will use the Bank Currency and Amount as basis for the calculation instead of the Payment Currency and Amount

Cleared: When a Remittance balance is created and the Functional Currency amount is calculated the system will use the Payment Currency and Amount

Relevant when: You think it is more correct to use the amount that is actually credited/debited your bank account instead of using the original amount paid by the client. This is only relevant for the FC calculation when the Bank Currency is different than the original Currency on the remittance booking.

Applicable for: P&C, Cede
Use FC Rate From Source Business Selected: You can select this field when the Functional Currency 1 in Use Check Box is selected. The Functional Currency 1 (and Functional Currency 2, if in use) exchange rate(s) from the source business’ (e.g. Assumed Business) bookings is used for the automatic bookings made to the outward business (proportional OCC ‘as Original/Fac Retrocessionaire Participations).

Cleared: The Functional Currency 1 (and Functional Currency 2, if in use)exchange rate(2) at the time of booking is used calculating the functional currency.

Functional Impact: Automatic bookings made to OCC ‘as Original’/Fac RP ‘as Booking’ business ledger when closing worksheet on source business. The Worksheet Closing (options Functional Currency Maintenance and Reset Functional Amounts )

Relevant when: Select this parameter when you want the system to use the Functional Currency 1 (and Functional Currency 2, if in use) exchange rate(s) from the source business’ bookings instead of the Functional Currency 1 (and Functional Currency 2, if in use) exchange rate(s) at the time of booking when automatic bookings are made to the outward business ledgers; OCC ‘as Original’/Fac RP. The functional currency exchange rate from the source business is also used when adjustments are made to outward business due to change of Retroceded Share or when processing the Generate Preliminary Booking functionality.

Applicable for: P&C, Life
Use Functional Currency 1 Detail as Basis for OCC/ORP Bookings Selected: You can select this field when the Use FC Rate From Source Business Check Box is selected.
The Functional Currency 1 amount is set for the OCC ‘as Booking’ balance/details and the ORP ‘as Booking’/‘as Account’ balance/details.
When the booking currency defined for the proportional Outward Cedent’s Contract is equal to the default Functional Currency 1, the functional currency amount booked with the details on the OCC preliminary ledger is basis for details made on the OCC ‘as Booking’.
When the booking currency is different from the default Functional Currency 1, the functional currency amount for the details on the OCC ‘as Booking’ business ledger is the same amount as used for the basis booking (OCC ‘as Original). The Functional Currency 1 amount for the original ORP detail (e.g. premium and loss) in booking currency is equal to the basis booking details (OCC ‘as Booking’) adjusted by ORP share percentage. The Functional Currency 1 amount for calculated ORP details is calculated of the ORP basis detail amount in functional currency (e.g. commission calculated of premium).
When the account currency defined for the proportional ORP is equal to the default Functional Currency 1, the functional currency amount booked with the details on the ORP ‘as Booking’ ledger is basis for details made on the ORP ‘as Account’.
When the account currency is different from the default Functional Currency 1, the functional currency amount for the details on the ORP ‘as Account’ business ledger is the same amount as used for the basis booking (ORP ‘as Booking’).

Cleared: The Functional Currency 1 exchange rate at the time of booking is used calculating the functional currency.

Functional Impact: Retrocession Calculation Order/Retrocession Account Order.

Relevant when: Select this parameter when you want the Functional Currency 1 amount of the OCC ‘as Original’ details be basis for the OCC ‘as Booking’ details (i.e. when booking currency equal default Functional Currency 1) or when you want the Functional Currency 1 amount of the ORP ‘as Booking’ details be basis for the ORP ‘as Account’ details (i.e. when account currency equal default Functional Currency 1) and when you want the Functional Currency 1 amount of booking details made by the Retrocession Calculation /Account order be the same as the functional currency of the basis booking detail.
Allow Functional Currency Revaluation (This field is dependent of the Functional Currency 1 in use being active)

Selected: You can select this field when you want to be able to revaluate the Functional Currency Amount 1 according to new Exchange Rates. Selecting this field enables the Functional Currency Revaluation order (Refer to Periodic Functions/Accounting Mass Update).

Cleared: The Functional Currency Revaluation Order is disabled and you are not allowed to revaluate the Functional Currency Amount.

Relevant when: You should select this field when you want the Functional Currency Amount for all details included in Unsettled Balances, unreleased Deposit details, Reserve details not amounting to zero and Unallocated Remittance balances to be revaluated according to new Exchange Rates.

Applicable for: P&C, Life
Include Realized Loss/Gain in FC Revaluation This option gets enabled when ‘Allow Functional Currency Revaluation’ system parameter is selected.

Selected: When running the Functional Currency Revaluation order the system will revalue Unsettled Balances itself instead of the Details in the Unsettled Balances.

Additional, when a balance is settled or partially settled in a balance pairing process the system should update the FC Revaluation information for the technical balance with the realized gain/loss based on the functional currency amount on the settlement balance (normally a remittance).
When a balance is partially settled between last functional currency revaluation and the current functional currency revaluation the system should continue calculate the unrealized gain/loss for the unsettled part of the balance.

Cleared: When running the Functional Currency Revaluation order the system will revalue all Details in Unsettled Balances. Furthermore, no functional currency revaluation will take place at the moment of balance pairing.

Functional Impact: Functional Currency Revaluation Order

Relevant when: Select this system parameter when you want to calculate functional currency unrealized gain/loss on Unsettled Balances and realized gain/loss on Unsettled Balances at the moment of balance pairing.

Applicable for: P&C, Cede, Life
Use Extraction Criteria in FC Revaluation order Selected: By selecting this parameter the following additional extraction criteria appears on the Functional Currency Revaluation order: Base Base Company, Reserve bookings or all other bookings and inward bookings or outward bookings.

Cleared: Standard layout without the above extraction criteria is applicable for the Functional Currency Revaluation Order.

Relevant when: In case you would like to have the possibility to revalue only a part of the portfolio you should activate this parameter. By doing this you can extract one or more base companies so that only bookings assigned to this/these base companies will be revalued. You will also be able to run the revaluation order only for reserve bookings or for all bookings except for reserves. There is also a possibility to extract bookings only on inward businesses or only on outward businesses.

Applicable for: P&C, Cede, Life
Use FC rate from Source Premium in UPR Calculation (This parameter is enabled only when Functional Currency 1 in Use is selected)

Selected: When Unearned Premium Reserve Order is run with option Use Earning Method from System Parameters selected, the Functional Currency 1 (and Functional Currency 2, if in use) exchange rates(s) from the source premium is used for the calculated Unearned Premium Reserve

Cleared: The Functional Currency 1 (and Functional Currency 2, if in use) on the Unearned Premium Reserve is calculated using the general exchange rate rules defined for Functional Currency 1 (and Functional Currency 2, if in use).

Functional Impact: Unearned Premium Reserve Order

Relevant when: Select this system parameter if you use the option Use Earning Methods from System Parameters when running the Unearned Premium Reserve Order, and you want the Functional Currency on the Unearned Premium Reserve to be calculated using the same rate(s) as the source premium.

Applicable for: P&C, Cede
Keep Booking Year/Period from Source Premium on UPR bookings (This parameter is enabled only when Accounting/Retrocession system parameter Keep Booking Year/Period from Source Business is selected)

Selected: When Unearned Premium Reserve Order is run with option Use Earning Method from System Parameters selected, the Booking Year and Period from the source premium is populated to the Orig Book Year and Orig Book Per fields on the corresponding Unearned Premium detail. The values in Orig Book Year and Orig Book Per will be kept on the corresponding bookings on the Proportional OCCs/ORPs.

Cleared: Booking Year/Period from the source premium is not populated to the Unearned Premium Reserve details calculated by the Unearned Premium Reserve Order

Functional Impact: Unearned Premium Reserve Order. Indirectly it also has impact on the Retrocession Calculation Order and Retrocession Account Order

Relevant when: Select this system parameter when you want the outward unearned premium details to be shown with original booking year/period equal to the booking year/period from the inward source premium and you want to be able to convert ORP booking details from Booking Currency to Account Currency using the ‘Period End Rate - Orig BYRP’.

Applicable for: P&C, Cede
Use Inception Rate Accounting Makes it possible to convert functional currency in Multi GAAP Accounting order and currency conversion in REAC by use of the rate found at inception of the actual business/insured period (NB! Currently not working in REAC).

Selected: The following parameters ‘Based on Daily Rate’ and ‘Based on Period End Rate’ becomes enabled

Cleared: The most recent daily rates are used when calculating the Functional Currency amounts in Multi GAAP Accounting orders. The Inception Rate option is disabled in the Currencies tab of the Administration Conditions for businesses where the Currencies tab applies.

Relevant when: You should select this parameter if you want the system to use the inception date on the business/insured period to find the exchange rates to be used in the currency conversion calculation in Retrocession accounting or the Functional Currency calculation in Multi GAAP Accounting orders.

Applicable for: P&C, Cede, Life
Based on Daily Rate The Daily Rate at Inception Date of the Business/Insured Period is used to find the exchange rate when calculating Functional Currency amounts in Multi GAAP Accounting orders.

Selected: The ‘Based on Period End Rate’ becomes cleared.

Cleared: The ‘Based on Period End Rate’ becomes selected.

Relevant when: You should select this parameter if you want the system to use the daily rate found on the inception date on the business/insured period to be used in the Functional Currency calculation in Multi GAAP Accounting orders.

Applicable for: P&C, Cede, Life
Based on Period End Rate The Period End Rate at Inception Date of the Business/Insured Period is used to find the exchange when calculating Functional Currency amounts in Multi GAAP Accounting orders.

Selected: The ‘Based on Daily Rate’ becomes cleared.

Cleared: The ‘Based on Daily Rate’ becomes selected.

Relevant when: You should select this parameter if you want the system to use the period end rate prior to the inception date on the business/insured period to be used in the Functional Currency calculation in Multi GAAP Accounting orders.

Applicable for: P&C, Cede, Life

| Entry Code for Write Off: | This field gets enabled when the system parameter ’ Include Realized Loss/Gain for FC revaluation’ is selected.

Selected: Here the user can select an entry code within the Entry Code Sub Category Other Deduction. This entry code will be used when a Write Off is calculated as a minor adjustment during the pairing process. When such a pairing is committed to the database the system will create a Technical Worksheet with one detail for each write off amount

For further details see P&C User manual Chapter “Create Balance Pairing”

Cleared: The field is disabled and no technical worksheet with ‘minor adjustment’ will be created for Write Off during Balance Pairing

Relevant when: The user wants to be able to decide that the Write Off amount should be booked as a separate technical balance on the business ledger where the associated technical/claim balance is booked. In this way the system will calculate a functional currency amount also for the write off amount by use of the same exchange rate as the technical balance amount it is related to.

Applicable for: P&C, Cede | | Split Entry Codes with special FC1 Calculation Rule in Separate Balance | This option gets enabled when ‘Include Realized Gain/Loss In FC Revaluation’ system parameter is selected and is applicable to Functional Currency 1 Exchange Rules only.

Selected: When a Technical or Claim Worksheet is created with an entry code that is included in any special Functional Currency 1 Exchange Rule, the system will create a separate balance for the detail amount for this entry code. If more Entry Codes, with the same Functional Currency 1 Exchange Rule can be found in the worksheet, then these details will also be included in that balance, unless they are split because of other balance split options. A second balance is created if other Entry Codes are part of the worksheet and are defined by another Special Functional Currency 1 Exchange Rule. Entry Codes with no Special Functional Currency 1 Exchange Rule will remain in the normal balance. This split of balances is additional to the other balance split options that takes place on a worksheet.

Cleared: All the entries will be booked under a normal balances created by other balance split options, without any split of the balances on the basis of Functional Currency 1 Exchange rules.

Relevant when: Select this system parameter when you want to split the balances on the basis of Functional Currency 1 Exchange rules so that separate balances are created on the basis of exchange rules, to make sure all details within the same balance follows the same exchange rule when it comes to calculate the Functional Currency 1 amounts.

Functional Impact:
Manual Booking on Technical and Claim worksheet, including Reverse, Copy and Reverse and Replace
Import Technical Worksheet from spreadsheet
Instalment and Adjustment bookings including booking through order and automatic reversal of instalments and adjustments
Multi GAAP Accounting Order and Multi GAAP Retrocession Order
Retrocession Calculation Order, Retrocession Account Order and Retrocession Estimation Calculation Order
From Ground Up Functionality
All Accounting Orders (Under Reference Data table no- 231) for Recovery Calculation orders, Reserve Calculation orders, Reinstatement Premium for Outward, Partner Commutation, Occurrence Year Allocation

Applicable for: P&C, Cede| | Use the FX Date of Loss Field | Selected: The system enables the date field named FX Date of Loss on the Claim Properties and offers the user to override the defaulted date in this field. This field is set equal to the Claim Trigger Date if existing, i.e. when the business it belongs to is claims made/awards made, else to the Date of Loss as default value.
Functional currency will be calculated at the date found in the FX date of Loss instead of the Date Of Loss wherever the Date of Loss is being used for FC calculation

Cleared: FC calculation is based on the Date of Loss

Relevant when: Claim related bookings should use another date than the Date of Loss in the functional currency calculation

Applicable for: P&C, Cede | | Keep FC Amount in Intra Group Contract Bookings | Selected: You can select this field when the Functional Currency 1 in Use CheckBox is selected. The Functional Currency 1 (and Functional Currency 2, if in use) exchange rate(s) from the Outward Retrocessionaire’s Participation’s booking is used for the automatic bookings made to the Assumed Business in an Intra Group Contract.

Cleared: The Functional Currency 1 (and Functional Currency 2, if in use) exchange rate(2) at the time of booking is used calculating the functional currency.

Functional Impact: Automatic bookings made to an Assumed Business in an Intra Group Contract.

Relevant when: Select this parameter if you want the system to use the Functional Currency 1 (and Functional Currency 2, if in use) exchange rate(s) from the Outward Retrocessionaire’s Participation’s booking (ORP placed on prop/non-prop treaty OCC or prop/non-prop Fac OCC or Fac ORP directly protecting an AB) to be used for the automatic bookings made to the Assumed Business in an Intra Group Contract.

Applicable for: P&C, Cede | | Use date on Headline for booking on linked Claim | Selected: When an individual Claim is linked to a Headline Loss the system will set the FX Date of Loss equal the FX Date of Loss found on the headline loss. The main rule is that the system will disable the FX Date of Loss field on the individual Claim to indicate for the user that this field is irrelevant for the individual Claim. But if the individual Claim is on a Claims Made/Awards Made business, an exception to the main rule occurs; the individual Claim’s FX Date of Loss is still enabled and can be modified when needed.
Functional currency calculation will be made based on the FX Date of Loss field on the Headline Loss. With another exception; if the individual Claim is on a Claims Made/Awards Made business, the Functional currency calculation will be based on the FX Date of Loss on the individual Claim.

Cleared: If this parameter is not selected the system will enable the FX Date of Loss on the individual Claim and use this date in the Functional Currency calculation, even if Headline Loss is linked to the Claim.

Relevant when: The user wants to set up the system so that bookings on individual Claim linked to Headline Loss is using the FX Date of Loss field on the Headline Loss in the Functional Currency calculation unless the Claim belongs to a Claims Made or Awards Made business

Applicable for: P&C, Cede | | Allow Override FC calc rule in Business | Selected: When this is selected, the following happens on the Business Tab of the Business in the Accounting Info Sub tab
Two new fields are displayed and enabled on the Business named “Special FC calc rule for Premium bookings” and “Special FC calc rule for Claim bookings”
As default the fields are empty, meaning bookings on this business will follow the calculation rule defined in the system parameters
The user will be able to override the functional currency calculation on the business.
For further details see P&C User manual Chapter Add Business Information

Cleared: The default functional currency calculation from the System Parameters is used

Relevant when: The user wants for specific businesses to override the general conversion rule for this type of business defined in the system parameter, either for premium bookings or for claim bookings or for both

Applicable for: P&C, Cede | | Use FC rate based on Date of Booking in Preliminary Booking order | Selected: When the Preliminary Bookings order runs and the worksheets on the As Original ledger of the OCC are closed, the system will calculate Functional Curreny 1 and Functional Currency 2 by use of the Daily Rate found on the Date of Booking of the source booking.

Cleared: When the Preliminary Bookings order runs and the worksheets on the As Original ledger of the OCC are closed, the system will calculate Functional Curreny 1 and Functional Currency 2 by use of the Current Daily Rate when the worksheets are closed. But if the system parameter Use Inception Rate Accounting is selected, together with Based on Daily Rate, then the system will calculate Functional Currency 1 and Functional Currency 2 by use of Daily Rate at the Insured Period Start Date of the OCC, or together with Based on Period End Rate, then the system will calculate Functional Currency 1 and Functional Currency 2 by use of Period End Rate at the Insured Period Start Date of the OCC.

Relevant when: The Preliminary Booking order runs and the user wants to have the functional currency calculated based on the exchange rate at the date when the original bookings where created.

Applicable for: P&C, Cede, Life | | Exclude Partially Released Deposit from FC Revaluation | Selected: When the FC Revaluation order runs the system will ignore Partially Released premium and loss deposit details, only Unreleased deposits are included and revalued.

Cleared: When the FC Revaluation order runs the system will also revalue Partially Released premium and loss deposit details.

Relevant when: This parameter is relevant to use if you don’t have Partially Released deposits in the system or you do not want to revalue Partially Released deposit details. By ticking this parameter it will also improve the performance when running the FC Revaluation order.

Applicable for: P&C, Cede |

If legal reporting units have been set up in your company, it is possible to override the Default Functional Currency so that alternative functional currencies are used. (Refer to the field description of Default Functional Currency 1 above). If legal reporting units have not been set up, it is possible to override the Default Functional Currency per Base Company.

  1. Open System Parameters and navigate to Accounting/ Currency
  2. Select Functional Currency 1 Overriding Rules
  3. Click the Edit button
  4. Select a Legal Reporting Unit or Base Company from the list.
  5. Select New from the pop-up menu in the Definition of Rule area. The New Functional Currency Rule window appears.
  6. Select Original Currency and Functional Currency from the drop-down lists.
  7. Click Save to update the new rule.
  8. Define further rules if applicable and click Save when all Functional Currency Rules have been defined.

Note! The list of Legal Reporting Unit depends on the parameter Legal Reporting Unit
Category
selected under Accounting/Miscellaneous. The list of Base Companies include both active and inactive Base Companies.

System_Parameter_Accounting_Currency_RU.png

You may want to modify a Functional Currency Rule defined for a Legal Reporting Unit or Base Company.

  1. Open System Parameter and navigate to Accounting/ Currency
  2. Select Functional Currency 1 Overriding Rules
  3. Click the Edit button
  4. Select the Legal Reporting Unit or Base Company that has a rule you want to modify.
  5. Select the Rule that is to be modified and select Edit from the pop-up menu. The New Functional Currency Rule window appears.
  6. Make your adjustment to the Original Currency and/or the Functional Currency.
  7. Click Save to update your adjustments.

You may want to remove a Functional Currency Rule defined for a Legal Reporting Unit or Base Company.

  1. Open System Parameters and navigate to Accounting/ Currency
  2. Select Functional Currency 1 Overriding Rules
  3. Click the Edit button
  4. Select the Legal Reporting Unit or Base Company that has a rule you want to remove.
  5. Select the Rule that is to be removed and select Delete from the pop-up menu.
  6. Click Save to update your actions.

System_Parameter_Accounting_Currency_RU_Edit1.png

System_Parameter_Accounting_Currency_RU_Edit2.png

Field Descriptions - Functional Currency Exchange Rules window/New Functional Currency Rule window #

Applicable for: P&C, Life

Field Description
Legal Reporting Units: Legal entities within the organisation

Values: For instance in case of RU Category Profit Centre units may be e.g. Nordic, Germanic, Latin

Derived from: the Reporting Unit Category selected in the Miscellaneous tab of the Accounting Parameters determines The Reporting Units available.

Mandatory: No
Base Companies: Your own companies

Values: All companies defined as Base Companies, both active and inactive

Mandatory: No
Original: The Original Currency for which a Functional Currency is defined

Values: Currency (ISO Standard)

Mandatory: No
Functional: The Functional Currency defined for an Original Currency

Values: Currency (ISO standard)

Functional Impact: Overrides the Default Functional Currency 1 defined

Mandatory: No

Functional Currency Exchange Rules #

When you want to calculate the Functional Currency 1 and/or Functional Currency 2 using other Exchange Rate Categories for the Technical, Claim or Remittance Worksheets than the default Exchange Rate Category, you can define these Exchange Rate Categories on the Functional Currency tab. These are the Basic Rules for each of the 3 above worksheet types and will be used on all bookings, also including accounting orders, unless Specific Rules are defined.

For the Technical and Claim Worksheet you can define Specific Rules per Type of Business and Entry Codes. NB! The Specific Rules are not used for Accounting Orders.

The calculation takes place when a technical/claim worksheet is Closed and when a remittance worksheet is committed to the database. The Functional Currency 1/2 can be inspected for closed worksheets afterwards.

Note! If the system parameter Keep Booking Year/Period from Source Business is active so that the Original Booking Year/Period is set on details, e.g. when the function Reverse and Replace has been used, then the system will use the Period End Rate found based on the Origional Booking Year/Period for these detail independent of the Functional Currency Exchange Rules defined here.

Functional Currency

  1. Select System Administration from SICS Workstation desktop
  2. Open System Parameter Maintenance
  3. Select the arrow in front of Accounting
  4. Select the arrow in front of Currency
  5. Select Functional Currency
  6. Define System Parameters according to your requirements

System_Parameter_Accounting_Currency_FC_ExchangeRules.png

View Accounting Functional Currency 1 Rule #

The defined Exchange Rate Categories for the different Worksheet Types can be viewed in detail.

  1. Select the Currency tab from the Accounting parameters.
  2. Select the Functional Currency tab.
  3. Select the Functional Currency 1 Rule that you want to view.
  4. Select View from the pop-up menu.
  5. The View Accounting Functional Currency 1 Rule window appears

Create Accounting Functional Currency 1 Rule (basic rule) #

You create a Functional Currency 1 Exchange Rule when you want to convert your original bookings using different Exchange Rate Categories for Technical Account/Claim/Remittance Worksheet. For Technical Account/Claim Worksheet different Exchange Rate Categories can be defined per Type of Business/Entry Code(s).It can not define two similar general rules (with only Worksheet Type and Exchange Rate Category).Both Type of Business and Entry Codes must be defined if a specific rule is defined (and that it cannot be defined without a general rule.

  1. Click the edit button from the Accounting parameters.
  2. Select the Currency tab and then the Functional Currency tab. The window is now in edit mode.
  3. Select New from the pop-up menu.
  4. The Create Accounting Functional Currency 1 Rule window appears.
  5. Select a Worksheet Type.
  6. Select an Exchange Rate Category
  7. Click Save to update the new Functional Currency rule.
  8. Click OK from the Functional Currency tab to update the window.

Create Accounting Functional Currency 1 Rule (per Type of Business/Entry Code) #

When a Functional Currency 1 basic rule already exists, you can define additional rules for the Technical Account/Claim Worksheet to be used for specific combinations of Type of Business/Entry Code(s).It can not define two similar general rules (with only Worksheet Type and Exchange Rate Category).Both Type of Business and Entry Codes must be defined if a specific rule is defined (and that it cannot be defined without a general rule.

  1. Click the edit button from the Accounting parameters.
  2. Select the Currency tab and then the Functional Currency tab. The window is now in edit mode.
  3. Select New from the pop-up menu.
  4. The Create Accounting Functional Currency 1 Rule window appears.
  5. Select a Worksheet Type.
  6. Select an Exchange Rate Category
  7. Select a Type of Business
  8. Select one or more Entry Codes
  9. Click Save to update the new Functional Currency 1 rule.
  10. Click OK from the Functional Currency tab to update the window

Edit Accounting Functional Currency 1 Rule #

If an existing Functional Currency 1 rule needs to be modified, you can open the Edit Accounting Functional Currency 1 Rule window.It can not define two similar general rules (with only Worksheet Type and Exchange Rate Category).Both Type of Business and Entry Codes must be defined if a specific rule is defined (and that it cannot be defined without a general rule.

  1. Click the edit button from the Accounting parameters.
  2. Select the Currency tab and then the Functional Currency tab. The window is now in edit mode.
  3. Select the Functional Currency 1 Rule that you are going to modify.
  4. Select Edit from the pop-up menu.
  5. The Edit Accounting Functional Currency 1 Rule window appears.
  6. Make your changes in the applicable fields.
  7. Click Save to update your changes to the Functional Currency 1 rule.
  8. Click OK from the Functional Currency tab to update the window.

Delete Functional Currency 1 Rule #

A Functional Currency 1 rule may no longer be valid or it has been entered by mistake. You can then delete the Functional Currency 1 rule.

  1. Click the Edit button on the System Parameter window.
  2. Click the Currency tab and then the Functional Currency. The window is now in edit mode.
  3. Select the Functional Currency 1 Rule to be deleted. Note that a basic rule cannot be deleted when a rule defined for a combination of Type of Business/Entry Code exists for the same Worksheet Type. Delete the rule(s) including the combination of Type of Business/Entry Code first.
  4. Select Delete from the pop-up menu.
  5. A Message appears asking you to confirm your action.
  6. Click Yes to confirm your action.
  7. Click OK in the Functional Currency tab window to update your changes.

Field Description - Functional Currency 1 #

Field Description
Worksheet Type: The Worksheet Type the Functional Currency 1 Exchange Rule applies for. The selection of a Worksheet Type is dependent on the Functional Currency 1 in use being selected (refer to Currency, General tab)

Values: Technical Account, Claim Worksheet and Remittance Worksheet

Mandatory: No

Relevant: Select a Worksheet Type if you want to convert the Original booking details to the Functional Currency 1 using another Exchange Rate Category than the default Category (refer to Currency, General tab).
Exchange Rate Category: The Exchange Rate Category to be used when converting the original booking detail made on the Worksheet Type selected.

Values: Depending on the selected Worksheet Type, the following values are available:
Technical Account:
* Inception Rate - Period End Rate (the rate registered for the period previous to the Insured Period From Date)
* Inception Rate - Daily Rate (the rate registered for the date equal to the Insured Period From Date)
* Most Recent Day Rate
* Period End Rate (the period rate registered on the period equal to the Booking Period on the booking detail’s balance)
* Booked Date - Daily Rate (the rate registered on the date of booking if any, or prior to this date)
Note If the Accounting System Parameter Use FX Headline for Technical Worksheet Details linked to Headline is activated; loss related details (details with entry code with the Usage Extended to Claim Accounting selected) which are linked to a Headline Loss on an assumed proportional treaty are converted using the FX Headline date; and not the “regular” technical worksheet conversion rule.

Claim Worksheet:
* Inception Rate - Period End Rate (the rate registered for the period previous to the Insured Period From Date)
* Inception Rate - Daily Rate (the rate registered for the date equal to the Insured Period From Date)
* Most Recent Day Rate
* Daily Rate (equal to the Date of Loss of the Claim)
* Period End Rate (the Period End Rate registered on the period prior to the period of the Date of Loss of the linked Claim detail, or the Trigger Date if Date of Loss is missing)
* Booked Date - Daily Rate (the rate registered on the date of booking if any, or prior to this date)
* Booking Year/Period - Period End Rate (the period rate registered on the period equal to the Booking Period on the booking detail’s balance)

Remittance Worksheet:
* Most Recent Day Rate
* Daily Rate (equal the Value Date, or Due Date if Value Date is nil, on the Remittance Worksheet)
* Booked Date - Daily Rate (the rate registered on the date of booking if any, or prior to this date)

Mandatory: Yes when a Worksheet Type has been selected
Relevant: Select an Exchange Rate Category when you want the booking detail made on the selected Worksheet Type to be converted to Functional Currency 1 using different Exchange Rate Categories for different Worksheet Types.
Type of Business: The Type of Business the Functional Currency 1Rule applies for. A Type of Business may only be selected when already exists a basic rule for the same Worksheet Type.

Values: All Types of Business (relevant for Worksheet Type Technical Account/Claim Worksheet only)

Mandatory: No
Relevant: Select a Type of Business when you want to limit the Functional Currency 1Rule to a specific Type of Business/Entry Code(s) (refer to below).
Entry Codes Criteria: The Entry Codes the Functional Currency 1Rule applies for.

Values: All available Entry Codes registered

Mandatory: Yes when a Type of Business is selected

Relevant: Select one or more Entry Codes to define the Entry Codes to be converted to the Functional Currency 1 using the Functional Currency 1 Rule.

View Accounting Functional Currency 2 Rule #

The defined Exchange Rate Categories for the different Worksheet Types can be viewed in detail.

  1. Select the Currency tab from the Accounting parameters.
  2. Select the Functional Currency tab.
  3. Select the Functional Currency 2 Rule that you want to view.
  4. Select View from the pop-up menu.
  5. The View Accounting Functional Currency 2 Rule window appears

Create Accounting Functional Currency 2 Rule (basic rule) #

You create a Functional Currency 2 Exchange Rule when you want to convert your original bookings using different Exchange Rate Categories for Technical Account/Claim/Remittance Worksheet. For Technical Account/Claim Worksheet different Exchange Rate Categories can be defined per Type of Business/Entry Code(s)

  1. Click the edit button from the Accounting parameters.
  2. Select the Currency tab and then the Functional Currency tab. The window is now in edit mode.
  3. Select New from the pop-up menu.
  4. The Create Accounting Functional Currency 2 Rule window appears.
  5. Select a Worksheet Type.
  6. Select an Exchange Rate Category
  7. Click Save to update the new Functional Currency rule.
  8. Click OK from the Functional Currency tab to update the window.

Create Accounting Functional Currency 2 Rule (per Type of Business/Entry Code) #

When a Functional Currency 2 basic rule already exists, you can define additional rules for the Technical Account/Claim Worksheet to be used for specific combinations of Type of Business/Entry Code(s).

  1. Click the edit button from the Accounting parameters.

  2. Select the Currency tab and then the Functional Currency tab. The window is now in edit mode.

  3. Select New from the pop-up menu.

  4. The Create Accounting Functional Currency 2 Rule window appears.

  5. Select a Worksheet Type.

  6. Select an Exchange Rate Category

  7. Select a Type of Business

  8. Select one or more Entry Codes

  9. Click Save to update the new Functional Currency 2 rule.

  10. Click OK from the Functional Currency tab to update the window

Edit Accounting Functional Currency 2 Rule #

If an existing Functional Currency 2 rule needs to be modified, you can open the Edit Accounting Functional Currency 2 Rule window.

  1. Click the edit button from the Accounting parameters.
  2. Select the Currency tab and then the Functional Currency tab. The window is now in edit mode.
  3. Select the Functional Currency 2 Rule that you are going to modify.
  4. Select Edit from the pop-up menu.
  5. The Edit Accounting Functional Currency 2 Rule window appears.
  6. Make your changes in the applicable fields.
  7. Click Save to update your changes to the Functional Currency 2 rule.
  8. Click OK from the Functional Currency tab to update the window.

Delete Functional Currency 2 Rule #

A Functional Currency 2 rule may no longer be valid or it has been entered by mistake. You can then delete the Functional Currency 2 rule.

  1. Click the Edit button on the System Parameter window.
  2. Click the Currency tab and then the Functional Currency. The window is now in edit mode.
  3. Select the Functional Currency 2 Rule to be deleted. Note that a basic rule cannot be deleted when a rule defined for a combination of Type of Business/Entry Code exists for the same Worksheet Type. Delete the rule(s) including the combination of Type of Business/Entry Code first.
  4. Select Delete from the pop-up menu.
  5. A Message appears asking you to confirm your action.
  6. Click Yes to confirm your action.
  7. Click OK in the Functional Currency tab window to update your changes.

Field Description - Functional Currency 2 #

Field Description
Worksheet Type: The Worksheet Type the Functional Currency 2 Exchange Rule applies for. The selection of a Worksheet Type is dependent on the Functional Currency 2 in use being selected (refer to Currency, General tab)

Values: Technical Account, Claim Worksheet and Remittance Worksheet

Mandatory: No

Relevant: Select a Worksheet Type if you want to convert the Original booking details to the Functional Currency 2 using another Exchange Rate Category than the default Category (refer to Currency, General tab).
Exchange Rate Category: The Exchange Rate Category to be used when converting the original booking detail made on the Worksheet Type selected.

Values: Depending on the selected Worksheet Type, the following values are available:
Technical Account:
* Inception Rate - Period End Rate (the rate registered for the period previous to the Insured Period From Date)
* Inception Rate - Daily Rate (the rate registered for the date equal to the Insured Period From Date)
* Most Recent Day Rate
* Period End Rate (the period rate registered on the period equal to the Booking Period of the original booking detail)
* Booked Date - Daily Rate (the rate registered on the date of booking if any, or prior to this date)
Note If the Accounting System Parameter Use FX Headline for Technical Worksheet Details linked to Headline is activated; loss related details (details with entry code with the Usage Extended to Claim Accounting selected) which are linked to a Headline Loss on an assumed proportional treaty are converted using the FX Headline date; and not the “regular” technical worksheet conversion rule.

Claim Worksheet:
* Inception Rate - Period End Rate (the rate registered for the period previous to the Insured Period From Date)
* Inception Rate - Daily Rate (the rate registered for the date equal to the Insured Period From Date)
* Most Recent Day Rate
* Daily Rate (equal to the Date of Loss of the Claim)
* Period End Rate (the Period End Rate registered on the period prior to the period of the Date of Loss of the linked Claim detail, or the Trigger Date if Date of Loss is missing)

* Booked Date - Daily Rate (the rate registered on the date of booking if any, or prior to this date)

* Booking Year/Period - Period End Rate (the period rate registered on the period equal to the Booking Period of the original booking detail)

Remittance Worksheet:
* Most Recent Day Rate
* Daily Rate (equal the Value Date, or Due Date if Value Date is nil, on the Remittance Worksheet)* Booked Date - Daily Rate (the rate registered on the date of booking if any, or prior to this date)

Mandatory: Yes when a Worksheet Type has been selected

Relevant: Select an Exchange Rate Category when you want the booking detail made on the selected Worksheet Type to be converted to Functional Currency 2 using different Exchange Rate Categories for different Worksheet Types.
Type of Business: The Type of Business the Functional Currency 2 Rule applies for. A Type of Business may only be selected when already exists a basic rule for the same Worksheet Type.

Values: All Types of Business (relevant for Worksheet Type Technical Account/Claim Worksheet only)

Mandatory: No

Relevant: Select a Type of Business when you want to limit the Functional Currency 2 Rule to a specific Type of Business/Entry Code(s) (refer to below).
Entry Codes Criteria: The Entry Codes the Functional Currency 2 Rule applies for.

Values: All available Entry Codes registered

Mandatory: Yes when a Type of Business is selected

Relevant: Select one or more Entry Codes to define the Entry Codes to be converted to the Functional Currency 2 using the Functional Currency 2 Rule.

Random Worksheet Check #

To enforce random checking of Technical- and/or Claim Worksheets, you can activate the parameters in the Random Worksheet Check tab.

  1. Select System Administration from SICS Workstation desktop.
  2. Open System Parameter Maintenance
  3. Select the arrow in front of Accounting
  4. Select Random Worksheet Check

Note! The Parameter Settings of this tab is only enabled when the ‘Advanced Use of Worksheet Status’ parameter is activated. This parameter is located in the Accounting/Worksheet tab. (Refer to Worksheet chapter of the Setting Accounting Values chapter in the System Administrator’s Guide.)

System_Parameter_Accounting_RandomWorksheetCheck.png

Define Rules for Random Check of Technical-/Claim Worksheets #

You can define rules for the random control of Worksheets. The rules determine which and when worksheets are selected for control. When a worksheet has been selected randomly, you are not allowed to change status of the worksheet to ‘Closed’. The worksheet is then updated with the status ‘Suspended’. Another user with the authorisation to change the status from ‘Suspended’ to ‘Closed’ has to control the worksheet. (Refer to the Security Handling chapter in System Administrator’s Guide for more information about user access rights in SICS).

  1. Click Edit button from the Accounting Parameters tab
  2. Select the Random Worksheet Check tab. The tab appears in edit mode, provided that the ‘Advanced Use of Worksheet Status’ parameter is activated in the Worksheet tab.
  3. Select the check box Check for Technical Worksheet and/or the check box Check for Claim Worksheets.
  4. Define Type of Business and/or Level of Business for which your random check apply.
  5. Define ‘Percentage of Worksheets to be checked’.
  6. Define ‘Maximum number of Worksheet per day’.
  7. Activate the ‘Check suspended Worksheets’ check box if applicable.

Note! Those available values for Type of Business and Level of Business are displayed when you place the cursor on the respective selection criteria and double-click or select Properties from the pop-up menu.

Type- and Level of Business values are defined in order to filter Worksheets. If no values are defined, the system will include all Types- and Levels of Business in its search for worksheets to be checked.

Field Description - Random Check for Technical Worksheet #

Applicable for: P&C, Life

Field Description
Check for Technical Worksheets:- Selected: The Random Check for Technical Worksheets functionality becomes available. The field is only selectable if the Worksheet tab parameter Advanced Use of Worksheet Status is selected.
The random check only applies for manually entered worksheets.

Cleared: The random worksheet check functionality does not apply for Technical Worksheets.

Relevant when: Select the parameter when you want to have random control of Technical Worksheets.
Type of Business: You define types of business in order to filter the possible worksheets to be selected and checked. If no values are defined, all types of business are included.

Values: The Type of Business method, i.e. Proportional- and Non-Proportional Direct, Proportional- and Non-Proportional Facultative and Proportional- and Non-Proportional Treaty
Level of Business: You define level of business in order to filter the possible worksheets to be selected and checked. If no values are defined, all levels of business are included.

Values: Level of Business values, e.g. Assumed Business, Outward Cedent’s Contract, etc.
Percentage of Worksheet to be checked: Determines the number of Technical Worksheets in percent that are to be checked.

Values: A figure between 1 and 100. It is also allowed to enter 0 (Zero), but this would mean that no check is performed.

Mandatory: No
Maximum Number of Worksheets per day: Limits the number of worksheets that are checked in any given day.

Values: A number between 1 and 9.999. It is also allowed to enter 0 (Zero), but this would mean that no check is performed

Mandatory: No
Check suspended Worksheets Selected: Technical Worksheets having the status ‘Suspended’ are also included among worksheets available for random check.

Cleared: Technical Worksheets having the status Suspended are excluded from random worksheet check.

Relevant when: Leave this parameter cleared when you want to avoid that Technical Worksheets that already have been checked and given the status suspended are again checked randomly.

Field description - Random check for Claim Worksheets #

Applicable for: P&C, Life

(It is recommended to leave these fields blank in the SICS Life system.)

Field Description
Check for Claim Worksheets:- Selected: The Random Check for Claim Worksheets functionality becomes available. The field is only selectable if the Worksheet tab parameter Advanced Use of Worksheet Status is selected.
The random check only applies for manually entered worksheets.

Cleared: The random worksheet check functionality does not apply for Claim Worksheets.

Relevant when: Select the parameter when you want to have random control of Claim Worksheets.
Type of Business: You define types of business in order to filter the possible worksheets to be selected and checked. If no values are defined, all types of business are included.

Values: The method of insurance/reinsurance of the business, i.e. Proportional- and Non-Proportional Direct, Proportional- and Non-Proportional Facultative and Proportional- and Non-Proportional Treaty
Level of Business: You define level of business in order to filter the possible worksheets to be selected and checked. If no values are defined, all levels of business are included.

Values: Level of Business values, e.g. Assumed Business, Outward Cedent’s Contract, etc.
Percentage of Worksheet to be checked: Determines the number of Claim Worksheets in percent that are to be checked.

Values: A figure between 1 and 100. It is also allowed to enter 0 (Zero), but this would mean that no check is performed.

Mandatory: No
Maximum Number of Worksheets per day: Limits the number of Claim Worksheets that are checked in any given day.

Values: A number between 1 and 9.999. It is also allowed to enter 0 (Zero), but this would mean that no check is performed

Mandatory: No
Check suspended Worksheets: Selected: Claim Worksheets having the status Suspended are also included among the worksheets available for random check.

Cleared: Claim Worksheets having the status Suspended are excluded from random worksheet check.

Relevant when: Leave this parameter cleared when you want to avoid that Claim Worksheets that already have been checked and given the status suspended are again checked randomly.

Accuracy Validation #

In the Accuracy Validation parameters, you can define your validation rules more precise and more flexible than the validations under Validation Rules, see chapter with the same name. In the Accuracy Validation you can define validation rules used in manual bookings and in bookings created by eMessaging. As a pre-check before the validation takes place, the system will first check if the amounts in the worksheet are large enough to be further validated. Secondly the system will use information from the business/insured period, classification and external/internal partners, to find the matching validation rules to be applied for the validation.

If the amount booked on the worksheet exceeds the discrepancy limit, certain validations can be triggered to warn the user. Also missing conditions on the contract , missing entry code expected to be booked or unexpected sign on amount being booked can trigger warning to inform the user about this.

Maintain Accuracy Validation Rules #

  1. Open System Administration from SICS desktop
  2. Open System Parameter Maintenance
  3. Select the Accounting section
  4. Select the Accuracy Validation
  5. Select the Accuracy Validation Rules

System_Parameter_Accuracy_Validation_Rules_26.1.png Accuracy Validation Rules

Add Accuracy Validation Rule #

You create a validation rule when you want to validate your technical bookings, either manually booked or through eMessaging. The validations ensure that the bookings are in accordance with corresponding business conditions. To have an accuracy validation rule activated it must further on be assigned to an Accuracy Validation Template

  1. Click the Edit button on the Accuracy Validation Rules page.
  2. Select the Accounting Accuracy Validation Rule window. The window is now in edit mode.
  3. Select Add from the pop-up menu.
  4. The create Accounting Accuracy Validation Rule window appears.
  5. Define the various attributes of the accuracy validation rule.
  6. Click Save to update the new validation rule.
  7. Click OK from the Accounting Accuracy Validation Ruleswindow to store the new rule.

Edit Accuracy Validation Rule #

If an existing accuracy validation rule needs to be modified, you can open the Edit Accounting Accuracy Validation Rules window

  1. Click the Edit button on the Accuracy Validation Rules page.
  2. Select the Accounting Accuracy Validation Rule window. The window is now in edit mode.
  3. Select Edit from the pop-up menu.
  4. The edit Accounting Accuracy Validation Rule window appears.
  5. Change the actual attributes of the accuracy validation rule.
  6. Click Save to update the validation rule.
  7. Click OK from the Accounting Accuracy Validation Ruleswindow to store the changes.

Remove Accuracy Validation Rule #

An existing accuracy validation rule may no longer be valid, or it has been entered by mistake. You can then remove the accuracy validation rule.

  1. Click the Edit button on the Accuracy Validation Rules page.
  2. Select the Accounting Accuracy Validation Rule window. The window is now in edit mode.
  3. Select the Accuracy Validation Rule to be removed.
  4. Select Remove from the pop-up menu.
  5. A Message appears asking you to confirm your action.
  6. Click Yes to confirm your action.
  7. Click OK in the Accuracy Validation Rule window to update your changes.

Note: It will not be possible to remove an Accuracy Validation Rule if the rule is included in an Accuracy Validation Template. An error message will then be given (and you have to remove the rule from the Template first).

Accounting_Accuracy_Validation_Rules_26.1.png

Create Accuracy Validation Rules

Field Description
Name The name of the accuracy validation rule

Values: Free text of letters/numbers, maximum 80 positions

Mandatory: Yes

Applicable for: P&C
Description Text to describe the validation rule

Values: Free text of letters/numbers, maximum 100 positions

Mandatory: No

Applicable for: P&C
Attribute on Condition The Business Condition the validation rule applies for

Values: Available values are all business conditions defined in the existing reference data ‘Attribute On Condition’ code 00556, e.g. ‘Commission - Deduction Condition’, ‘Premium Deposit Retained - Deposit Condition’ etc.

Conditions supported here are Deduction Conditions, Profit Commission Conditions, Deposit Conditions, Rebate Conditions, Deductible Conditions and Portfolio Conditions

Mandatory: Yes

Applicable for: P&C
Group The Entry Code Group to be used in the calculation.

Values: Available groups are all groups defined in the existing Entry Code Group Category ‘Entry Code Validation’ e.g. ‘Commission’ including various Commission Entry Codes.

Mandatory: Yes

Applicable for: P&C
Deviation Thresholds - Lower Limit The lower limit in Base Currency to be used in the Accuracy Accounting Validation.

Values: An amount with maximum 6 digits, number of decimals = 2, i.e. 999999,99

Mandatory: Yes

Applicable for: P&C
Deviation Thresholds - Upper Limit The upper limit in Base Currency to be used in the Accuracy Accounting Validation.

Values: An amount with maximum 6 digits, number of decimals = 2, i.e. 999999,99

Mandatory: Yes

Applicable for: P&C
Threshold Limit: AC0399 - Target Amount without a corresponding Business Condition The validation message AC0399 appears when booking an Entry code defined in Accuracy Validation but the corresponding conditions are missing. The deviation from this “AC0399 - Target Amount without a corresponding Business Condition” defined on the rule determines whether a booking shall be a “hard-stop” error, or just be logged in the “Accuracy log”.
If the booked target amount is within the tolerence limit; no error raised; but SICS logs the information in Accuracy Validation Log.
If the booked target amount is exceeding limits; the booking detail is highlighted; there is a hard stop error raised; and Accuracy Validation log message is created. You are required to provide a category and possibly a comment, before you can continue with the closing of worksheet.

Values: An amount with maximum 6 digits, number of decimals = 2, i.e. 999999,99

Mandatory: No

Applicable for: P&C
Threshold Limit: AC0395 - Trigger Amount without a Target Amount The validation message AC0395 appears when booking a Base Entry code on the worksheet with the corresponding conditions in place but the defined Accuracy Validation Target Entry code is missing. The deviation from this “AC0395 - Trigger Amount without a Target Amount” defined on the rule determines whether a booking shall be a “hard-stop” error, or just be logged in the “Accuracy log”.
If the booked Base detail amount is within the tolerence limit; no error raised; but SICS logs the information in Accuracy Validation Log.
If the booked Base detail amount is exceeding the limit; the booking detail is highlighted; there is a hard stop error raised; and Accuracy Validation log message is created. You are required to provide a category and possibly a comment, before you can continue with the closing of worksheet.

Values: An amount with maximum 6 digits, number of decimals = 2, i.e. 999999,99

Mandatory: No

Applicable for: P&C
Threshold Limit: AC0392 - Target Amount without a Trigger Amount The validation message AC0392 appears when booking a Target Entry code on the worksheet with the corresponding conditions in place but the Base Entry code is missing. The deviation from this “AC0392 - Target Amount without a Trigger Amount” defined on the rule determines whether a booking shall be a “hard-stop” error, or just be logged in the “Accuracy log”.
If the booked Target amount is within the tolerence limit; no error raised; but SICS logs the information in Accuracy Validation Log.
If the booked Target amount is exceeding the limit; the booking detail is highlighted; there is a hard stop error raised; and Accuracy Validation log message is created. You are required to provide a category and possibly a comment, before you can continue with the closing of worksheet.

Values: An amount with maximum 6 digits, number of decimals = 2, i.e. 999999,99

Mandatory: No

Applicable for: P&C
Base Currency The Currency that the deviation thresholds are expressed in

Values: All currencies defined as Base Currencies are available.

Mandatory: Yes

Applicable for: P&C
Allow Group Override Selected if group override is allowed. Not selected if group override is not allowed

Values: Either ticked or unticked, unticked as default

Mandatory: Yes

Applicable for: P&C
Worksheet Origin/Manual The Worksheet Origin for which the Accuracy Validation must be executed

Selected: The Accuracy Validation Rule applies for Worksheet Origin Manual

Cleared: The Accuracy Validation Rule does not apply for the Worksheet Origin Manual

Relevant: Select this check box if the validation rule applies for Worksheet Origin Manual only or in combination with Worksheet Origin eMessaging
Worksheet Origin/eMessaging Selected: The Accuracy Validation Rule applies for Worksheet Origin eMessaging

Cleared: The Accuracy Validation Rule does not apply for the Worksheet Origin eMessaging

Relevant: Select this check box if the validation rule applies for Worksheet Origin eMessaging only or in combination with Worksheet Origin Manual

Maintain Accuracy Validation Template #

  1. Open System Administration from SICS desktop
  2. Open System Parameter Maintenance
  3. Select the Accounting section
  4. Select the Accuracy Validation
  5. Select the Accuracy Validation Template

Accuracy_Validation_Template_26.1.PNG Accuracy Validation Template

Add Accuracy Validation Template #

Accuracy Validation Templates are required to define various sets of validation rules to be performed for manually booked details or details booked through eMessaging interface entered on Technical Worksheets against corresponding business conditions. It is possible to define an unlimited number of templates.

  1. Click the Edit button on the Accuracy Validation Template page.
  2. Select the Accounting Accuracy Validation Template window. The window is now in edit mode.
  3. Select New from the pop-up menu in the Template container.
  4. The create Accounting Accuracy Validation Template window appears.
  5. Define the various attributes of the accuracy validation template.
  6. Click Save to update the new validation template.
  7. Click OK from the Accounting Accuracy Validation Templatewindow to store the new template.

Edit Accuracy Validation Template #

If an existing accuracy validation template needs to be modified, you can open the Edit Accounting Accuracy Validation Template window

  1. Click the Edit button on the Accuracy Validation Template page.
  2. Select the Accounting Accuracy Validation Template window. The window is now in edit mode.
  3. Select Edit from the pop-up menu in the Template container.
  4. The edit Accounting Accuracy Validation Template window appears.
  5. Change the actual attributes of the accuracy validation template.
  6. Click Save to update the validation template.
  7. Click OK from the Accounting Accuracy Validation Templatewindow to store the changes.

Remove Accuracy Validation Template #

An existing accuracy validation template may no longer be valid or it has been entered by mistake. You canthen remove the accuracy validation template.

  1. Click the Edit button on the Accuracy Validation Template page.
  2. Select the Accounting Accuracy Validation Template window. The window is now in edit mode.
  3. Select the Accuracy Validation Template, in the Template container, to be removed.
  4. Select Remove from the pop-up menu in the Template container.
  5. A Message appears asking you to confirm your action.
  6. Click Yes to confirm your action.
  7. Click OK in the Accuracy Validation Template window to update your changes

Note: It will not be possible to remove an Accuracy Validation Template if the template is included in an Accuracy Validation Template Identification. An error message will then be given (and you have to remove the rule from the Template Identification first).

System_Parameter_Accounting_AccuracyValidation_CreateTemplate.png

Create Accuracy Validation Template

Field Description
Template Name A name that describes the accuracy validation template

Values: Free text of letters/numbers, maximum 80 positions. The name must be a unique template name, if not, an error message is given

Mandatory: Yes
Worksheet Type The worksheet type (reference data type code 00167) that has to be checked

Values: The only value is Technical Account (Other Worksheet Types = for future use)

Mandatory: Yes
Pre Check Threshold - Base Currency The Currency that the pre check threshold is expressed in

Values: All currencies defined as Base Currencies are available

Mandatory: Yes, if Amount is given
Pre Check Threshold - Amount TAn amount used to determine whether any further check needs to be performed for a given Business Insured Period on the open Worksheet

Values: An amount with maximum 10 digits, number of decimals = 2, i.e. 9999999999,99

Mandatory: Yes, if Base Currency is given
Validation Rules and Deviation Threshold Here are the Assigned Accuracy Validation Rules to be used in the actual Accuracy Validation Template

Values: Any of the predefined Available Accuracy Validation Rules can be Assigned to the Accuracy Validation Template

Mandatory: To be able to execute any Accuracy Validation at least one Validation Rule must be selected

Maintain Accuracy Validation Template Identification #

  1. Open System Administration from SICS desktop
  2. Open System Parameter Maintenance
  3. Select the Accounting section
  4. Select the Accuracy Validation
  5. Select the Accuracy Validation Template Identification

System_Parameter_Accounting_AccuracyValidation_TemplateId.png Accuracy Validation Template Identification

Add Accuracy Validation Template Identification #

In the Accuracy Validation Template Identification, you define in what sequence the different Accuracy Validation Templates should be tested and the matching criteria to be used to identify a business insured period to be used for the different templates. In case the system does not find a match between the actual business insured period the detail is booked on and the matching criteria in the template in the first Sequence number, it will move to the next Sequence number. In case the system cannot find ay matching criteria; there could exist a default template with the highest sequence number defined to pick up bookings on business insured periods that does not match any other criteria on other templates.

  1. Click the edit button on the Accuracy Validation Template Identification page.
  2. Select the Edit Accounting Accuracy Validation Template Identification window. The window is now in edit mode.
  3. Select New from the pop-up menu.
  4. The create Accounting Accuracy Validation TemplateIdentification window appears.
  5. Define the various attributes for the accuracy validation template identification.
  6. Click Save to update the new validation template identification.
  7. Click OK from the Accounting Accuracy Validation Template Identificationwindow to store the new template identification.

Edit Accuracy Validation Template Identification #

If an existing accuracy validation template identification needs to be modified, you can open the Edit AccountingAccuracy Validation Template window

  1. Click the Edit button on the Accuracy Validation Template Identification page.
  2. Select the edit Accounting Accuracy Validation Template Identification window. The window is now in edit mode.
  3. Select Edit from the pop-up menu.
  4. The edit Accounting Accuracy Validation TemplateIdentification window appears.
  5. Change the actual attributes for the accuracy validation template identification.
  6. Click Save to update the validation template identification.
  7. Click OK from the Accounting Accuracy Validation TemplateIdentification window to store the changes

Remove Accuracy Validation Template Identification #

An existing accuracy validation templateidentification may no longer be valid or it has been entered by mistake. You canthen remove the accuracy validation template identification.

  1. Click the Edit button on the Accuracy Validation Template Identification page.
  2. Select the Edit Accounting Accuracy Validation Template Identification window. The window is now in edit mode.
  3. Select the Accuracy Validation Template Identification to be removed.
  4. Select Remove from the pop-up menu.
  5. A Message appears asking you to confirm your action.
  6. Click Yes to confirm your action.
  7. Click OK in the Accuracy Validation TemplateIdentification window to update your changes

System_Parameter_Accounting_AccuracyValidation_CreateTemplateId.png

Create/Edit Accuracy Validation Template Identification

Change Sequence of the Accuracy Validation Template Identifications #

In case the sequence number for a template has been given by mistake or you want for some other reasons to change the sequence of the existing template identifications.

  1. Click the Edit button on the Accuracy Validation Template Identification page.
  2. Select the Edit Accounting Accuracy Validation Template Identification window. The window is now in edit mode.
  3. Select the Accuracy Validation Template Identification to be moved.
  4. a) Select the Move Up or the Move Down buttons below the template container.
  5. b) Or select the Move Up or the Move Down options from the pop-up menu.
  6. Click OK in the Accuracy Validation TemplateIdentification window to update your changes

System_Parameter_Accounting_AccuracyValidation_TemplateIdSequence.png

Change Sequence of Accuracy Validation Template Identification

Field Description
Sequence Defines the sequence of the various rule sets (templates) to be used in the Accuracy Validation performed on the open Technical Worksheet

Values: The value in this field must be a number, starting with ‘1’ for the first row, ‘2’ for the second row etc. This number indicates which rule set/template to be checked first, second etc. The same sequence number must not be given for more than one row

Mandatory: Yes
Template Name The name of the template to be used in the Accuracy Validation. This is the template to be used when system finds matching criteria (refer to below) on the business insured period

Values: The only value is Technical Account (Other Worksheet Types = for future use)

Mandatory: Yes
Matching Criteria The configuration of the matching criteria is defined here

Values: It is possible to define one or more of the following attributes that can be used to identify a match on a business insured period;
Type of Business
Base Company
Cedents
Cedent Country
Brokers
BrokersCountry
Reinsurers
Reinsurer Country
Level of Business
Type of Participation
Main Class of Business
Reporting Unit (Category + Reporting Unit)
AccountingValidation Indicator - values according to reference data (table 1214) found on the Business Insured Period if given
Additional Classification dynamically selected

Mandatory: Yes, but only Level of Business

Define which Accuracy Validation Accept Categories requiring Additional Comment #

When Accuracy Validation is triggered it is required an Accounting Validation Accept Category (a value from reference table 1218 - Accuracy Validation Accept Category). It is possible to define that one or more of these categories require an additional Accuracy Validation Comment.

  1. Click the Edit button on the Accuracy Validation General page.
  2. Select Edit from the pop-up menu.
  3. The Select Accuracy Validation Accept Category window appears.
  4. Move wanted Accurancy Validation Accept Categoies from Available to Selected to indicate that these categories requiring Additional Comment.
  5. Click Close and then OK to save the selected values.

System_Parameter_Accounting_AccuracyValidation_General.png

System_Parameter_Accounting_AccuracyValidation_EditGeneral.png

Plausibility Checks - Post Booking Review (PBR) Reports #

You can define Plausibility Rules to check bookings made on Assumed Business, Closed Technical/Claim Worksheets. Nine different reports, Post Booking Reports (PBR) are available. Each report together with various information can be defined for a specific Base Company or on overall level. If at least one specific rule is defined for a Base Company then all needed PBRs for this Base Company must also be defined within this Base Company. Only when no PBR is defined for a Base Company then the Default rule will be used. What to be checked are predefined for the various rules and cannot be changed by the user. Which Entry Codes to be checked are according to selected Entry Code Groups in the system parameter, refer to fields Trigger Entry Code Group and Target Entry Code Group. The Entry Codes to be included in Trigger/Target Entry Code Groups may be defined in the Entry Code Group Category Entry Code Plausibility Check by your System Administrator. The bookings are checked on the lowest detail level (e.g. per currency/insured period/section/accounting classification) refer to Granularity-grouping. Only booking details (Trigger Entry Code Group) with an amount higher than the Threshold Amount in Base Currency are candidates for being reported (refer to definition in system parameter). Whether a PBR report is to be excluded or not for a specific Insured Period may be defined on the Assumed Business, PBR Exceptions tab.

Define Plausibility Rules #

  1. Select System Administrators from SICS Workstation Desktop
  2. Open System Parameter Maintenance
  3. Select Accounting
  4. Select Plausibility Rules

System_Parameter_Accounting_Plausibility_Rules.png

View Rule #

  1. Select a Default Rule or a Base Company Specific Rule if wanted
  2. Select View Rule
  3. View Plausibility Rule window is opened

Edit Rule #

  1. Select a Default Rule or a Base Company Specific Rule if wanted
  2. Select Edit Rule
  3. Edit the Rule
  4. Click OK

Delete Rule #

  1. Select a Default Rule or a Base Company Specific Rule if wanted
  2. Select Delete Rule
  3. System issues confirm message Are you sure you want to delete this item?
  4. Select Yes or No

Create Rule #

  1. Right mouse click in the section Default Rule or Base Company Specific Rule
  2. Select Create Default Rule or Create Base Company Specific Rule if wanted
  3. Depending on your choise, the Create Plausibility Rule window opens for a default Base Company or for a specific Base Company
  4. Select a Report and define mandatory fields
  5. Click OK to store the Plausibility Rule
  6. If selected report is already defined for the default Base Company/Specific Base Company, system issues the validation error message Rule is not unique for the selected Base Company and it is not possible to store the rule

ViewPlausibilityRule.PNG
View Plausibility Rule

Field Description - Plausibility Rule
Field Description
Base Company Determines the Base Company for which the rule applies

Values: blank (when Default Rules are to be defined)
name of selected Base Company (if Base Company Specific Rules are to be defined)

Mandatory: Yes
Report Determines the Post Booking Review report to be checked for the Base Company (refer to reference data Post Booking Review Report, code 01216)

Values: It is possible to change one of the following reports;
Change in Loss Incurred
Claims Booked But No Premium
Claim Paid Without Reserves Maintained
Loss Portfolio Entries With No Reserves
Portfolio Entries With Reserves
Negative Earned Premium
Positive Loss Reserve
Premium Portfolio Withdrawals With Reserves
Wrong Financial Period

Mandatory: Yes

Relevant: Select a report if you want the related check to be executed for the Assumed Business
Trigger Entry Code Group Determines the Entry Code(s) to be checked

Values: Entry Code Groups within the Entry Code Group Category Entry Code Plausibility Check

Mandatory: Yes, except for report Wrong Financial Period

Relevant: Select a group of Entry Codes to be checked
Target Entry Code Group Determines the Entry Code(s) which the Trigger Entry Codes are to be checked against

Values: Entry Code Groups within the Entry Code Group Category Entry Code Plausibility Check

Mandatory: Yes, but only for reports
Claims Booked But No Premium
Claim Paid Without Reserves
Loss Portfolio Entries With No Reserves
Portfolio Entries With Reserve_
Premium Portfolio Witdrawals With Reserves

Relevant: Select a group of Entry Codes to be checked against
Base Currency Select a currency for the threshold amount

Values: ISO currency code

Mandatory: Yes, but only when a threshold amount has been entered
Threshold Amount Only details with a higher threshold amount (in base currency) will be checked

Values: Amount, without decimals

Mandatory: Yes, but only when a base currency has been entered
Active Determines if the rule is active or not

Selected: Rule is active

Cleared: Rule is inactive

Relevant: Deselect this field if you want to eclude this plausibility check when executing the PBR report for the base company(-ies)
Business Types Specifies which Types of Business the rule apply for. Right mouse click in the field and select Edit Type of Business

Values: If none is selected, all Types of Business apply, else;
Non-Prop Direct
Non-Prop Facultative
Non-Prop Treaty
Proportional Direct
Proportional Facultative
Proportional Treaty

Mandatory: No

Relevant: Select a value to limit the Type of Business for which the report should be checked
Uw Year From Determines the underwriting year from which the check is to be executed

Values: Year
Mandatory: No

Relevant: Select a year to limit the underwriting to be checked. If no year is entered, all will be checked
Cut Off Dates System compares the Worksheet Closing Date of the loss detail against the given dates to find the current quarter closing to be checked

Values: 5 dates

Mandatory: Yes, but only for report Change in Loss Incurred

Relevant: Select a date in each of the Cut of Dates fields to determine for which quarter closing the report Change in Loss Incurred must be evaluated
Exclude Worksheet Origins Select Worksheet Origin(s) which should not be checked

Values:
Automatic
API
eMessaging
Automatic eMessaging

Relevant: Select one or more Worksheet Origins for which you do not want to run the check
Exclude Worksheet Origins for Business Types You may define that the exclusion of the Worksheet Origin eMessaging and Automatic eMessaging should apply only to sepcific Types of Business

Values:
Non-Prop Direct
Non-Prop Facultative
Non-Prop Treaty
Proportional Direct
Proportional Facultative
Proportional Treaty
Exclude Worksheet Origin Manual Set the Worksheet Origin Manual for which the rule applies

Selected: Worksheet Origin Manual are excluded from being checked

Cleared: Worksheet Origin Manual are not excluded from being checked

Relevant: Select Worksheet Origin Manual for which you do not want to run the check and this check is specifically applies to PBR Wrong Financial Period only
Exclude Worksheet Origin Manual for Business Types You may define that the exclusion of the Worksheet Origin Manual should apply only to sepcific Types of Business

Values:
Non-Prop Direct
Non-Prop Facultative
Non-Prop Treaty
Proportional Direct
Proportional Facultative
Proportional Treaty
Exclude UwYear = Accounting Year Determines if boking details with an Underwritng Year equal to the Account Year should be excluded for checking or not

Selected: Booking details with an Underwriting Year equal to the Accounting Year are excluded from being checked_

Cleared: Bbooking details with an Underwriting Year equal to the Accounting Year are not excluded from being checked_

Relevant: Select this field if you want that booking details with an Underwriting Year equal to the Accounting Year must be excluded from being checked


Plausibility Check #

The Plausibility Check will be triggered by giving a Worksheet Identifier in a WEB service. If only one rule is to be executed the name (code) of the specific rule must be entered (else all rules are being executed). Plausibility Rules are system defined (refer to reference data). The following will be checked for the different Post Booking Review Reports (PBR)


Positive Loss Reserves
#

If the selected Worksheet Identifier includes a Loss Reserve detail (refer to trigger criteria) higher than the Threshold Amount, the report checks the total cumulated Loss Reserve detail. If total cumulated Loss Reserve is positive for corresponding booking detail level as defined in the granularity grouping, (refer to below), the report shows a result

Field Description
Trigger criteria Loss Reserve detail with Entry Code(s) included according to Entry Code Group selected for this rule
PBR Exceptions This check is excluded if the field Positive Loss Reserve Accepted is selected for the related Insured Period of the Assumed Business
Granularity-grouping Business Identifier
Underwriting Year
Section
Accounting Classification
Booked Currency
Information inlcuded in Report PBR name
Business Identifier
Underwriting Year
Section name
Accounting Classification name
Booked Currency + PBR result Amount
Base Currency + PBR result Amount
Worksheet Identifier (that triggered the PBR report)



Negative Earned Premium
#

If the selected Worksheet Identifier includes cumulated Premium details (refer to trigger criteria) higher than the Threshold Amount, the report checks the total cumulated Premium details. If total cumulated Premium is negative for corresponding booking detail level as defined in the granularity grouping, (refer to below), the report shows a result

Field Description
Trigger criteria Earned Premium detail with Entry Code(s) included according to Entry Code Group selected for this rule
PBR Exceptions This check is excluded if the field Negative Earned Premium Accepted is selected for the related Insured Period of the Assumed Business
Granularity-grouping Business Identifier
Underwriting Year
Section
Accounting Classification
Booked Currency
Information inlcuded in Report PBR name
Business Identifier
Underwriting Year
Section name
Accounting Classification name
Booked Currency + PBR result Amount (i.e. cumulated negative premium amount)
Base Currency + PBR result Amount
Worksheet Identifier (that triggered the PBR report)



Change in Loss Incurred
#

The report checks if there has been a change in the Incurred Loss figures, higher than the Threshold Amount, for current quarter closing. The report is triggered even if a detail amount booked in the worksheet is zero if the aggregated value booked is above the Threshold Amount. If the aggregated value is zero then this worksheet is not triggered. But if the worksheet contains of two aggregation values, e.g. two different Accounting Classifications on the details, and one aggregation amount is zero and the other aggregation amount is different from zero, then the worksheet is reported for the aggregation amount that is different from zero. The current quarter closing is found by comparing the Date of Booking of the Loss detail(s) in the actual worksheet for the granularity grouping and with Cut-off dates according to the relevant PBR system parameter definitions. Only loss figures with a worksheet closing date within the relevant quarter closing are evaluated. E.g. Cut-off dates = 17.02.2017, 17.05.2017, 17.08.2017. 17.11.2017 and 17.02.2018. Actual worksheet with worksheet closing date = 13.09.2017. The report evaluates all Loss bookings with a worksheet closing dates between 17.08.2017 and 16.11.2017

Field Description
Trigger criteria Claim detail with Entry Code(s) according to Entry Code Group selected for this rule
PBR Exceptions This check is excluded if the field Ignore Change in Loss Incurred is selected for the related Insured Period of the Assumed Business
Granularity-grouping Business Identifier
Underwriting Year
Section
Accounting Classification
Booked Currency
Information inlcuded in Report PBR name
Business Identifier
Underwriting Year
Section name
Accounting Classification name
Booked Currency + PBR result Amount (i.e. identified changed Incurred Loss amount)
Base Currency + PBR result Amount (i.e. identified changed Incurred Loss amount)
Worksheet Identifier (that triggered the PBR report)



Wrong Financial Period
#

The report checks the Accounting Period From Date of the booking details made with the same granularity grouping as on the actual worksheet. If the Accounting Period From Date is greater than the Booking Date of the booking details with the same granularity grouping, the report shows a result

Field Description
Trigger criteria Closed worksheet with the given Worksheet Identifier
PBR Exceptions This check is excluded if the field Wrong Financial Period Accepted is selected for the related Insured Period of the Assumed Business
Granularity-grouping Business Identifier
Underwriting Year
Section
Accounting Classification
Booked Currency
Information inlcuded in Report PBR name
Business Identifier
Underwriting Year
Section name
Accounting Classification name
Booked Currency
Worksheet Identifier (that triggered the PBR report)



Claims Booked But No Premium
#

If Claim bookings (refer Trigger Entry Code Group) are identified on the actual Worksheet, system checks if there are any relevant Premium bookings (refer Target Entry Code Group) on this Worksheet or an any other Worksheet. If no cumulated Premium detail amount or Premium detail amount = 0,00 is found for any currency, for the same granularity grouping, report shows a result

Field Description
Trigger criteria Claim Paid details (according to selected group
PBR Exceptions This check is excluded if the field Claims Paid But No Premium Accepted is selected for the related Insured Period of the Assumed Business
Exclusions Type of Business and Underwriting Year lower than the entered year (if defined for this rule in system parameter)
Granularity-grouping Business Identifier
Underwriting Year
Accounting Classification
Information inlcuded in Report PBR name
Business Identifier
Underwriting Year
Accounting Classification name
Booked Currency
Worksheet Identifier (that triggered the PBR report)



Claims Paid Without Reserve Maintained
#

If Claims Paid bookings (refer Trigger Entry Code Group) are identified on the actual Worksheet and is higher than Threshold amount, system checks if there are any relevant Loss Reserve bookings (refer Target Entry Code Group). If no Loss Reserve detail amount is found with a Date of Booking prior to the Date of Booking for the Claims Paid booking on the actual worksheet, for any currency, for the same granularity grouping, report shows a result

Field Description
Trigger criteria Claim Paid details (according to selected group)
Target criteria Loss Reserve details (according to selected group)
PBR Exceptions This check is excluded if the field Ignore Claims Paid Without Reserves Maintained is selected for the related Insured Period of the Assumed Business
This check is also excluded if the Accounting Year is equal the Underwriting Year and the tick box Exclude UwYear = Accounting Year is selected in this rule.
Granularity-grouping Business Identifier
Underwriting Year
Section
Accounting Classification
Information inlcuded in Report PBR name
Business Identifier
Underwriting Year
Section name
Accounting Classification name
Booked Currency + PBR result Amount (i.e. Claims paid amount)
Base Currency + PBR result Amount (i.e. Claims paid amount)
Worksheet Identifier (that triggered the PBR report)



Loss Portfolio Withdrawal With Reserve
#

If a Loss Portfolio Withdrawal booking (refer Trigger Entry Code Group) is identified on the actual Worksheet, system checks the Loss Reserve balance (refer Target Entry Code Group). If Loss Reserve balance amount found for the same granularity grouping is not zero, report shows a result. If Loss Reserve balance amount is < Threshold amount, PBR is not triggered

Field Description
Trigger criteria Loss Portfolio details (according to selected group)
Target criteria Loss Reserve details (according to selected group)
PBR Exceptions This check is excluded if the field Loss PTF Withdrawals with Reserves Accepted is selected for the related Insured Period of the Assumed Business
Granularity-grouping Business Identifier
Underwriting Year
Section
Accounting Classification
Booked Currency
Information inlcuded in Report PBR name
Business Identifier
Underwriting Year
Section name
Accounting Classification name
Booked Currency + PBR result Amount (i.e. Loss Reserve balance amount)
Base Currency + PBR result Amount (i.e. Loss Reserve balance amount)
Worksheet Identifier (that triggered the PBR report)



Premium Portfolio Withdrawals With Reserve
#

If a Premium Portfolio Withdrawal booking (refer Trigger Entry Code Group) is identified on the actual Worksheet, system checks the Premium Reserve balance (refer Target Entry Code Group). If Premium Reserve balance amount found for the same granularity grouping is not zero, report shows a result. If Premium Reserve balance amount is < Threshold amount, PBR is not triggered

Field Description
Trigger criteria Premium Portfolio details (according to selected group)
Target criteria Premium Reserve details (according to selected group)
PBR Exceptions This check is excluded if the field Premium PTF Withdrawals with Reserves Accepted is selected for the related Insured Period of the Assumed Business
Granularity-grouping Business Identifier
Underwriting Year
Section
Accounting Classification
Booked Currency
Information inlcuded in Report PBR name
Business Identifier
Underwriting Year
Section name
Accounting Classification name
Booked Currency + PBR result Amount (i.e. Premium Reserve balance amount)
Base Currency + PBR result Amount (i.e. Premium Reserve balance amount)
Worksheet Identifier (that triggered the PBR report)


Loss Portfolio Entries With No Reserve
#

If a Loss Portfolio Entry booking (refer Trigger Entry Code Group) is identified on the actual Worksheet, system checks the relevant Loss Reserve bookings (refer Target Entry Code Group) on this Worksheet and on any closed worksheets. If the cumulated Loss Reserve balance amount found for the same granularity grouping is zero, report shows a result. If Loss Reserve balance amount is < Threshold amount, PBR is not triggered

Field Description
Trigger criteria Loss Portfolio details (according to selected group)
Target criteria Loss Reserve details (according to selected group)
PBR Exceptions This check is excluded if the field Loss PTF Entries with No Reserves Accepted is selected for the related Insured Period of the Assumed Business
Granularity-grouping Business Identifier
Underwriting Year
Section
Accounting Classification
Booked Currency
Information inlcuded in Report PBR name
Business Identifier
Underwriting Year
Section name
Accounting Classification name
Booked Currency + PBR result Amount (i.e. Loss Portfolio Entry amount)
Base Currency + PBR result Amount (i.e. Loss Portfolio Entry amount)
Worksheet Identifier (that triggered the PBR report)



Government Tax Table #

In the Government Tax Table system parameter you can define all attributes necessary for the system to perform Automatic Booking of Government Tax and Government Tax Validations on Technical/Claim Worksheet for an Assumed Business. Bookings to be validated may either be manually booked on the worksheet or automatically made through eMessaging. The combinations of attributes are further referred to as ‘Government Tax Rules’. The system will use information on the business/insured period, classification and business partners to find the matching Government Tax Rule to be applied for the automatic booking/validation. The Government Tax Table system parameter is dependent on the system parameter Accounting/Miscellaneous/‘Government Tax Framework in use’ being active.

Maintain Government Tax Rules #

  1. Open System Administration from SICS desktop
  2. Open System Parameter Maintenance
  3. Select the Accounting section
  4. Select the Government Tax Table

System_Parameter_Accounting_Government_Tax_Table.png

Create Government Tax Rule #

You create a Create Government Tax Rule when you want to be able to automatically book the Government Taxes or to validate the Government Tax Target detail present on the Technical/Claim Worksheet based on the respective Rule in the Government Tax Table or to validate the Government Tax Target detail present on the Technical/Claim Worksheet. Automatic booking of Government Taxes are possible by selecting the option Automatic Booking of Government Taxes from the pop-up menu on the worksheet or if the flag Automatic Booking in the Government Tax Table is selected. The validations ensure that the Government Tax detail amounts are in accordance with the tax percentage defined for the respective rule (Trigger Entry Codes are Entry Codes defined in an Entry Code Group within the Entry Code Group Category ‘VAT/Government Tax Calculation Basis’ defined in the Entry. Target Entry Codes are Entry Codes defined in an Entry Code Group within the Entry Code Group Category ‘Government Tax Target’)

  1. Click on the Government Tax Table in system parameter.
  2. Right mouse click and select Create Rule from the pop-up menu in the Government Tax Table.
  3. The Create Government Tax Table window appears.
  4. Define the various attributes of the Government Tax Rule. 5 Click OK from the Government Tax Table window to store the new rule.

Edit Government Tax Rule #

If an existing Government Tax Rule needs to be changed, you can open the Edit Government Tax Rules window .

  1. Click on the Government Tax Table in system parameter
  2. Right mouse click and select Edit Rule from the pop-up menu in the Government Tax Table
  3. The Edit Government Tax Table window appears
  4. Change the attributes of the respective Government Tax Rule
  5. Click OK from the Government Tax Table window to store the changes

View Government Tax Rule #

If you want to inspect an existing Government Tax Rule, you can open the Edit Government Tax Rules window in view mode .

  1. Click on the Government Tax Table in system parameter
  2. Right mouse click and select View Rule from the pop-up menu in the Government Tax Table
  3. The View Government Tax Table window appears

View_Goverment_Tax_Rules_26.1.PNG

Create Government Tax Rule

Field Description
Government Tax Rule Ref A number automatically updated to the rule.

Values: Sequential unique number set by the system

Functional Impact: The Government Tax Rule Ref is automatically updated on the Technical/Claim Worksheet for the Target Entry Code when Automatic Booking of Government Taxes or when the Government Tax Validation is performed

Mandatory: Yes
Active Determines if the rule is active or not

Selected: Rule is active

Cleared: Rule is inactive

Relevant: Deselect this field if you want to exclude this rule when Government Tax Validation is performed on the worksheet
Tax Country The Tax Country (reference item ‘Location’) that has to be checked against the business insured period of the booking detail

Values: Country

Functional Impact: The Tax Country is automatically updated on the Technical/Claim Worksheet for the Target Entry Code when Automatic Booking of Government Taxe’ or when the Government Tax Validation is performed


Mandatory: Yes
Base Company Affected The Base Company (Business Partner) that has to be checked against the business insured period of the booking detail

Values: All active/inactive Business Partners flagged as ‘Base Company’

Mandatory: Yes
Base Company within Tax Country Determines if the the Base Company is within the Tax Country or not

Values: It is possible to select one of the following values;
No
Not Specified (default value)
Yes

Relevant: Select Yes if you want to define that the Base Company is withih the Tax Country
Cedent within Tax Country Determines if the the Cedent is within the Tax Country or not

Values: It is possible to select one of the following values;
No
Not Specified (default value)
Yes

Relevant: Select Yes if you want to define that the Cedent is withih the Tax Country
Cedent within EU Determines if the the Cedent is within EU or not

Values: It is possible to select one of the following values;
No
Not Specified (default value)
Yes

Relevant: Select Yes if you want to define that the Cedent is withih EU
Producer Available Determines if the Producer is available or not on the business

Values: It is possible to select one of the following values;
No
Not Specified (default value)
Yes

Relevant: When the user wants the system to trigger the matching rule for Govt Tax Calculation/Validation in the worksheet for a created trigger details, based on the values specified in the field “Producer Available”

No: System will trigger the Govt Tax rule for a trigger EC created in the worksheet, when a producer is not available on the business. It will not validate further the additional layer “Producer Within Tax Country” & “Producer within EU” as these fields are disable and defaulted to Not Specified

Not Specified: System will trigger the Govt Tax rule for a trigger EC in the worksheet, irrespective of Producer is available or not on the business. It will further validate the additional layer “Producer Within Tax Country” & “Producer within EU” as these fields are enabled

Yes: System will trigger the Govt Tax rule for a trigger EC in the worksheet, when a Producer is available on the business. It will further validate the additional layer “Producer Within Tax Country” & “Producer within EU” as these fields are enabled
Producer within Tax Country Determines if the the Producer is within the Tax Country or not. The field is disabled if the value for Producer Available is set to No.

Values: It is possible to select one of the following values;
No
Not Specified (default value)
Yes

Relevant: Select Yes if you want to trigger this rule only if the Producer is within the Tax Country. If no Producer is found on the business then the rule is not triggered, independent if this value is Yes or No.
Producer within EU Determines if the the Producer is within EU or not. The field is disabled if the value for Producer Available is set to No.

Values: It is possible to select one of the following values;
No
Not Specified (default value)
Yes

Relevant: Select Yes if you want to trigger this rule only if the Producer is withih EU. If no Producer is found on the business then the rule is not triggered, independent if this value is Yes or No.
Broker within Tax Country Determines if the the Broker is within the Tax Country or not

Values: It is possible to select one of the following values;
No
Not Specified (default value)
Yes

Relevant: Select Yes if you want to define that the Broker is withih the Tax Country. NB! If more than one Broker is defined on the actual insured period, then the system will use the Broker with the Broker Task Flag Broker on the Partners tab. If none is defined as Flag Broker, then the system will use the first Broker on the Partners tab
Cedent in State Determines if the rule must be considered no matter if there is a Cedent State defined on the Business Insured Period or not or if the rule must be considered only if the Cedent on the Business Insured Period is included/excluded in one of listed States. States may be listed by right mouse click and selecting Edit Cedent in State + selecting one or more of the available State(s)

Values: It is possible to select one of the following values;
Include + list one or more States
Exclude + list one or more States
All (default value)

Broker in State Determines if the rule must be considered no matter if there is a Broker State defined on the Business Insured Period or not or if the rule must be considered only if the Broker on the Business Insured Period is included/excluded in one of listed States. States may be listed by right mouse click and selecting Edit Broker in State + selecting one or more of the available State(s). NB! If more than one Broker is defined on the actual insured period, then the system will use the Broker with the Broker Task Flag Broker on the Partners tab. If none is defined as Flag Broker, then the system will use the first Broker on the Partners tab

Values: It is possible to select one of the following values;
Include + list one or more States
Exclude + list one or more States
All (default value)

Cover Area Determines if the rule must be considered no matter which Cover Area is(are) defined on the Business Insured Period or if the rule must be considered only if the Cover Area(s) on the Business Insured Period is(are) according to the listed included/excluded Cover Area(s). The Cover Area available in the rule is Countries and Country Groups, and only Countries and Country Groups are considered on the Business/Insured Period/Section/Classification if booking on a technical worksheet and on the Claim’s Locations if booking on a claim worksheet. If the rule has defined an Included Country in the Cover Area, then the rule is considered if the Section Classification contains this Country (also if it is part of a Country Group) for a technical worksheet and if the Locations on the Claim contains this Country for a claim worksheet. If the rule has defined an Excluded Country in the Cover Area, then this rule is considered if this Country is NOT among the countries on the business/claim. Cover Area(s) may be listed by right mouse click and selecting Edit Cover Areas + selecting one or more of the available Cover Area(s)

Values: It is possible to select one of the following values;
Include + list one or more Cover Area(s)
Exclude + list one or more Cover Area(s)
All (default value)

Class of Business Determines if the rule must be considered no matter which Class of Business is found in the actual booking detail’s Accounting Classification or if the rule must be considered only if the Class of Business in the Accounting Classification is according to the listed included/excluded Class(es) of Business. Class(es) of Business may be listed by right mouse click and selecting Edit Class of Business + selecting one or more of the available Classes of Business

Values: It is possible to select one of the following values;
Include + list one or more Class(es) of Business
Exclude + list one or more Class(es) of Business
All (default value)

Special Taxes for Business Partners Determines if the rule must be considered no matter if there is Special Taxes for Business Partner(s) defined on the Business Insured Period or not or if the rule must be considered only if the Special Taxes for Business Partner on the Business Insured Period is included/excluded in one of listed Business Partners. Business Partners may be listed by right mouse click and selecting Edit Special Taxes for Business Partners + selecting one or more of the available Business Partner(s)

Values: It is possible to select one of the following values;
Include + list one or more Business Partner(s)
Exclude + list one or more Business Partner(s)
All (default value)

Trigger Entry Code Group The Entry Code Group including the Trigger Entry Codes for which the Government Tax amount is calculated based on the respective rule.

Values: Available groups are all groups defined in the Entry Code Group Category ‘VAT/Government Tax Calculation Basis’ e.g. ‘Premium’ including one or more Premium Entry Codes.
Mandatory: Yes

Target Entry Code Group The Entry Code Group including a Target Entry Code being the Government Tax result Entry Code assigned to the calculated Government Tax amount.

Values: Available groups are all groups defined in the Entry Code Group Category ‘Government Tax Target’ e.g. ‘Premium Government Tax’ including one and only one Government Tax Premium Entry Code.
Mandatory: Yes

Default Sign An output field showing the sign of the Target Entry Code

Values: Positive or Negative according to the definition of the respective Entry Code in the Entry Code Maintenance

Functional Impact: None

Mandatory: Yes

Switch Sign Determines if the Target entry code will be booked with the same sign as Default Sign or opposite the Default Sign. By default, it is always cleared and can be selected while creating a Government Tax rule or editing one.

Selected:- The sign of the Target entry code is opposite to that of the Default Sign.

Cleared:- The sign of the Target entry code is the same as the Default Sign.

Functional Impact: Select this checkbox if you want to use the Target entry code with the sign opposite to the sign defined in the entry code properties of the Target entry code(also mentioned as Default Sign in the Government Tax rule) .

Mandatory: No.
Credit/Debit It is an output field to display the nature of the output of the Target entry code. It is always disabled and when the Target entry code is selected then it gets its value based on the below table.
Credit_debit.PNG
Calculate Tax on Gross Determines if the Tax is to be calculated on Gross or Net

Selected: Tax is to be calculated on Gross

Cleared: Tax is to be calculated on Net (default value)

Relevant: Select this field if you want the system to perform automatic booking of Government Taxes on Gross. E.g. Premium booked on worksheet = 1.000, Tax 6%, system makes booking of Premium 943,40/Tax 56,60. Formula: X + X * 6/100 = 1.000

Tax Applicable Determines if the Tax is applicable or not

Selected: Tax is applicable

Cleared: Tax is not applicable, just for information

Relevant: Select this field if you want the system to perform automatic booking of Government Taxes and to validate Government Tax detail based on respective rule. (Refer to option ‘Automatic Booking of Government Taxes’ on worksheet and flag ‘Automatic Booking’ in the Government Tax Table).

Automatic Booking Determines if automatic booking of the Government Tax detail must be performed or not for the business insured period matching the respective rule.



Selected: Government Tax detail is automatically booked for the business insured period matching the respective rule

Cleared: No Government Tax detail is automatically booked for the business insured period matching the respective rule

Relevant: Select this field if you want SICS to automatically book Government Tax details based on the respective Government Tax Rule. The automatic booking of the Government Tax detail will be performed when selecting Apply or Change Status on the worksheet or when processing an eMessaging TechAccount. Note that no new booking will be made if Target Entry Code has already been booked for the respective rule.

Always Stop if Trigger/Target EC is booked Determines if an error message must be issued or not when user tries to Apply or Change Status on a worksheet or Process an eMessaging.

Selected: An error message is issued indicating that user must check the details. User must select a Government Tax Category and enter a Government Tax Comment to be able to close the worksheet

Cleared: The worksheet may be closed

Relevant: Select this field if you want the system to issue an error message ‘Government Taxes must be checked by the user’. Worksheet cannot be closed until a Government Tax Category is selected and a Government Tax Comment is given by the user.

Tax % Applicable valid From Date A date which determines from which date the current Government Tax Rule is valid

Values: A date

Functional Impact: The Government Tax Rule is valid from this date

Mandatory: Yes

Tax % Applicable valid To Date A date which determines the date the current Government Tax Rule is valid to

Values: A date

Functional Impact: Determines the end date (if any) of the current Government Tax Rule

Mandatory: No

Tax % Calculation Basis Determines on which basis the applicable Tax % is calculated

Values: Either ‘Acct Period End Date’ or ‘Booking Date’ (refer to reference data -Tax Percentage Calculation Basis’)

Functional Impact: Determines the type of date selected in the fields ‘Tax % Applicable valid From/To Date’ of the current Government Tax Rule

Mandatory: Yes

Base Currency The Base Currency of the Threshold Amount

Values: Base Currency

Functional Impact: Determines the currency to which the Threshold amount is converted to

Mandatory: Yes

Tolerance Limit An amount defining the tolerance limit (threshold amount)

Values: Amount

Functional Impact: Threshold amount up to and including the entered amount is accepted, higher amount gives an error message. The amount entered on the worksheet is converted to Base Currency amount according to newest daily rate and compared to the amount defined in this field

Mandatory: Yes

Tax Type Determines what kind of Tax the Government Tax detail is

Values: Values from the reference data ‘Tax Type’

Functional Impact: Updates the value in field ‘Tax Type’ on the worksheet

Mandatory: Yes

Tax % The Tax percentage used to automatically calculate the Government Tax Target detail or to validate the Government Tax Target detail booked on the Worksheet

Values: Percentage (nn,nnnnnn)

Functional Impact: Automatic Booking of Government Tax detail, Government Tax Validation and update of Tax percentage in field ‘Tax %’ on the worksheet

Mandatory: Yes

Automatic Instalment Booking #

You can define that the Instalments on a business/insured period should be automatically booked when the Registration Complete flag is manually set to True on the Life Cycle tab on an Assumed Business. This option is enabled only when the system parameter Require Complete Registration is activated on the Business, Conditions, Miscellaneous page.

Activate the Automatic Instalment Booking #

  1. Select System Administrators from SICS Workstation Desktop
  2. Open System Parameter Maintenance
  3. Select Accounting
  4. Select the Automatic Instalment Booking

System_Parameter_Accounting_AutomaticInstalmentBooking.png

Field Descriptions - Automatic Instalment Booking #

Applicable for: P&C, Cede

Field Description
Book Instalments automatically when setting registration complete flag: When instalments have been created on an insured period and the Registration Complete flag is selected the system will try to book all instalments on all sections on this insured period. The worksheet will be Closed automatically. An informational message will be presented for the user when this happens. Instalments marked Man. Booked = Yes, Autom. Booked = Yes/Partially or Auto Book = No will be excluded from this auto booking process. If the automatic created instalment worksheet cannot be closed of any reason, e.g. missing share conditions or missing accounting classification the process will be interrupted, and the worksheet will not be created, additional the Registration Complete flag will be switched off.
If the actual business is hit by any of the defined Exclusion Rules, see below, then the automatic booking of instalment will not take place.
The instalment booking details will be split by AC % split if this is applicable.

Selected: This will activate the automatic booking of instalments when the Registration Complete flag is set on the Life Cycle tab for an Insured Period. The business/insured period can be excluded from this function if it is hit by the classification exclusion rules, see the description of the Exclusion Rules below.

Cleared: No automatic booking of instalments when the Registration Complete flag is set on the Life Cycle tab for an Insured Period

Relevant when: Instead of identifying which Business/IP’s have been set the Registration Complete flag and then book the instalments manually it would make more sense to trigger the respective instalment bookings automatically in SICS at the moment when this Registration Complete flag is set

Exclusion Rules #

In case some businesses should be excluded from the automatic booking of instalments, activated by the above system parameter Book Instalments automatically when setting registration complete flag, it is possible to do this by making Exclusion Rules. Exclusion rules can be a combination of Partners on the business (Reinsurer/Cedent/Broker) and Administration Tasks assigned (e.g. Payment Task), Classification of the business (e.g. Type of Business, Main Class of Business) and the Administration Channel defined on the Insured Period tab.

View Exclusion Rules #

  1. In view mode, highlight one Exclusion Rule and select the option View from the pop-up menu

Define Exclusion Rules #

  1. In edit mode, select the option New from the pop-up menu
  2. Select Exclusion Criteria Filter by selecting one or more Reinsurers (Base Companies), and/or selecting one or more Cedents with matching Payment Tasks if wanted and/or selecting one or more Brokers with matching Payment Tasks if wanted, and/or selecting various Classifications and/or selecting one Administration Channel

Example of exclusions: Reinsurer Base Company A and Broker Broker B with Payment task Type of Participation Excess of Loss and Type of Business Non Prop Treaty Administration Channel B2B The above exclusion will exclude the following businesses: All Non Prop Treaties with Excess of Loss as Type of Participation with the following partners Base Company A as Reinsurer and Broker B as Broker if this Broker has the Payment task and the Administration Channel is B2B The business must contain ONE value of each partner columns (Reinsurer, Cedent and Broker, if they are defined with a value) and all the criteria values in the other columns in the Exclusion Rule to be excluded. If only one or some of the criteria match the information on the business - except from the partner columns, the automatic booking will still take place.

Edit Exclusion Rules #

  1. In edit mode, highlight one Exclusion Rule and select the option Edit from the pop-up menu
  2. Maintain any of the Exclusion Criteria Filter of Reinsurer, Cedent, Brooker, Classification and/or Administration Channel

Remove Exclusion Rules #

  1. In edit mode, highlight one Exclusion Rule and select the option Remove from the pop-up menu